Bradford-White Corp EF100T399(E)*(N Water Heater User Manual

GL
Operator’s Manual
Symbols
Trademarks®:
RAdBlue® is a registered trademark of the
German Association of the Automotive
Industry (VDA).
RBabySmartTM
is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth®
is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP®
and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of Daimler.
RHomeLink®
is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or
life, or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
X
This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X
A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page
This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
YY
This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is
continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.
Our company and staff congratulate you on
the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease
read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease
follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease
pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
Contents
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Safety and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
2
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
115V AC Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
3-zone automatic climate control
see Climate control system
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System) . . 78
4MATIC
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
A
ABS (Antilock Brake System) . . . . . . . 76
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 347
Accessory weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Air bag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Distance warning function . . . . . . . 181
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) . . . . . . . 252
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
see Headlamps
Active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Adaptive Damping System
see ADS
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405, 437
Capacity, AdBlue® tank . . . . . . . . . 433
Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Additives
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Address change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) . . . 185
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Emergency call upon deployment . 252
Front, driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Front, passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41, 56, 381, 382
Knee bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Side impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Window curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Air conditioning refrigerant and
lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 220
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Air pressure
see Tire inflation pressure
Air pressure (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . 208, 222
Air suspension program . . . . . . . . . . 185
Comfortable driving style . . . . . . . . 185
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Sporty driving style . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Suspension tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Vehicle level control . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 221
Alarm system
see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326, 401
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) . . . . . . . . . 193
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . . 439
Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror . 111
Antilock Brake System
see ABS
Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . 81
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Aquaplaning
see Hydroplaning
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Aspect ratio (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Audio/DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . 112
Automatic central locking . . . . . 89, 163
3
Index
Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . .
Automatic interior lighting control .
Automatic locking when driving . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear range indicator . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gearshifting malfunctions . . . . . . .
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . .
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . .
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel gearshift control . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission position indicator . . .
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . .
AUX socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
120
163
135
141
139
139
135
141
181
139
140
137
140
139
137
137
242
432
B
BabySmartTM
Air bag deactivation system . . . . . . . 57
Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Backrest
see Seats
4
Backup lamps
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Bar (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . 77
Batteries, SmartKey
Checking condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Battery, Vehicle
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Bead (tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Beverage holders
see Cup holders
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
BlueTEC
AdBlue® tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405, 433
Brake fluid
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Brake lamps
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . 388
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Brake pads
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 302
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) . . 24
California retail buyers and
lessees, important notice for . . . . . . . 21
Calls (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Can holders
see Cup holders
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Cargo compartment
Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Cargo volume, expanding . . . . . . . . 235
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Cargo compartment cover blind . . . 239
Carpets, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Index
Center console
Lower part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Central locking
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 163
Locking/unlocking from inside . . . . 89
Central locking/unlocking switch . . . 89
Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Blocking of rear window operation . . 74
Child safety locks (rear doors) . . . . . 73
Indicator lamp, front passenger
front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Infant and child restraint systems . . 68
LATCH-type child seat anchors . . . . 72
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Tether anchorage points . . . . . . . . . 71
Child safety
see Children in the vehicle
Chrome-plated exhaust tip,
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Climate control system
3-zone automatic climate control . 210
Air conditioning, cooling . . . . 206, 217
Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . 435
Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 220
Air recirculation mode . . . . . . 208, 222
Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 221
Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . 206, 218
Climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Deactivating system . . . . . . . 205, 217
Front defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 221
Residual engine heat (REST) . 209, 223
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 219
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 160
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cold tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . 294
Collapsible wheel chock . . . . . . . . . . 326
COMAND system
see separate COMAND system
operating instructions
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Comfort submenu
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . 163
Fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Compass
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . 148
Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 157
Control system menus . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Audio/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Vehicle configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Vehicle status message memory . . 156
Control system submenus . . . . . . . . 151
Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Coolant
Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . 439
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356, 357, 359
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps 119
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Last stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Customer Assistance Center
see CAC
5
Index
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Date, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Daytime running lamp mode . . 116, 161
Deep water
see Standing water
Defroster
Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 221
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Department of Transportation
see DOT
Diesel engine
preglow indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . 35
Diesel fuel
see Fuel
Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
A few words about . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 351
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Difficulties
While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
With starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6
Digital clock
see Clock
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Dimensions (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Direction of rotation (tires) . . . . . . . 275
Displays
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Maintenance service indicator . . . . 316
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Outside temperature . . . . . . . 150, 159
Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 165
Vehicle status message memory . . 156
Vehicle system settings . . . . . . . . . 157
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Cleaning system sensor . . . . . . . . . 321
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Distance warning function . . . . . . . 181
Driving hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Last stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Sensor cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Warning and indicator lamps . 174, 377
Door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Door handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Doors
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) . . 85
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . 84
Locking/unlocking from outside . . . 84
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Opening from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . 255
Unlocking (Mechanical key) . . . . . . 384
DOT (Department of
Transportation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Downhill Speed Regulation
see DSR
Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Driving
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 299
In winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Through standing water . . . . . . . . . 302
With Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Driving and parking
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Index
Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 302
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4-ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
EBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Driving systems
Air suspension program . . . . . . . . . 185
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) . 182
Off-road driving program . . . . . . . . 185
Parktronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Driving tips, automatic
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) . . 182
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
E
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . 109, 163
EBP (Electronic Brake
Proportioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Electrical system
Improper work on or modifications . 23
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP®
Electronic Traction System
see 4-ETS
Emergency, in case of
Battery, jump starting . . . . . . . . . . 410
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . 118
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Emergency calls
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Emergency engine shutdown . . . . . . 417
Emergency operations
Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Locking/unlocking the vehicle . . . 384
Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Emergency Tensioning Device
see ETD
Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
System warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Engine
Brake-in recommendations . . . . . . 264
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Malfunction indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 379
Maximum engine speed . . . . . . . . . 423
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Engine coolant
see Coolant
Engine oil
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Recommended engine oils and oil
filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 77
4-ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333, 347
Off-road ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Trailer stabilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
ETD (Emergency Tensioning
Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7
Index
Express operation
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . 111
Fold-in function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Power folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Exterior view of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 28
F
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . 61
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Lowering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Mounting the spare wheel . . . . . . . 398
Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398, 428
Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fluids
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . 432
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
8
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364, 365
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Four-wheel drive
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
Front air bags
see Air bags
Front axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Front lamps
see Headlamps
Front passenger front air bag . . . . . . 50
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41, 51, 381, 382
Front seat head restraints
see Head restraints
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 299
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Capacity, fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 433
Fuel consumption statistics . . . . . . 165
Fuel filler flap and cap . . . . . . . . . . 265
Fuel tank reserve warning lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 378
Premium unleaded gasoline
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 433, 435
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Opening manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Fuel system, bleeding (diesel
engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Fuel tank
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Fuel filler flap and cap . . . . . . . . . . 265
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Fuse box in cargo compartment . . 417
G
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . 43, 256
Gasoline
see Fuel
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) . . 294
Gear range
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 139
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Index
Shifting into optimal . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Gearshift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 344
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Transmission position indicator . . . 137
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 137
Generator
see Alternator
Global locking/unlocking
see Key, SmartKey
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Gross Axle Weight Rating
see GAWR
Gross Trailer Weight
see GTW
Gross Vehicle Weight
see GVW
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
see GVWR
GTW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) . . . . . . 294
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
H
Halogen headlamps
see Headlamps
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning . . 323
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . 119
Headlamps
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps . . . . . . 114
Adjusting aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . 115
Bi-Xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 388
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 118
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 115
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Headliner, cleaning and care of . . . . 323
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Active head restraints . . . . . . . 66, 385
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Height adjustment
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Vehicle level control . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . 118, 388
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . . 388
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Hinged quarter windows . . . . . . . . . 126
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
HVAC
see Climate control system
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
I
Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Identification number, vehicle
(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 97, 129
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Indicator lamps
see Lamps, indicator and warning
Infant and child restraint systems
see Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure
see Tires, Inflation pressure
9
Index
Inside door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 147
Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Instrument lighting
see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Instrument panel
see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls
see Cockpit
Interior lighting
Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Emergency lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Front reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Rear reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . 111
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . 112
Interior storage spaces
see Storage compartments
Intermittent wiping
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
10
K
Key, Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Checking batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 87
Global locking (KEYLESS-GO)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Global locking (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . 85
Global unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Global unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . . . 85
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO . . . 86
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353, 354
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Opening and closing the windows . 127
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Replacing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Restoring to factory setting . . . . 85, 87
Selective setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 87
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 95
KEYLESS-GO
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 96
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) . . . . . . 294
Knee bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
L
Labels
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Emission control information . . . . . 422
Lamps, exterior
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 371
Battery (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Distance warning lamp . 174, 181, 377
Engine malfunction . . . . . . . . . 35, 379
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 376
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Front passenger front air bag off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41, 51, 381, 382
Fuel tank reserve . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 378
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Index
Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 374
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 375
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Language, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
LATCH-type child seat anchors
see Children in the vehicle
License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Light alloy wheels, cleaning . . . . . . . 322
Lighter
see Cigarette lighter
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Daytime running lamp mode . . . . . 116
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Loading
see Vehicle loading
Locator lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Lock button
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO) . . . . . . . 87
Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Loss of
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Service and Warranty Information
booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOW RANGE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
115
388
115
142
352
143
432
103
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Calling up service indicator . . . . . . 317
Clearing service indicator
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Resetting service indicator . . . . . . 317
Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Service indicator message . . . . . . . 316
Service term exceeded . . . . . . . . . 316
Manual headlamp mode (Lowbeam headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Maximum loaded vehicle weight . . . 294
Maximum load rating (tires) . . . . . . . 294
Maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Media interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Menus
see Control system menus
Minispare wheel
see Spare wheel
Mirrors
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . 112
Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . 111
Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . 111
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
MOExtended system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
MOExtended tires . . . . . . . . . . . 403, 425
MON (Motor Octane Number) . 266, 436
Motor Octane Number
see MON
Multicontour seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Vehicle status messages . . . . . . . . 330
Multifunction display messages
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 347
Active headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Air suspension program . . . . . . . . . 349
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Automatic transmission
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 344
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
11
Index
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356, 357, 359
Corner-illuminating front fog
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . 146, 351
Display malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) . 353
EBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333, 347
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364, 365
Front passenger front air bag . . . . 335
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Gear selector lever
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 344
High-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Low-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
LOW RANGE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
PRE-SAFE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Reverse lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
12
Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO . . . . . 353
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 368
Tire pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 368
TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345, 368
Trailer brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Trailer tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Trailer turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . 367
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Multifunction steering wheel
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . 109, 163
Gearshift control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
N
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Nets, parcel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Night security illumination . . . 117, 162
Normal occupant weight . . . . . . . . . 295
Number, vehicle identification
(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
O
Occupant Classification System
see OCS
Occupant distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
BabySmartTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Children and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . 61
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . 53, 381, 382
Infant and child restraint systems . . 68
LATCH-type child seat anchors . . . . 72
OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
PRE-SAFE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 59
OCS (Occupant Classification
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 309
Crossing obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Driving instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Index
Driving on sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . 306
Returning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Ruts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Steep terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Off-road driving program . . . . . . . . . 185
Off-road menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Oil
see Engine oil
Oil level
see Engine oil, Checking level
On-board computer
see Control system
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Ornamental moldings, cleaning . . . . 320
Outside temperature
see Displays
Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 43
P
Paintwork, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Paintwork code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Panorama roof
Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Parcel nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 302
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Parking position
Transmission position . . . . . . . . . . 137
Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41
Cleaning system sensors . . . . . . . . 321
Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Minimum distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
System sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 321
Warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . 31, 195
Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
see Front passenger front air bag
off indicator lamp
Passenger safety
see Occupant safety
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Phone
see Telephone
Plastic parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Power seats
see Seats
Power tailgate
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Power washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Door windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Hinged quarter windows . . . . . . . . 126
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rear door window, Blocking
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Preglow indicator lamp . . . . . . . . 35, 129
PRE-SAFE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Problems
While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
With vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Production options weight . . . . . . . . 295
Proximity key
see Key, SmartKey
PSI (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
13
Index
Push-start
see Tow-start
R
Radio
Selecting stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Rear axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Rear doors
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rear door window
Blocking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Rear fog lamp
see Fog lamps
Rear lamps
see Tail lamps
Rear seats
see Seats
Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
cleaning the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . 123
Recommended tire inflation
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 295
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle
(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Refilling
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Refrigerant, air conditioning . . . . . . 435
14
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Reminder, Seat belt
see Seat belts, Telltale
Remote control
see Key, SmartKey
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . . 255
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 388
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . 388
License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 388
Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Standing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 25
Research Octane Number
see RON
Reserve fuel
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 147, 157
Restraint systems
see Occupant safety
Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 425
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 22, 253
RON (Research Octane Number)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 436
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Route guidance
see Navigation system
Rubber parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Run Flat Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Run-flat tires
see MOExtended tires
S
Safety
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reporting defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety belts
see Seat belts
Seat belt force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Proper use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 374
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Index
Seating capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . 109
Folding (expanding cargo volume) . 235
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Multicontour seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Selective setting
see Key, SmartKey
Selector lever
see Gear selector lever
Self-test
BabySmartTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Service
see Maintenance
Service, parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Service and warranty information . . . 21
Service intervals
see Maintenance System, Service
indicator
Service life (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Settings
Control system menus and
submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Factory setting (SmartKey) . . . . 85, 87
Individual (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Selective setting (SmartKey) . . . 85, 87
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Side impact air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Sidewall (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Side windows
see Power windows
SmartKey
see Key, SmartKey
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
see Key, SmartKey
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Snow tires
see Winter tires
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 425
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 174
Speed settings
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Sport Utility Vehicle
see SUV
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 375
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Standing water, driving through . . . 302
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . 95, 96
Starting difficulties (engine) . . . . . . 130
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Steering column
see Multifunction steering wheel,
Adjusting
Steering wheel
see Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel gearshift control . . . 140
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . . 256
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . 36, 242
Storing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Stranded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Submenus
see Control system submenus
Sunroof
see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Sunshade
Rear panorama roof . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
15
Index
Suspension tuning
see Air suspension program
SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 23
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 148
Overspeed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tailgate
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Power tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Tar stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . 435
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Capacities fuels, coolants,
lubricants etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Engine oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
16
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . . . 435
Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Information button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Initiating an emergency call
manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Roadside Assistance button . . . . . 253
SOS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . 256
System self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Answering/ending a call . . . . . . . . 167
Hands-free microphone . . . . . . . . . . 43
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Temperature
Interior temperature . . . . . . . 207, 219
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 159
Tether anchorage points
see Children in the vehicle
Tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Tightening torque
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
TIN (Tire Identification Number) . . . 295
Tire and Loading Information
Placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tire and loading terminology . . . . . . 293
Tire Identification Number
see TIN
Tire inflation pressure
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Important notes on . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar . . . 275
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tire load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tire ply composition and material
used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345, 368
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 425
Air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Index
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 273
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Direction of rotation, spinning . . . . 275
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . 280, 281
Information placard . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 368
MOExtended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Ply composition and material used 295
Problems under-/overinflation . . . . 280
Retreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Rims and tires (technical data) . . . 425
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Run Flat Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 295
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 293
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tire Identification Number . . . . . . . 295
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
TPMS low tire pressure/
malfunction telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 296
Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 297
Treadwear indicators . . . . . . . 274, 296
Vehicle maximum load on . . . . . . . 296
Wear pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 425
Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 295
Tongue Weight Rating
see TWR
Top tether
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Total load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Towing
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Towing eye bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Tow-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410, 412
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 310
Coupling a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . 310
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Trailer hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Weights and ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
LOW RANGE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Switching LOW RANGE mode . . . . 143
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 270
Transmission gear selector lever
see Gear selector lever
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Traveling abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tread (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tread depth (tires) . . . . . . . . . . 274, 297
Treadwear indicators (tires) . . . 274, 296
Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Trip odometer, resetting . . . . . . . . . . 148
Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Additional in mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) . . . . . . 296
17
Index
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 296
Units, Settings
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Unleaded gasoline, premium . . . . . . 435
Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Upholstery, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
V
Vehicle
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Individual settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85
Locking/unlocking manually . . . . . 384
Lowering (wheel change) . . . . . . . . 402
Modifications and alterations,
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Vehicle configuration menu . . . . . . . 164
Vehicle jack
see Jack
Vehicle level control
see Air suspension program
18
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle loading
Cargo tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . .
Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle maximum load on the tire . .
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle status message memory . . .
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle washing
see Vehicle care
114
234
228
227
277
293
296
256
156
326
W
Warning lamps
see Lamps, Indicator and warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function . . . . . . . 181
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt . . . 64
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Parktronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Warranty coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Washer fluid
Messages in the multifunction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Mixing ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Wear pattern (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Wheels, sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Wheels, Tires and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Window curtain air bags . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Windows
see Power windows
Windows, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 322
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 440
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Windshield wipers
Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 395
Winter driving
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Winter driving instructions . . . . . . . 298
Index
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 425
Wood trims, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
19
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Product Information
Please observe the following in your own best
interest:
We recommend using Genuine MercedesBenz Parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for your
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be held
responsible for them, even if in individual
cases an official approval or authorization by
governmental or other agencies should exist.
Use of such parts and accessories could
adversely affect the safety, performance or
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use
them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and preapproved conversion parts and accessories
are available at any authorized MercedesBenz Center. In addition, you will receive
comprehensive information on permissible
technical modifications and expert
installations.
20
Operator’s Manual
Notes
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life of
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the
instructions and warnings contained in this
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage
caused by failure to follow instructions is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding that
we reserve the right to make changes in
design and equipment. Therefore,
information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
vehicle.
Vehicle equipment
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
operating any equipment, any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to
demonstrate the proper procedures.
Optional equipment is also described in this
manual, including operating instructions
wherever necessary. Since they are specialorder items, the descriptions and illustrations
herein may vary slightly from the actual
equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are not
shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
with the vehicle.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
including:
RNew
Truck Limited Warranty
REmission
System Warranty
REmission
Performance Warranty
RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty1
RState
Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a
reasonable number of repair attempts
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a
reasonable number of repair attempts is
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or
more of the following occurs:
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in
writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly
notified us in writing of the need for its
repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Written notification should not be sent to a
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
(1) the same substantial defect or
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect
or malfunction has been subject to repair
two or more times, and you have directly
Z
1
Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
21
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in
accordance with standard program
guidelines which include providing service to
the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from
a paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, however,
the accessibility of your vehicle will be
22
determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center technician or the tow service provider
on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor
in our ability to respond.
Additional charges may be applicable for a
breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
determined by our authorized technician and
tow service provider.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure (in the USA) or the
Roadside Assistance section of the Service
and Warranty Information Booklet (in
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to send
in the “Change of Address Notice” found in
the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service
(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will
assist us in contacting you in a timely manner
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available
to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
Rservice
facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available,
Runleaded
gasoline for vehicles with
catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
Rgasoline
may have a considerably lower
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
engine damage.
Introduction
Operating safety
Sport Utility Vehicle
G Warning!
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for
both on-road and off-road use. It can go
places and perform tasks for which
conventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars
are not intended. This vehicle will handle
and maneuver differently from
conventional passenger cars in driving
conditions which may occur on streets,
highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance
and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger cars. As with other vehicles of
this type, if you make sharp turns at
excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the
vehicle may roll over or may go out of
control and crash. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in an accident,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read
the Operator’s Manual. Take time to
become familiar with the driving
characteristics of this vehicle. Be sure you
are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn
how your vehicle handles on different road
surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at
excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers or
other unsafe driving actions that can cause
loss of vehicle control. When driving offroad or working the vehicle hard, do not
overload it. And, always wear your seat
belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Operating safety
G Warning!
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software
could cause them to cease functioning.
Because the vehicle’s electronic
components are interconnected, any
modifications made may produce an
undesired effect on other systems.
Electronic malfunctions could seriously
impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for repairs or modifications to
electronic components.
Other improper work or modifications on
the vehicle could also have a negative
impact on the operating safety of the
vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while
the engine is running. You should therefore
never turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning!
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
23
Z
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel
a sudden significant vibration or ride
disturbance, or you suspect that damage to
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn
on your hazard warning flashers, carefully
slow down, and drive with caution to an
area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair
facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
familiar with the following information and
rules:
Rthe
safety precautions in this manual
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
Rtraffic
rules and regulations
Rmotor
vehicle laws and safety standards
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
24
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed
to do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/
or personal injury.
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected if required. If the matter is not
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
management or, if necessary, contact us at
one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from www.safercar.gov.
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to
diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor
safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith
the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin
response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor
use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras
otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription
service agreement for details regarding the
25
Z
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
26
At a glance
Exterior view .......................................
Cockpit .................................................
Instrument cluster ..............................
Storage compartments .......................
Multifunction steering wheel .............
Center console ....................................
Overhead control panel ......................
Door control panel ..............................
28
30
32
36
38
40
43
44
27
At a glance
Exterior view
Exterior view
28
At a glance
Exterior view
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please
be aware that your vehicle might not be equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function
1
Tailgate
Power tailgate
Vehicle tool kit
2
3
Rear window defroster
Rear window wiper
Wiper blade, replacing
4
5
384
Exterior rear view mirrors
111
326
Power folding
112
8
Towing eyes
413
9
Front lamps
388
a
Hood
267
Engine oil
269
Coolant
271
Wipers
122
Wiper blades, replacing
395
Wiper blades, cleaning
322
Windshield
322
7
223
123
395
Rear lamps
388
265
436
b
Doors
Locking and unlocking
Opening
84
88
c
Function
Page
Locking and unlocking
manually
91
322
Fuel filler flap
Function
90
Wiper blade, cleaning
Fuel requirements
6
Page
Page
Cleaning with wiper fluid
122
Cleaning
322
d
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
224
e
Roof rails/Carriers
229
Crossbars
229
Tires and wheels
272,
425
f
Checking tire inflation
pressure
281
Spare wheel
329
Flat tire
397
g
Headlamp cleaning system
119
h
Front fog lamp
388
Z
29
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
30
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
1
Cruise control lever
• Cruise control
170
172
2
Instrument cluster
32,
147
3
Multifunction steering
wheel
38,
148
Horn
5
Steering wheel gearshift
control
6
7
8
Gear selector lever
135
Front Parktronic warning
indicators
195
Overhead control panel
43
Page
j
Parking brake pedal
k
Remote tailgate switch,
power tailgate
94
l
Door control panel
44
40
m
Exterior lamp switch
115
95
n
Steering wheel adjustment,
electrical
109
Heated steering wheel
110
242
a
Glove box
242
b
Power outlet
249
c
Center console
d
Starter switch
e
Steering wheel adjustment,
manual
108
o
f
On-board diagnostics
(OBD) socket
g
Hood lock release
268
h
Parking brake release
133
140
Function
Page
Glove box lid release, glove
box lock
9
• Distronic
4
Function
Page
133
Combination switch
• Turn signals
118
• Wipers
122
• High beam
118
Z
31
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
32
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function
1
2
3
5
To dim instrument cluster
illumination
6
Clock
7
Speedometer with:
3
147
Reset button for:
• Resetting all settings
2
Function
L Left turn signal
indicator lamp
• Resetting trip odometer
4
Page
To brighten instrument
cluster illumination
148
157
147
Page
K Right turn signal
indicator lamp
- Antilock Brake
System (ABS) indicator
lamp
m Variable speed limiter
indicator lamp2
160
371
Function
Page
; Brake warning lamp,
USA only
372
v ESP® warning lamp
376
l Distance warning
lamp3
377
3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
373
H Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale, USA
only
283,
380
Z
Lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
Vehicles without Distronic: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
33
At a glance
Instrument cluster
34
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function
8
9
Page
Function
Multifunction display
with:
150
• Trip odometer
148
• Main odometer
150
Fuel tank reserve warning
lamp
64,
374
4 Fuel filler flap
indicator: The fuel filler flap
is located on the rear righthand side.
A High-beam headlamp
indicator lamp
a
Tachometer with:
< Seat belt telltale
q Preglow indicator
lamp, diesel engine only
129
b
Page
118
Fuel gauge with:
Multifunction display
with:
378
265
150
Function
Page
• Outside temperature
indicator or digital
speedometer
(depending on selected
setting in the control
system)
153,
159
• Transmission position
indicator
137
• Gear range indicator
139
• LOW RANGE mode
indicator
142
1 Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)
indicator lamp
47,
375
• Distance warning
function indicator
164
± Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, Canada only
379
• Rear window wiper
indicator
123
? Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, USA only
379
• Downhill Speed
Regulator (DSR)
indicator
183
• Off-road driving
program indicator
185
35
Z
At a glance
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
36
At a glance
Storage compartments
Function
Page
1
Glove box
242
2
3
Function
Page
Function
Page
6
First aid kit
326
a
Cup holder
245
Door pockets
7
Holder, e.g. for gas cards
246
b
Parcel nets on front seat
backrests
8
Storage compartment
244
233
242
Storage compartment with
coin holder
Ashtray
247
4
Cup holders
245
Rear storage
compartments
244
5
Vehicle tool kit, spare
wheel
Parcel net in front
passenger footwell
233
Cup holder
245
9
c
d
326
Z
37
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
1
Multifunction display
2
Press button s
Page
167
• to dial4
167
• to redial4
167
Press button t
• to end a call
167
• to reject an incoming
call
167
Press button æ or ç
• to set values
• to set the volume
4
5
Function only available in telephone menu.
Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.
38
158
Page
Press button ! to turn
the Voice Control System
on5, see separate operating
instructions
150
• to take a call
• to select submenus in
the Settings menu
Function
3
Press button è or ·
to select next/previous
menu
157
Press button j or k
briefly
• to move within a menu
• to select previous or
next track, scene or
stored station within
Audio/DVD menu
153
• to switch to the phone
book and select a name
or number within
Telephone menu
167
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
Page
Press and hold button
j or k
• to select previous or
next track with quick
search or to select
previous or next station
in station list or wave
band within Audio/
DVD menu
153
• to start the quick
search in the phone
book within Telephone
menu
167
Press button 0 to turn
the Voice Control System
off5, see separate operating
instructions
Z
5
Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.
39
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part (Vehicles without
enhanced off-road package)
Function
1
2
3
4
COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
Climate control
202
3-zone automatic climate
control
210
Rear window defroster
223
Seat heating, front
passenger side
107
Seat ventilation, front
passenger side
107
Parktronic system
deactivation switch
196
6
Vehicle level control switch
186
7
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp
5
40
Page
56
Function
Page
8
Storage compartment
243
9
Alarm system indicator
lamp
81
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch
79
a
Adaptive Damping System
(ADS) switch
185
Seat ventilation, driver’s
side
107
d
Seat heating, driver’s side
107
e
Switch for Downhill Speed
Regulation (DSR)
182
Hazard warning flasher
switch
118
Switch for off-road driving
program
185
b
c
f
g
At a glance
Center console
Upper part (Vehicles with enhanced
off-road package, Canada only)
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Page
COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
Function
8
202
3-zone automatic climate
control
210
Rear window defroster
223
Seat heating, front
passenger side
107
Seat ventilation, front
passenger side
107
Rotary switch for
differential locks
145
Swich for LOW RANGE
mode
142
Switch for Downhill Speed
Regulation (DSR)
182
189
Alarm system indicator
lamp
81
Seat ventilation, driver’s
side
107
b
Seat heating, driver’s side
107
c
Adaptive Damping System
(ADS) switch
185
9
Climate control
Rotary switch for vehicle
level control
Page
a
d
e
f
g
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch
79
Parktronic system
deactivation switch
196
Hazard warning flasher
switch
118
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp
56
Z
41
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Function
1
Storage compartment
Page
243
or
Ashtray
247
2
Cup holder
245
3
Front armrest storage
compartment
244
Card, ticket holder
245
4
42
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Function
Left front reading lamp on/
off
120
2
Rear interior lighting on/off
120
3
Automatic interior lighting
120
4
Front interior lighting on/
off
120
5
Right reading lamp on/off
120
6
Front right interior lamp
120
7
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
switch
224
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
253
9
Interior rear view mirror
111
a
Front right reading lamp
120
1
8
Function
Page
Page
b
Front left reading lamp
120
c
Garage door opener
256
d
Vehicles without telephone
installed: Hands-free
microphone for Tele Aid
(emergency call system)
and Voice Control System,
see separate operating
instructions
e
Vehicles with telephone
installed: Hands-free
microphone for Tele Aid
(emergency call system),
telephone and Voice
control system, see
separate operating
instructions
f
Front left interior lamp
120
Z
43
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Function
1
Inside door handle
2
Central locking/unlocking
switch
3
4
5
44
Page
Function
88
6
89
7
Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
111
8
Selection buttons for
exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
111
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors
112
Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows
124
Rear door window override
switch
Page
74
Hinged quarter window
switch
126
Remote tailgate switch,
power tailgate
91
Safety and security
Vehicle equipment ..............................
Occupant safety ..................................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Driving safety systems .......................
Anti-theft systems ..............................
46
46
75
75
80
45
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
Occupant safety
Introduction
In this section you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
RSeat
RChild
belts
restraints
RLower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH)
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental
-
Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)
-
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
seat belts
-
Seat belt force limiter
RActive
head restraints
RPreventive
RAir
46
Restraint System (SRS) with
Air bags
occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®)
bag system components with
-
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
-
USA only: Front passenger seat with
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
-
Canada only: Front passenger seat with
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
G Warning!
Modifications to or work improperly
conducted on restraint system
components or their wiring, as well as
tampering with interconnected electronic
systems, can lead to the restraint systems
no longer functioning as intended.
Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
although the deceleration threshold for air
bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
tamper with electronic components or their
software.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and children,
see “Children in the
vehicle” (Y page 68).
SRS indicator lamp
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when the ignition is
switched on and goes out no later than a few
seconds after the engine has been started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit
when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp
Rfails to go out after approximately
4 seconds after the engine is started
Rdoes
not come on at all
Rcomes
on after the engine was started or
while driving
G Warning!
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on while driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected
a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not deploy when needed in an
accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result
in injury.
In addition, improper work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air bag
deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call our Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Air bags
G Warning!
Air bags are designed to reduce the
potential of injury and fatality in certain
frontal impacts (front air bags, driver side
knee bag), side impacts (side impact air
bags and window curtain air bags), or
rollovers (window curtain air bags).
However, no system available today can
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the
air bags. This dust, however, is neither
injurious to your health, nor does it indicate
a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get
out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. If you have any breathing difficulty but
cannot get out of the vehicle after the air
bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or door.
G Warning!
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in
47
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
a properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated
position with your back against the seat
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make
sure it is properly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating position
and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a
safe distance from the air bag. Occupants
who are not wearing their seat belt, are not
seated properly or are too close to the air
bag can be seriously injured or killed by an
air bag as it inflates with great force
instantaneously:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in
a position that is as upright as possible
with your back against the seat backrest.
RMove
the driver seat as far back as
possible, still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls. The
distance from the center of the driver’s
chest to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by adjusting
48
the seat and steering wheel. If you have
any difficulties, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RDo
not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when the driver’s front air bag inflates.
RAdjust
the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
ROccupants,
especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the side impact air bag be deployed.
Always sit as upright as possible, wear
the seat belt properly and use an
appropriately sized infant restraint,
toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
RCanada
only: Children 12 years old and
under must never ride in the front seat,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM air
bag deactivation system installed in the
vehicle to deactivate the front passenger
front air bag when it is installed properly.
Otherwise they will be struck by the air
bag when it inflates in a crash. If this
happens, serious or fatal injury will
result.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
G Warning!
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
There is a possibility for a side impact air
bag related injury if occupants, especially
children, are not properly seated or
restrained when next to a side impact air
bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side
impact in order to do its job.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
To help avoid the possibility of injury,
please follow these guidelines:
(1)
(2)
Always sit as upright as possible,
properly use the seat belts, and
for children 12 years old and
under, use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Always wear seat belts properly.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
frontal impacts (front air bags, driver side
knee bag), side impacts (side impact and
window curtain air bags) which exceed preset
deployment thresholds, and in certain
rollovers (window curtain air bags). Only in
the event of such a situation will they provide
their supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always
wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
possible for the air bags to provide their
supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
bags will not deploy. The driver and
passengers will then be protected to the
extent possible by a properly fastened seat
belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
air bags.
It is important to your safety and that of your
passengers that you replace deployed air
bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags
to make sure the vehicle will continue to
provide supplemental crash protection for
occupants.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
and air bag
G Warning!
RDamaged
seat belts or seat belts that
have been subjected to stress in an
accident must be replaced and their
anchoring points must also be checked.
Only use seat belts installed or supplied
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RAir
bags and pyrotechnic emergency
tensioning devices (ETDs) contain
perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the
environment. Check with your local
government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
RAir
bags and ETDs are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis. An air
bag or ETD that is deployed must be
replaced. PRE-SAFE® has electrically
operated reversible pre-tensioners in
addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
RDo not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat
belts.
RDo
not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate
protection.
RNo
modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of the
SRS. This includes changing or removing
any component or part of the SRS, the
installation of additional trim material,
seat covers, badges, etc. over the
49
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
steering wheel hub, front passenger front
air bag cover, outboard sides of the seat
backrests, door trim panels, or door
frame trims, and installation of additional
electrical/electronic equipment on or
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between air bags and occupants
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
RDo
not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may be thrown around
in the vehicle and cause head and other
injuries when the window curtain air bag
is deployed.
RAir
bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch
them.
RNever
place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RIn
addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air bag
deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
50
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RFor your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the air bag unit
or ETD, our safety instructions must be
followed. These instructions are available
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and the
material of the air bags, there is the
possibility of abrasions or other,
potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment.
Front air bags
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 49.
RGiven
If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
recommend that you inform the subsequent
owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS
and refer them to the applicable section in the
Operator’s Manual.
1 Driver front air bag
2 Front passenger front air bag
3 Knee bag
The front air bags are designed to provide
increased protection for the driver and front
passenger against the risk of injuries to the
head and thorax.
Driver and front passenger front air bags and
driver’s side knee bag are deployed
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Rif
the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rdepending
on whether the seat belt is in
use
Rindependently
of the side impact air bags
and/or the window curtain air bags
The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows
the air bags to have different rates of inflation
that are based on the vehicle deceleration
rate as assessed by the air bag control unit.
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: On the front
passenger side, front air bag 2 deployment
is additionally influenced by the passenger’s
weight category as identified by the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 53).
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the
front passenger side occupant, the higher the
vehicle deceleration rate required for second
stage inflation of front air bag 2.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deployed in the
event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag 2 will only
be deployed if
Rvehicles
with OCS, USA only: the system,
based on OCS weight sensor readings,
detects that the front passenger seat is
occupied
Rthe
59 indicator lamp in the
center console is not lit
(USA only: (Y page 56),
Canada only: (Y page 58))
Rthe
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
! Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag
deactivation system, Canada only: Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
in certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset
deployment threshold. The knee bag 3
operates best in conjunction with a properly
positioned and fastened seat belt.
Side impact air bags
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 49.
G Warning!
The pressure sensors for side impact air
bag control are located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the doors or
door trim panels including, for example, the
addition of door speakers.
Improper repair work on the doors or the
modification or addition of components to
the doors create a risk of rendering the side
impact air bags inoperative or causing
unintended air bag deployment. Work on
the doors must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
Knee bag
The knee bag 3 is located on the driver side
lower instrument panel. It is designed to
operate together with the driver front air bag
Z
51
Safety and security
Occupant safety
1 Front side impact air bag
2 Rear side impact air bag
When deployed, the side impact air bags are
designed to provide increased protection for
the thorax (but not the head, neck and arms)
of the occupants on the side of the vehicle on
which the impact occurs.
The side impact air bags are deployed
Ron
the impacted side of the vehicle
Rin
side impacts exceeding a preset
deployment threshold
Rregardless of whether the seat belt is in use
Rindependently
of the front air bags
Rindependently
of the ETDs
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front
passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
52
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened (latch plate is not inserted
into the buckle). With an empty front
passenger seat and the seat belt fastened
(latch plate properly inserted into buckle) the
front passenger side impact air bag will
deploy independently of the empty seat.
The side impact air bags are not deployed in
side impacts which do not exceed the
system’s deployment threshold.
The side air bags will not deployed in the
event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
lateral deceleration or acceleration exceeds
the preset deployment threshold for the side
air bags.
may interfere with or prevent the
deployment of the side impact air bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
Window curtain air bags
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 49.
! Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag
deactivation system, Canada only: Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
1 Window curtain air bag
When deployed, window curtain air bags 1
are designed to provide increased protection
for the head (but not the chest or arms) of the
occupants on the side of the vehicle on which
the impact occurs.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Window curtain air bags 1 are deployed
Ron
the impacted side of the vehicle
Rin
side impacts exceeding a preset
deployment threshold
Rindependently
of the front air bags
Rregardless
of whether the front passenger
seat is occupied
Rregardless of whether the seat belt is in use
Rin
certain vehicle rollovers, if the system
determines that air bag deployment can
offer additional protection to that provided
by the seat belt
Window curtain air bags 1 are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
deployment threshold.
Window curtain air bags 1 deploy in the area
indicated by the arrows.
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
standard equipment in USA.
The OCS automatically turns the front
passenger front air bag on or off based on the
classified occupant weight category
determined by weight sensor readings from
the front passenger seat.
The system does not deactivate the front
passenger side impact air bag, the window
curtain air bag and the Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs).
Occupants must sit with the seat belt
properly fastened in a position that is as
upright as possible with their back against the
seat backrest and feet on the floor to be
correctly classified. If the occupant’s weight
is transferred to another object in the vehicle
(e.g. by leaning on armrests), the OCS may
not be able to properly approximate the
occupant’s weight category.
Furthermore, the occupant weight may
appear to increase or decrease due to the
following: objects hanging on the seat, lodged
underneath the seat, stuffed between the
seat and middle console or the seat and door,
other passengers pushing on the seat, or
objects applying pressure to the back of the
seat. Always make sure the seat has
clearance in all directions at all times.
i If your seat, including the trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way,
take the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Both the driver and the front passenger
should always use the 59
indicator lamp as an indication of whether or
not the front passenger is properly
positioned.
G Warning!
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates when an adult or someone
larger than a small individual is in the front
passenger seat, have the front passenger
re-position himself or herself in the seat
until the 59 indicator lamp
goes out, or check whether objects are
caught under or around the seat.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS has
classified the front passenger seat
occupant as weighting as much as or less
53
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
than a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or if the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard
child restraint, the 59
indicator lamp will illuminate when the
engine is started and remain illuminated,
indicating that the front passenger front air
bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
the 59 indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual
(such as a young teenager or a small adult),
the 59 indicator lamp will
illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
when the engine is started and then,
depending on occupant weight sensor
54
readings from the seat, remain illuminated
or go out. With the 59
indicator lamp illuminated, the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated. With
the 59 indicator lamp out, the
front passenger front air bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as an
adult or someone larger than a small
individual, the 59 indicator
lamp will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds when the engine is started and
then go out, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is activated.
If the 59 indicator lamp is
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 59 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is activated and will be deployed
Rin
the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Rindependently of the side impact air bags
If the front passenger front air bag is
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
influenced by
Rthe
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
Rthe front passenger’s weight category as
identified by the OCS
For information about air bag display
messages (Y page 335).
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly
recommend that children be placed in the
rear seats whenever possible. Regardless
of seating position, children 12 years old
and under must be seated and properly
secured in an appropriate infant restraint,
toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
The infant or child restraint must be
properly secured with the vehicle’s seat
belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
Safety and security
Occupant safety
accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should
always sit as upright as possible, wear the
seat belt properly and use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
RYour
vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the
front passenger front air bag in your
vehicle when the system senses the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child or
less along with the weight of a standard
appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
RA
child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates in a
collision which could occur under some
circumstances, even with the air bag
technology installed in your vehicle. The
only means to completely eliminate this
risk is to never place a child in a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing child
restraint in a backseat.
RIf
you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure the 59
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. Should the 59
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out
while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. Periodically check the
59 indicator lamp while
driving to make sure the
59 indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the 59
indicator lamp goes out or remains out,
do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates.
RIf
you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible, use the proper child
restraint recommended for the age, size
and weight of the child, and secure child
restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For children
larger than the typical 12-month-old
child, the front passenger front air bag
may or may not be activated.
Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the front passenger front air
bag also should have deployed.
The OCS may have determined:
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both instances where the
system suppresses deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of
Z
55
Safety and security
Occupant safety
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
air bag
Rthat
the seat was occupied by a small
individual (such as a young teenager or a
small adult) or a child who weighs more
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
child in a standard child restraint – both of
which are instances where the system may
suppress deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
air bag
removed from the starter switch or with the
starter switch in position 0.
G Warning!
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
59 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
OCS. The front passenger front air bag will
be deactivated in this case. Have the
system checked as soon as possible by
qualified technicians. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
RDo
not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into
the storage bag on the back of the front
passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may
not be able to properly approximate the
occupant weight category.
RDo
not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.
1 Front passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp
The 59 indicator lamp 1 will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
56
RDo
not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
RDo
not stuff objects such as books
between the front passenger seat and
the center console or front passenger
door.
RDo
not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in
a position that is as upright as possible
with your back against the seat backrest.
RWhile
seated, an occupant should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
from the seat bottom as this may result
in the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
RRead
and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Occupant Classification System Selftest
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
twice, the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
sitting on the front passenger seat and the
system classifies the occupant as an adult,
the 59 indicator lamp will
Safety and security
Occupant safety
illuminate and go out after approximately 6
seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
classifies the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 59 indicator lamp
will illuminate and not go out.
G Warning!
If the 59 indicator lamp does
not illuminate, the system is not
functioning. You must contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
seating any child on the front passenger
seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (Y page 381).
G Warning!
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom
of the child seat must make full contact
with the passenger seat cushion. An
incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
injuries to the child in case of an accident,
instead of increasing protection for the
child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation
system
The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system
is standard equipment in Canada.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly
recommend that children be placed in the
rear seats whenever possible. Regardless
of seating position, children 12 years old
and under must be seated and properly
secured in an appropriate infant restraint,
toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
The infant or child restraint must be
properly secured with the vehicle’s seat
belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should
always sit as upright as possible, wear the
seat belt properly and use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
RChildren
12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to
deactivate the front passenger front air
bag when it is installed properly.
Otherwise they will be struck by the air
bag when it inflates in a crash. If this
happens, serious or fatal injury will
result.
RA
child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates in a
collision which could occur under some
circumstances, even with the air bag
technology installed in your vehicle. The
only means to completely eliminate this
risk is to never place a child in a rear-
57
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
facing child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing child
restraint in a backseat.
you must install a BabySmartTM
compatible rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat because
circumstances require you to do so,
make sure the 59 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the
front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. Should the 59
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out
while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. Periodically check the
59 indicator lamp while
driving to make sure the
59 indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the 59
indicator lamp goes out or remains out,
do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously
RIf
58
injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates.
on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired.
RIf
you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible, use the proper child
restraint recommended for the age, size
and weight of the child, and secure child
restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
front passenger front air bag will not deploy
only if the 59 indicator lamp
remains illuminated.
Please be sure to check the
59 indicator lamp every time
you use a BabySmartTM compatible child
seat on the front passenger seat. Should
the 59 indicator lamp go out
while the restraint is installed, please check
installation. If the 59 indicator
lamp remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport a child
1 Front passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp
Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats,
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz
system, are required for use with the
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system.
Please contact your authorized MercedesBenz Center for information on availability.
With the special child seat installed properly,
the front passenger front air bag will not
deploy.
The 59 indicator lamp 1 will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch or with the
starter switch in position 0.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
The system does not deactivate the side
impact air bag, the window curtain air bag and
the Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD).
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
twice, the 59 indicator lamp
comes on for approximately 6 seconds and
then goes out.
If the 59 indicator lamp should
not come on or is continuously lit, the system
is not functioning. You must see an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
seating any child on the passenger seat. More
information can be found in the “Practical
hints” section (Y page 332).
G Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile
phones, electronic tags such as those used
in ski passes and like electronic devices on
the front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system.
Such signal interference may cause the
59 indicator lamp not to come
on during self-test or be continuously lit,
indicating that the system is not
functioning.
G Warning!
The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system will ONLY work with a special child
seat designed to operate with it. It will not
work with child seats which are not
BabySmartTM compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness off the BabySmartTM air
bag deactivation system. The bottom of the
child seat must make full contact with the
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to
the child in case of an accident, instead of
protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
Seat belts
Safety notes
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all 50
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
systems for infants and children, see
“Children in the vehicle” (Y page 68).
G Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your
passengers are properly restrained. You
and your passengers should always wear
seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
59
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are properly
wearing your seat belt. The air bags can
only protect as intended if the occupants
are properly wearing their seat belts.
G Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best
restraint when the wearer is in a position
that is as upright as possible and the seat
belt is properly positioned on the body.
G Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is
correctly restrained with a separate seat
60
belt. Never use a seat belt for more than
one person at a time.
G Warning!
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced and their anchoring
points must also be checked.
Only use seat belts which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended
activation of the ETDs or to their failure to
activate when necessary.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Proper use of seat belts
G Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RSeat
belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this
section, as that could result in serious
injuries in case of an accident.
REach
occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including
rollovers. The integrated restraint system
includes SRS (driver front air bag, driver
side knee bag, front passenger front air
bag, side impact air bags, window curtain
air bags for side windows), Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs), seat belt
force limiters, and front seat knee
bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air
bags, driver side knee bag and ETDs) and
side (side impact air bags, window
curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers
(window curtain air bags and ETDs).
RNever
wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your
shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body
would move too far forward. That would
Safety and security
Occupant safety
increase the chance of head and neck
injuries. The seat belt would also apply
too much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal
organs such as your liver or spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder (it should not
touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm.
For this purpose, you can adjust the
height of the seat belt outlet.
RPosition
the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the
abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned
across your abdomen, it could cause
serious injuries in a crash.
RNever
wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
RMake
sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
RNever
use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects at the same time.
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In
a crash, you would not have the full width
of the seat belt to distribute impact
forces. The twisted seat belt against your
body could cause injuries.
RPregnant
women should also always use
a lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible
pressure on the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that
is as upright as possible.
RCheck
your seat belt during travel to
make sure it is properly positioned.
RNever
place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen
using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children
in booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in
the door or in the seat adjustment
mechanism. This could damage the seat
belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the
effectiveness of the seat belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced and their anchoring
points must also be checked. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fastening the seat belts
G Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your
passengers are properly restrained. You
and your passengers should always wear
seat belts.
61
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are properly
wearing your seat belt. The air bags can
only protect as intended if the occupants
are properly wearing their seat belts.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly
recommend that children be placed in the
rear seats whenever possible. Regardless
of seating position, children 12 years old
and under must be seated and properly
secured in an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
62
child. For additional information, see
“Children in the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
G Warning!
Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag
deactivation system, Canada only: Children
12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child
seat, which operates with the
BabySmartTM system installed in the
vehicle to deactivate the front passenger
front air bag when it is installed properly.
Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag
when it inflates in a crash. If this happens,
serious or fatal injury will result.
G Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is
correctly restrained with a separate seat
belt. Never use a seat belt for more than
one person at a time.
G Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best
restraint when the wearer is in a position
that is as upright as possible and the seat
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
X
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until it
clicks.
X
Lowering: Press and hold release button
2.
X
If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
correct height.
X
Slide seat belt height adjuster 1
downward.
X
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
X
Release button 2 and make sure seat belt
height adjuster 1 engages into place.
Seat belt outlet height adjustment
Releasing the seat belts
X
Press seat belt release button 4
(Y page 63).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind
the seat belt by guiding the latch plate 2
(Y page 63).
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so
1 Seat belt outlet
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Seat belt release button
X
With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
of seat belt outlet 1.
X
Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
across the top of your shoulder and the lap
portion across your hips.
1 Seat belt height adjuster
2 Release button
X
Raising: Slide seat belt height adjuster
1 upward.
Seat belt height adjuster 1 engages in
different positions.
that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot
get caught or pinched in the door or in the
seat mechanism. This can damage the seat
belt and impair its effectiveness, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim
panel. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
63
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < will always illuminate for
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
the engine is started, an additional warning
chime will also sound for a maximum of
6 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is
fastened.
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with
front doors closed,
Rthe
seat belt telltale < remains
illuminated for as long as either the driver’s
or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened.
Rand
if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
< starts flashing and a warning chime
sounds with increasing intensity for a
maximum of 60 seconds or until the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened.
If you and/or your passenger release the
seat belt during driving, the seat belt
64
telltale < starts flashing and the
warning chime sounds as described before.
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,
the warning chime stops sounding, the seat
belt telltale < stops flashing but
continues to be illuminated.
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
< is flashing again if the vehicle speed
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
The seat belt telltale < will only go out if
both the driver’s and the front passenger’s
seat belt (with the front passenger seat
occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (Y page 374).
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front seats and second
row outer seats are equipped with ETDs and
seat belt force limiters. The seat belts for the
third-row seats are equipped with ETDs.
The ETDs are designed to activate in the
following cases:
Rin
frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
the system’s preset deployment threshold
Rin
side impacts exceeding the system’s
preset deployment threshold on the far
side of the impact
Rin
certain vehicle rollovers
Rif the restraint systems are operational and
functioning correctly, see 1 indicator
lamp (Y page 47)
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
properly inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats (second-row
seats) or rear seats (third-row seats) will
activate with or without the respective seat
belts fastened.
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
limiters, when activated, are employed to
help reduce the peak force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
The ETDs do not pull occupants back
toward the seat backrest.
G Warning!
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must
be replaced.
For your safety, when disposing of the
pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
instructions. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
PRE-SAFE® has electrically operated
reversible pre-tensioners that do not
require replacement after activation.
Preventive occupant safety (PRESAFE®)
G Warning!
PRE-SAFE® is intended to reduce the
effects of an accident on vehicle occupants
who are wearing their seat belt properly.
Despite having the PRE-SAFE® system in
your vehicle, the possibility of injuries
occurring as a result of an accident cannot
be eliminated. Therefore, you should
always drive carefully and adjust your
driving to the prevailing road, weather, and
traffic conditions.
Your vehicle takes preventive measures to
better protect the occupants in the following
hazardous situations automatically.
PRE-SAFE® takes action in
Remergency
braking maneuvers with the
Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 77)
activated
Rcritical
dynamic driving situations, e.g.
when the vehicle is understeering or
oversteering because it has exceeded its
physical limitations
When you are driving faster than 22 mph
(35 km/h), PRE-SAFE® takes the following
measures in such situations:
RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
automatically.
RVehicles with front passenger seat memory
If the closing procedure of the door windows
or tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked, the door
windows or tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and
open slightly.
Once the hazardous situation is over without
an accident occurring, the seat belt pretensioning is deactivated. You can readjust all
of the settings made by PRE-SAFE®.
If the seat belts do not release:
X
Adjust the seat backrest or seat slightly to
the rear until the seat belt tension is
diminished.
The locking mechanism releases.
! When moving the seats, make sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats.
function: If the passenger seat is in an
unfavorable position, it will be adjusted to
a better position.
RIf
the vehicle is in a severe skid or is
spinning, the door windows close until only
a small gap remains.
RVehicles
with power tilt/sliding sunroof: If
the vehicle is in a severe skid or is spinning,
the tilt/sliding sunroof also close until only
a small gap remains.
Z
65
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Active head restraints
The active head restraints are intended to
offer the driver and front passenger increased
protection from whiplash-type injuries. In the
event of a rear-end collision, the active head
restraints on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat are designed to move
forward in the direction of travel, providing
the head with increased support earlier on in
the collision sequence. The active head
restraints move forward whether the seat is
occupied or not.
G Warning!
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the
active head restraints may not be able to
function properly or offer the intended
degree of protection they were designed for
in the event of a rear-end collision.
If the active head restraints have been
triggered in an accident, the active head
restraints must be reset. Otherwise, the
active head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another
rear-end collision.
For information on resetting the activated
active head restraints, see “Resetting
activated head restraints” (Y page 385).
66
You cannot remove the active head restraint
on the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
G Warning!
Only use seat or head restraint covers
which have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints and/or the
deployment of the front side impact air
bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
For information on head restraint adjustment,
see “Head restraints” (Y page 100).
Correct driver seat adjustment
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control all seat, head restraint, steering
wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
well as fastening of seat belts, must be
done before the vehicle is put into motion.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 97.
Observe the following points:
RAlways
be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in steering wheel 1 as
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
RAdjust
seat 3 to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely.
3 must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten and position your
seat belt 2.
X
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 108.
Make sure:
RYou
can reach steering wheel 1 with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows.
RYou
is as nearly upright as possible.
1 Steering wheel
2 Seat belt
3 Seat
X
Position seat 3 (Y page 98) and head
restraint properly (Y page 100).
RAdjust
the seat cushion so that the front
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
your legs.
RAdjust
the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level.
RNever
place hands under seat 3 or near
any moving parts while seat 3 is being
adjusted.
can move your legs freely.
RAll
displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible.
RSeat
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
Position steering wheel 1 properly. See
(Y page 108) for manual adjustment and
(Y page 109) for electrical adjustment.
X
Fasten and position your seat belt 2
(Y page 61) correctly.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 59.
Make sure:
RSeat
belt 2 is always fitted snugly.
RAdjust
seat belt 2 so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder.
RPlace
the lap portion of seat belt 2 as low
as possible on your hips.
Z
67
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
Safety notes
If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
vehicle:
X Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
the child.
X
Make sure the infant or child is properly
secured at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Always take the SmartKey with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, even if they are
secured in a child restraint system, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury. The children could
Rinjure
themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe
seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Rinjure
themselves or cause an accident
with vehicle equipment that can be
operated even if the SmartKey is
removed from the starter switch or
removed from the vehicle, such as seat
adjustment, steering wheel adjustment,
or the memory function.
If children open a door, they could injure
other persons or get out of the vehicle and
injure themselves or be injured by following
traffic.
68
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become
very hot, and the child could be burned on
these parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless
they are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong braking maneuvers
Rsudden
Ran
changes of direction
accident
For more information on loading, please refer
to the “Loading and storing” (Y page 227)
chapter.
Infant and child restraint systems
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Canada only:
Only use a BabySmartTM compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in this
vehicle.
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
belt have special seat belt retractors for
secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is
activated. The seat belt is now locked. Push
down on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release the seat belt buckle
and let the seat belt retract completely. To
deactivate the special seat belt retractor for
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
seat must be in the most backward position.
The seat belt can again be used in the usual
manner.
G Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
i Information on child seats with mounting
fittings for tether anchorages
(Y page 71).
For information on LATCH-type child seat
anchors (Y page 72).
The use of infant or child restraints is required
by law in all 50 states, the District of
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be seated
in an appropriate infant or child restraint
system, properly secured in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions for the child
restraint, that complies with U.S. Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint
manufacturer of compliance with these
standards can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
infant or child restraints.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly
recommend that children be placed in the
rear seats whenever possible. Regardless
of seating position, children 12 years old
and under must be seated and properly
secured in an appropriate infant restraint,
toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
The infant or child restraint must be
properly secured with the vehicle’s seat
belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should
always sit as upright as possible, wear the
seat belt properly and use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Z
69
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
RUSA
only: Your vehicle is equipped with
air bag technology designed to
deactivate the front passenger front air
bag in your vehicle when the system
senses the weight of a typical 12-monthold child or less along with the weight of
a standard appropriate child restraint on
the front passenger seat.
RUSA
only: For children larger than the
typical 12-month-old child, the front
passenger front air bag may or may not
be activated. Always make sure the
59 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RCanada
only: Children 12 years old and
under must never ride in the front seat,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to
deactivate the front passenger front air
bag when it is installed properly.
70
Otherwise they will be struck by the air
bag when it inflates in a crash. If this
happens, serious or fatal injury will
result.
RA
child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates in a
collision which could occur under some
circumstances, even with the air bag
technology installed in your vehicle. The
only means to completely eliminate this
risk is to never place a child in a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing child
restraint in a backseat.
RIf
you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure the 59
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. Should the 59
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out
while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. Periodically check the
59 indicator lamp while
driving to make sure the
59 indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the 59
indicator lamp goes out or remains out,
do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates.
RIf
you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible, use the proper child
restraint recommended for the age, size
and weight of the child, and secure child
restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
Safety and security
Occupant safety
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts.
Position shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
may be necessary to achieve proper seat
belt positioning for children over 41 lb
(18 kg) until they reach a height where a
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
G Warning!
pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.
If a seat backrest is not locked properly, the
seat backrest could fold. The child seat
would no longer be supported properly or
positioned to provide its intended benefit.
That could cause serious or even fatal
injuries.
This vehicle is equipped with tether
anchorages for a top tether strap at the
second-row seat backrest. For installing an
infant and child restraint system at the
third-row seats, use the cargo tie-down rings
in the cargo compartment (Y page 234).
Top tether straps enable an additional
connection to be made between child
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
anchors and rear seats. This can further
reduce the risk of injury.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
1 Anchorage ring covers
X
Press in lower part of anchorage ring
cover 1 on the seat backrest on which a
child seat is to be installed.
X
Pull on upper part of anchorage ring
cover 1 to remove cover.
X
Store anchorage ring cover 1 in a
convenient place (e.g. glove box).
Always lock the seat backrests in their
upright position when the rear seats are
occupied by passengers, after installing top
tether straps, or the extended cargo
compartment is not in use. Make sure that
seat backrests are secured properly by
Z
71
Safety and security
Occupant safety
4 Top tether strap
X
Guide top tether strap 4 between head
restraint and top of the seat backrest.
X
Securely fasten hook 3, which is part of
top tether strap 4, to anchorage ring 2.
X
Lower the head restraint if necessary
(Y page 104).
Make sure the top tether strap can pass
freely between the head restraint and top
of the seat backrest.
X
Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Make sure
Rtop
tether strap 4 is not twisted
Rthe
2 Anchorage rings
3 Hook
X
Move the respective head restraint to its
uppermost position (Y page 104).
head restraint is installed and
positioned such that the top tether strap
can pass freely between the head restraint
and top of the seat backrest
top tether strap is positioned between
the seat backrest and the cargo
compartment cover blind (if installed)
top tether strap is positioned between
the seat backrest and the cargo net (if
installed)
i For safety, make sure hook 3 is attached
to anchorage ring 2 beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
72
X
Reinstall the anchorage ring cover 1.
Rthe
Rthe
2 Anchorage ring
3 Hook
After removing the child restraint system and
the top tether strap 4.
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH-type
anchors (at each of the outboard second-row
seats and third-row seats) for the installation
of a LATCH-type child seat with matching
mounting fittings.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
G Warning!
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts.
Position shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children
over 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height
where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly
without a booster.
Install child seat according to
manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to
the right and left side anchors.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may
come loose during an accident which could
result in serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be
replaced.
X
Install a LATCH-type child seat according
to the manufacturer’s instructions.
A rigid connection between the child seat
and the body of the vehicle is established.
! Make sure the seat belt for the center
seat can operate freely with a child seat
installed.
Child safety
Example, second-row seats
1 Anchorage ring covers
X
Remove anchorage ring covers 1 from the
seat on which a child seat is to be installed.
Child safety locks
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
G Warning!
Children could open a rear door from the
inside. This may cause serious personal
injury or an accident. Therefore, secure the
rear doors with the child safety locks
whenever children are riding in the back
seats of the vehicle.
Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be used
and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat
belt system. Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
The LATCH-type anchors are blended with
covers.
Example, second-row seats
2 Anchors
The child safety locks on the rear doors
enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
unlocked.
73
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
G Warning!
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure
themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in
the window opening.
Securing: Press the lever down in direction
of arrow 2.
X
Check to make sure the child safety locks
are working properly.
X
Releasing: Press the lever up in direction
of arrow 1.
Override switch
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
With the override switch you can disable the
rear door window switches in the rear door
panels.
74
Deactivating: Press override switch 1
again.
The switch disengages from its recessed
position back to its original position.
The rear door windows can again be
operated using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
For more information on power windows, see
the “Controls in detail” section
(Y page 124).
1 Releasing
2 Securing
X
X
1 Override switch
X
Activating: Press override switch 1.
The switch engages in recessed position.
The rear door windows can no longer be
operated using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
It is still possible to operate the rear door
windows using the switches located on the
door control panel of the driver’s door.
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
Panic alarm
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
1 Â button
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
X
X
Activating: Press and hold button 1 for at
least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
Deactivating: Press button 1 again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
or
X
Driving safety systems
Introduction
This section contains information about the
following driving safety systems:
RABS
(Antilock Brake System)
RBAS
(Brake Assist System)
REBP
(Electronic Brake Proportioning)
RESP®
(Electronic Stability Program)
i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of most of the driving
systems described in this section is only
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains
as required.
Safety notes
G Warning!
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
RExcessive
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
RWet
speed, especially in turns
and slippery road surfaces
RFollowing
another vehicle too closely
The driving safety systems described in this
section cannot reduce these risks or
75
Z
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle. They cannot increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with
the driving safety systems described in this
section must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Always adjust your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users
and objects on the street.
If a driving system malfunctions, other
driving safety systems may also switch off.
Observe indicator and warning lamps that
may come on as well as messages in the
multifunction display that may appear.
ABS
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 75.
G Warning!
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead.
Pumping the brake pedal defeats the
purpose of the ABS and significantly
reduces braking effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the
ignition. It goes out when the engine is
running.
Braking
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
76
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the
regulating mode.
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
pedal while you feel the pulsation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to steer
the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
X
Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
pedal.
G Warning!
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving
safety systems such as the BAS or the
ESP® are also switched off. Observe
indicator and warning lamps that may come
on as well as messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may
lock during hard braking, reducing steering
capability and extending the braking
distance.
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
For more information, see “What to do
if …?” (Y page 371).
Off-road ABS
With the off-road driving program switched
on, or with the transmission in LOW RANGE,
mode the ABS is designed for off-road is
automatically activated.
When applying the brakes at speeds below
18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are
locked cyclically to shorten the braking
distance (dig-in effect). This effects steering
the vehicle.
BAS
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 75.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
very quickly, the BAS automatically provides
full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing
the braking distance.
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
the emergency braking situation is over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
function again as normal. The BAS is then
deactivated.
G Warning!
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system
still functions, but without the additional
brake boost available that the BAS would
normally provide in an emergency braking
maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance
may increase.
EBP
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 75.
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
of the braking effort in straight line braking
without a loss of vehicle stability.
G Warning!
If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system
will still function with full brake boost.
However, the rear wheels could lock up
during emergency braking situations, for
example. You could lose control of the
vehicle and cause an accident.
Adapt your driving style to the changed
driving characteristics.
ESP®
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 75.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running
and monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to individual wheels and by
limiting the engine output, the ESP® works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery
road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the
vehicle during braking and steering
maneuvers.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
is running.
Z
77
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
engaged.
G Warning!
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows:
RWhen
driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
speed.
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
78
! Because the ESP® operates
automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
longer than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! The ESP® will only function properly if you
use wheels of the recommended tire size
as specified in the “Technical data” section
of this Operator’s Manual.
i The Distronic system and cruise control
switch off automatically when the ESP®
engages.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (Y page 332) and
(Y page 376).
Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 75.
The 4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction
System) are components of the ESP®. The
4-ETS improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
available traction, especially under slippery
road conditions by applying the brakes to a
spinning wheel. In addition, more power is
transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
When you switch off the ESP®, the 4-ETS is
still enabled.
X If conditions require, switch on the off-road
driving program (Y page 185) or the LOW
RANGE mode (Y page 141).
Off-road 4-ETS
With the off-road driving program switched on
(Y page 185), or the transmission in LOW
RANGE mode (Y page 142), the 4-ETS
designed for off-road use is activated
automatically.
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP®
G Warning!
When you switch off the ESP®
Rthe
ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the
circumstances described below. Disabling
the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
Rthe
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
the ESP® in driving situations in which it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
Ryou
Rwhen
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
driving with snow chains
Rin
deep snow
Rin
sand or gravel
G Warning!
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to
skid or a wheel is spinning.
engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
into surfaces for better grip
Rthe
4-ETS will still apply the brakes to a
spinning wheel
ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking
Rthe
cannot activate the cruise control or
the Distronic system
Rthe
cruise control or the Distronic system
switch off if activated
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will
then not stabilize the vehicle.
1 ESP® switch
X
With the engine running, press ESP® switch
1 until the ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
G Warning!
When the ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions and to the nonoperating status of the ESP®.
Z
79
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Switching on the ESP®
X
Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving mode
with the ESP® switched on.
Off-road ESP®
With the off-road driving program switched on
(Y page 185), or with the transmission in
LOW RANGE mode (Y page 142), the ESP®
designed for off-road use is automatically
activated. At speeds below 27 mph
(45 km/h), the ESP® assists in over-/
understeering, thus improving vehicle
traction.
ESP® trailer stabilization
If the trailer you are towing should begin to
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by
80
immediately applying the brakes hard.
Steering during this maneuver will not help to
stabilize the rig.
The ESP® will assist you in such situations.
The ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts
swaying and will apply the brakes to reduce
the vehicle speed to a non-critical speed that
allows the vehicle-trailer combination to
stabilize.
The ESP® trailer stabilization is functional at
vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph
(65 km/h) when the ESP® is switched on.
G Warning!
The system will not be able to assist when
the trailer jackknifes
the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
Activating
X
With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
X
With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
open the driver’s door.
Rif
Ron
wet or icy roads
Ron
roads with slippery surface
Rin
sand or gravel
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip
over before the system recognizes swaying
of the trailer.
Deactivating
X
Switch on the ignition.
i Starting the engine will also deactivate
the immobilizer.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
charged), the system is not operational.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
i The vehicle will lock and the alarm system
Anti-theft alarm system
will rearm automatically again after
approximately 40 seconds unless you open
a door or the tailgate.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens:
Ra door
Rthe
tailgate
Rthe
hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately
closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered when
Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
key
Ra
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
1 Indicator lamp
X
door is opened from the inside
To cancel the alarm after it has been
triggered, see “Canceling the
alarm” (Y page 81).
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
Press button k or j on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of
the vehicle.
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
times, a door or the tailgate may not be
properly closed.
Close the respective element and lock the
vehicle again.
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center
is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid
system provided that you have subscribed
to the Tele Aid service and that it has been
activated properly, and that the necessary
mobile phone, power supply and GPS
coverage are available.
Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
X
X
Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
Z
81
82
Controls in detail
Vehicle equipment .............................. 84
Locking and unlocking ....................... 84
Starter switch positions ..................... 95
Seats .................................................... 97
Multifunction steering wheel .......... 108
Mirrors ............................................... 111
Memory function .............................. 113
Lighting .............................................. 114
Wipers ................................................ 122
Power windows ................................. 124
Driving and parking .......................... 128
Automatic transmission ................... 135
Transfer case ....................................
Differential locks (Canada only) ......
Instrument cluster ............................
Control system ..................................
Driving systems ................................
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents .............
Climate control .................................
3-zone automatic climate control . . .
Rear window defroster .....................
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ...............
Loading and storing ..........................
Useful features .................................
141
144
147
148
169
199
202
210
223
224
227
245
83
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
Locking and unlocking
Notes
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once, the locking knobs in the
doors move up, and the anti-theft alarm
system is disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times, the locking knobs in the
doors move down, and the anti-theft alarm
system is armed.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed.
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
with the SmartKey, the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is
drained.
RCheck the batteries in the SmartKey and
replace them if necessary.
RUse
the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door.
84
RUse
the mechanical key to lock the
vehicle.
RHave
the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
removable mechanical key.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
Rthe
doors
Rthe
tailgate
Rthe
fuel filler flap
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
1 j Lock button
2 i Unlock button for tailgate
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
3 k Unlock button
4
Battery check lamp
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Factory setting
X
Global unlocking: Press button k.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if neither door nor tailgate is
opened.
X
Global locking: Press button j.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
button k only unlocks the driver’s door
and the fuel filler flap.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
k and j simultaneously for
approximately 5 seconds until battery
check lamp 4 (Y page 85) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Press button k once.
X
Global unlocking: Press button k
twice.
X
Global locking: Press button j.
KEYLESS-GO
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
checked every time you grasp an outside door
handle.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogramm the SmartKey so that pressing
Z
85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
unlocks
Rthe
doors
Rthe
fuel filler flap
Rthe
tailgate
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
RYou
can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(Y page 84).
RYou
can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
with button j).
RAlways
RNever
86
carry the SmartKey with you.
store the SmartKey together with:
-
Electronic items such as a mobile phone
or another SmartKey
-
Metallic objects such as coins or metal
foil
Doing so could impair the function of the
KEYLESS-GO system.
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
must be located outside the vehicle within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
tailgate.
RIf
the vehicle has been parked for more
than 72 hours, you must pull an outside
door handle in order to activate the
KEYLESS-GO function.
RIf
the SmartKey is positioned farther away
from the vehicle, the system may no longer
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle
cannot be locked or the engine started via
the KEYLESS-GO system.
RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
(e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with
the SmartKey)
- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the lock button on an outside door
handle the message Key Not
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Detected appears in the multifunction
display
-
with the engine running, the message
Key Not Detected appears in the
multifunction display while driving off
or
-
RRemember
that the engine can be started
by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
inside the vehicle.
Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
If you leave the SmartKey behind when
exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
appears in the multifunction display.
Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
no SmartKey outside the vehicle):
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle,
the message Key Detected In Vehicle
appears in the multifunction display. The
vehicle will not be locked.
Find the SmartKey or change its present
location immediately (e.g. place it on the
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
pocket).
RIf
you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
turn it off again by
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button
-
inserting the SmartKey into the starter
switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
and the automatic transmission is in park
position P
RThe
vehicle could be inadvertently
unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
of the vehicle and
-
an outside door handle is splashed with
water
you attempt to clean an outside door
handle
Factory setting
X
Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
handle.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds if neither
door nor tailgate is opened.
1 Lock button on the outside door handle
X
Global locking: Press lock button 1 on an
outside door handle.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so when you
grasp the driver’s outside door handle, only
the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap unlock.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
k and j simultaneously for
approximately 5 seconds until battery
check lamp 4 (Y page 85) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Z
87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
X
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door
handle.
X
Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door
handle other than the driver’s outside door
handle.
X
Global locking: Press lock button 1 on an
outside door handle.
Checking SmartKey batteries
X
Press button j or k on the
SmartKey.
Battery check lamp 4 (Y page 85) comes
on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey
batteries are in order.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
are discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 386).
i You can obtain the required batteries at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing button
j or k will lock or unlock the vehicle
accordingly.
88
Loss of the SmartKey
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key to your car insurance
company immediately.
X
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
a door from the inside will trigger the antitheft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 81).
X Front doors: Pull on inside door handle
2 on the respective front door to open
door.
If the door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
X
Rear doors: Pull up locking knob 1 on the
respective rear door to unlock door.
X
Pull on inside door handle 2 on the
respective rear door to open door.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the tailgate lock automatically
when the vehicle is set into motion.
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
The doors are designed to unlock
automatically after an accident if the force of
the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could
therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle
is pushed or towed or is on a test stand.
You can deactivate the automatic central
locking using the control system
(Y page 163).
Locking and unlocking from the inside
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside
using the central locking switches. This can
be useful, for example, if you want to lock the
vehicle before starting to drive.
The central locking switches do not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap.
The switches are located in each front door.
X
Locking: Press central locking switch 2.
If all doors and the tailgate are closed, the
vehicle locks.
X
Unlocking: Press central unlocking switch
1.
You can open a locked door from inside at any
time. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch:
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
front door is opened from the inside
Rand
the SmartKey is set to selective
settings, only the front door opened from
the inside is unlocked
If the vehicle was previously locked centrally
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will
not unlock using the central unlocking switch.
1 Central unlocking switch
2 Central locking switch
Z
89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Tailgate
X
Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
X
Pull tailgate upwards to open.
G Warning!
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
A minimum height clearance of 7.40 ft
(2.25 m) is required to open the tailgate.
Opening the tailgate from the outside
1 Handle
90
Closing the tailgate from the outside
G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing
the tailgate. Be especially careful when
small children are around.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A
child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
1 Handles
X
Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on handles
1.
X
Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it.
Once the tailgate touches the latch, the
tailgate will pull itself shut automatically.
Opening the tailgate from the inside
with handle
G Warning!
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Children could open the tailgate
from the inside, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
! Always make sure there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
You can unlock the tailgate from the third-row
seats and then open it manually.
relock automatically if the vehicle was
locked when the tailgate was released from
the inside.
If the tailgate lock does not engage
automatically and, if applicable, the tailgate
does not relock after a few seconds, you
have to close the tailgate manually
(Y page 90).
Power tailgate
G Warning!
1 Handle
2 Push
3 Lift
X
Push handle 1 in direction of arrow 2 and
hold it there.
X
From this position, lift handle 1 in
direction of arrow 3 and hold it there.
The tailgate is released and can be opened
manually.
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
! The tailgate swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 7.40 ft
(2.25 m) is required to open the tailgate.
In vehicles with power tailgate, you can
Ropen
and close the tailgate from the inside
and the outside electrically
Rlimit
the opening height of the tailgate
Rinterrupt the opening/closing procedure at
any time by
- pressing or pulling the door-mounted
remote tailgate switch
-
pressing button i on the SmartKey
-
pressing the tailgate closing switch
-
pressing the KEYLESS-GO locking/
closing switch
Depending on production date, an acoustic
warning sounds when opening or closing the
tailgate.
Opening the tailgate from the outside
You can unlock and open the tailgate
simultaneously from the outside when the
vehicle is stationary.
i If you do not open the tailgate within a few
seconds, the tailgate lock will engage again
automatically. Additionally, the tailgate will
Z
91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
X
Press and hold button i on the
SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and
begins to open.
While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
warning sounds.
or
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Pull on the
handle (Y page 90).
The tailgate is unlocked and opens.
Depending on production date, an acoustic
warning sounds while the tailgate opens.
Closing the tailgate from the outside
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal
injury, always keep hands and fingers away
from the cargo compartment opening when
closing the tailgate. Be especially careful
when small children are around. To stop the
closing procedure, do one of the following:
92
RPress
button i on the SmartKey.
RPress
or pull the remote tailgate
opening/closing switch on the driver’s
door.
RPress
the tailgate closing switch.
RPress
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
In vehicles with power tailgate you can close
the tailgate separately from the outside using
the tailgate closing switch or button i on
the SmartKey.
Do not leave the SmartKey in the vehicle. You
may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the
tailgate will lock automatically after closing it.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
confirm locking.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
1 Tailgate closing switch
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
1 Tailgate closing switch
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
X
Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly or
press and hold button i on the
SmartKey.
The tailgate closes. Depending on
production date, an acoustic warning
sounds when the tailgate closes.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens.
Closing the tailgate and locking the
vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO)
RPress
button i on the SmartKey.
RPress
or pull the remote tailgate
opening/closing switch on the driver’s
door.
RPress
the tailgate closing switch.
RPress
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
In vehicles with power tailgate and KEYLESSGO, you can close the tailgate and lock the
vehicle simultaneously from the outside using
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
Make sure you have the SmartKey with you.
X
Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
1 briefly.
The tailgate closes automatically.
Depending on production date, an acoustic
warning sounds.
Once the tailgate and all doors are closed:
RThe vehicle locks.
RThe
turn signals flash three times to
confirm locking.
RThe
locking knobs in the doors move
down.
RThe
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal
injury, always keep hands and fingers away
from the cargo compartment opening when
closing the tailgate. Be especially careful
when small children are around. To stop the
closing procedure, do one of the following:
X
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens.
The closing process is stopped if the system
cannot recognize a SmartKey with KEYLESSGO anymore. In this case, make sure the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate and
repeat the closing procedure if necessary.
The tailgate remains unlocked when a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized
inside the vehicle to prevent a possible
inadvertent lockout. In this case, the turn
93
Z
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
signals will not flash and the anti-theft alarm
will be triggered when the tailgate is opened.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate
switch or press button i on the
SmartKey.
Opening/closing the tailgate from the
inside
Opening
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear
of the vehicle while operating the tailgate
with the door-mounted remote tailgate
switch or with button i on the
SmartKey. Monitor the opening procedure
carefully to make sure no one is in danger
of being injured.
To interrupt the opening procedure, press
or pull the door-mounted remote tailgate
switch or press button i on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with power tailgate you can unlock
and open the tailgate simultaneously from the
driver’s seat when the vehicle is stationary.
94
1 Remote tailgate opening/closing switch
X
Pull remote tailgate switch 1 until tailgate
begins to open.
While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
warning sounds.
Closing
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear
of the vehicle while operating the tailgate
with the door-mounted remote tailgate
switch. Monitor the closing procedure
carefully to make sure no one is in danger
of being injured.
In vehicles with power tailgate you can close
the tailgate from the inside using the remote
tailgate switch.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high) the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Press remote tailgate switch 1 until the
tailgate begins to close.
The tailgate closes. While the tailgate is
closing an acoustic warning sounds.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
X Press or pull remote tailgate switch 1.
Limiting opening height of tailgate
You can limit the opening height of the
tailgate in the upper opening range. This can
be useful, for example, when the space above
the tailgate is not sufficient.
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions
Activating
X Open tailgate: Pull on handle (Y page 90)
or press and hold button i on the
SmartKey until the tailgate opens.
X
Stop opening procedure: When the
tailgate is in the desired position, press
tailgate closing switch (Y page 93) or press
button i on the SmartKey once more.
Starter switch positions
SmartKey
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not
be sufficiently charged.
RCheck the vehicle battery and charge it
if necessary.
i You can also press or pull the remote
tailgate switch (Y page 94) to stop the
opening procedure.
X
Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
in the tailgate (Y page 93) until you hear a
short acoustic signal.
The opening height of the tailgate is limited.
The tailgate will now stop at the stored
position when opened.
Deactivating
X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
in the tailgate until you hear two short,
consecutive acoustic signals.
have it checked and replaced if necessary. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on
after starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
cluster” (Y page 370).
RGet
Starter switch
} For removing SmartKey
$ Power supply for some electrical
consumers, e.g. radio
% Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
& Starting position
a jump start.
To prevent accelerated vehicle battery
discharge or a completely discharged
vehicle battery, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch when the
engine is not in operation.
i If the SmartKey does not belong to the
vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the
starter switch. However, the ignition does
not switch on and the engine does not start.
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
(except high-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster come on.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is switched on,
Z
95
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions
the engine can be started using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
KEYLESS-GO
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
inserted in the starter switch and the
SmartKey present in the vehicle, pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
the brake pedal depressed
corresponds to the various starter switch
positions (Y page 95)
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
3 USA only
Rwithout
Rwith
the brake pedal firmly depressed will
start the engine (Y page 128)
If you wish or should there be the need to
insert the SmartKey in the starter switch, the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be easily
removed by pulling it out of the starter switch.
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
not need to be removed from the starter
switch when you leave the vehicle.
However, always take the SmartKey with
you when you leave the vehicle. As long as
the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
electrical systems can be switched on or
96
4 Canada only
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
2 Starter switch
Position 0
X
Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1
into starter switch 2 (if not inserted
already).
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
Position 1
X
Do not depress the brake pedal.
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as radio functions.
Controls in detail
Seats
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button
more, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
Ronce
Rtwice
more the power supply is again
switched off
Ignition (or position 2)
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers.
All lamps (except high-beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument
cluster fails to come on when the ignition
is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
cluster” (Y page 370).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button once, the power supply is again
switched off.
Seats
Safety notes
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control all seat, head restraint, steering
wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
well as fastening of seat belts, must be
done before the vehicle is put into motion.
G Warning!
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest
and seat belts provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in a position that is as
upright as possible and seat belts are
properly positioned on the body.
G Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Observe the following points:
RAdjust
the seat backrest until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
RAdjust
the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.
RAdjust
the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning!
The power seats can be operated at any
time. Therefore, do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
97
Z
Controls in detail
Seats
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly
recommend that children be placed in the
rear seats whenever possible. Regardless
of seating position, children 12 years old
and under must be seated and properly
secured in an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see
“Children in the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
98
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Power seat
Seat adjustment
! When moving the seats, make sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats.
1 Head restraint height (vehicles with
memory function)
2 Seat cushion tilt
3 Seat height
4 Seat backrest tilt
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
! When the second-row seats are folded
forward, e. g. for cargo volume expansion,
the front seats may not be moved to the
rearmost position. Otherwise you could
damage the front and second-row seats.
! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and
head restraint height, make sure the sun
visor is folded up. If the head restraint is in
Controls in detail
Seats
the uppermost position, it could hit and
damage the sun visor.
i Vehicles without memory function:
The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes
after either front door has been opened.
The counter resets each time
Ryou
open or close a front door
Ryou
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
X
Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow 5.
X
Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
forward or backward in direction of arrow
4.
X
Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow 3.
X
Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
down in direction of arrow 2 until your
upper legs are lightly supported.
Ryou
Ryou
switch the ignition on or off
Just like in vehicles with memory function,
the power seats can be operated at any
time when the ignition is switched on.
i The memory function (Y page 113) lets
you store the settings for the seat position
together with the settings for the steering
wheel (electrical) and exterior rear view
mirrors.
X
Head restraint height: Press the switch
up or down in direction of arrow 1.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
move the respective head restraint up from
the lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint
properly.
! Do not attempt to remove front seat head
restraints. They can only be removed by
qualified technicians. We recommend that
you have this work carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Head restraint height adjustment, manual
This feature is only available in vehicles
without memory function.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
1 Head restraint
2 Release button
Z
99
Controls in detail
Seats
X
X
Raising: Adjust the height of head restraint
1 manually by pulling it upward.
If head restraint 1 is fully retracted, push
release button 2 in direction of arrow and
pull head restraint 1 upward.
Lowering: Push release button 2 in
direction of arrow and press down on head
restraint 1.
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
G Warning!
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment
System: When adjusting the head restraint,
make sure your fingers do not become
caught between the head restraint cushion
and the monitor. Failing to do so may lead
to injury.
X
While seated, reach behind you with both
hands and find lower edge of the head
restraint.
X
Adjust the head restraint to the desired
position by pushing or pulling on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.
Easy-entry/exit feature for third-row
seats
This feature allows for easier access to and
exit from the vehicle’s third-row seats.
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, the secondrow seat backrests must be properly locked
either in the upright position or, when using
the expanded cargo volume, in the fully
folded position while the vehicle is in
motion.
Easy-entry feature for third-row seats
The lever for the easy-entry feature is located
on the rear of the seat base of the passenger
side second-row seat.
100
1 Easy-entry lever
! Make sure the head restraint is pushed all
the way down.
X
Pull and hold easy-entry lever 1 in
direction of arrow at resistance point.
The seat backrest folds forward.
Controls in detail
Seats
For setting the front passenger seat back into
the stored position, see “Recalling positions
from memory” (Y page 114).
Easy-exit feature for third-row seats
The easy-exit strap is located on the right rear
of the second-row seat base.
1 Easy-entry lever
Easy-entry/exit position
X
Pull and hold easy-entry lever 1 once
again in direction of arrow at resistance
point.
X
Lift up the right second-row seat until it
folds forward.
You should now have sufficient space to
access the vehicle’s third-row seat.
While the easy-entry feature is activated, you
will see, for example, the following message
in the multifunction display:
2nd Row Of Seats - Right
Not Locked
X Return seat into its original position.
The message in the multifunction display
disappears.
i Vehicles with memory function:
The front passenger seat moved slightly
forward.
For setting the front passenger seat back into
the stored position, see “Recalling positions
from memory” (Y page 114).
X Enter the vehicle.
For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see
“Expanding cargo volume” (Y page 235).
Easy-exit strap
X
To exit the vehicle when seated on a thirdrow seat, pull up and hold easy-exit strap
1.
The right second-row seat backrest folds
forward.
X
Pull and hold once easy-entry strap 1.
X
Lift up the right second-row seat until it
folds forward.
101
Z
Controls in detail
Seats
You should now have sufficient space to
exit the vehicle’s third-row seat.
i Vehicles with memory function:
The front passenger seat moved slightly
forward.
While the easy-entry feature is activated, you
will see, for example, the following message
in the multifunction display:
2nd Row Of Seats - Right
Not Locked
X Return seat into its original position
(Y page 102).
The message in the multifunction display
disappears.
For setting the front passenger seat back into
the stored position, see “Recalling positions
from memory” (Y page 114).
For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see
“Expanding cargo volume” (Y page 235).
102
Returning second-row seats to their
original position
G Warning!
Emergency exit for third-row seats
i If, due to an accident or other situation, it
is not possible for you to exit the vehicle on
the side of the easy-entry seat
(Y page 100), you can fold the left side of
the seat backrest in the second row of
seats down in order to open the left rear
door.
When occupants have entered or exited the
vehicle using the easy-entry/exit feature,
before driving off make sure
Rthe seats are properly locked
Rthe
seat backrests are in an upright
position and are properly locked
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
locked, the seat could move forward and
the seat backrest could fold. You could
slide under the seat belt during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. If you
slide under it, the seat belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries.
X
Fold seat back until it audibly engages.
X
Fold seat backrest back into original
position until it engages.
To make sure the seat backrest has
engaged, lean firmly against the seat
backrest.
1 Emergency release
2 Seat backrest
! Make sure the head restraint is pushed all
the way down.
X
Pull emergency release 1 in the direction
of arrow.
X
Push seat backrest 2 forwards.
Controls in detail
Seats
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury when folding
the seat backrest forward, make sure you
move both feet and legs all the way back
and out of the way to avoid them contacting
the seat as it pivots forward.
In order to prevent an accident or any other
potentially dangerous situations when
opening the rear door and exiting the
vehicle, make sure you are aware of the
traffic situation at all times.
X
Open the left door.
X
Exit the vehicle.
Lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the driver’s seat
lumbar support to help enhance support to
your spine.
Rear seats
G Warning!
1 Curvature up
2 Less curvature
3 Curvature down
4 Greater curvature
X
Curvature position: Use button 1 to
move the curvature up and button 3 to
move it down.
X
Degree of curvature: Use button 2 to
lessen the curvature and button 4 to
increase it.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly
recommend that children be placed in the
rear seats whenever possible. Regardless
of seating position, children 12 years old
and under must be seated and properly
secured in an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see
“Children in the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Rear seat adjustment
G Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
103
Z
Controls in detail
Seats
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and
seat belts are properly positioned on the
body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
After adjusting rear seats, make sure
Rthe seats are properly locked
Seat backrest tilt (second-row seats)
G Warning!
The seat belt only offers its intended
protection when the seat backrest is in a
nearly vertical position and the occupant is
sitting upright. Avoid sitting in positions
that prevent the seat belt from being
properly positioned against the body. You
should therefore adjust the seat backrest
to a position as upright as possible.
The seat backrest tilt can be set to five
different positions.
Rthe
seat backrests are in an upright
position and are properly locked
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrests. If a seat and
seat backrest are not properly locked, the
seat could move forward and the seat
backrest could fold. The child seat would
no longer be properly supported or
positioned to provide its intended benefit.
104
X
While seated, pull handle 1 in direction of
arrow to resistance point and hold it there.
X
To move seat backrest back, lean lightly
against the seat backrest.
X
To move seat backrest forward, lean
forward with handle 1 pulled and held at
resistance point.
The seat backrest will move forward
against your back.
X
Release handle 1 when the seat backrest
has reached the desired position.
To make sure the seat backrest has
engaged, lean firmly against the seat
backrest.
Head restraint height
G Warning!
1 Adjustment handle
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
move the respective head restraint up from
the lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint
properly.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
Controls in detail
Seats
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
Second-row seat head restraint
1 Head restraint
2 Release button
X
Raising: Manually adjust the height of head
restraint 1 by pulling it upward to the
desired position.
X
Lowering: Push release button 2 and
press down on head restraint 1.
i The third-row seat head restraints are
adjusted in the same manner.
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
The angle of the head restraint for the outer
second-row seats or the third-row seats can
be adjusted manually.
X While seated, reach behind you with both
hands and find lower edge of the head
restraint.
X
seats are occupied. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
move the respective head restraint up from
the lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint
properly.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level. This will
reduce the potential for injury to the head
and neck in the event of an accident or
similar situation.
Adjust the head restraint to the desired
position by pushing or pulling on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.
Head restraints, removing and
installing
G Warning!
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints installed when the rear
Z
105
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing
X Second-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
forward (Y page 104).
Second-row seat head restraint
1 Head restraint
X
Third-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
forward (Y page 235).
X
Insert head restraint 1 into openings on
the seat backrest.
X
Push head restraint 1 down until it audibly
engages.
X
Push release button 2 and adjust head
restraint 1 to the desired position
(Y page 104).
X
Second-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
rearward until it engages.
X
Third-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
rearward (Y page 235).
2 Release button
Removing
X Second-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
forward (Y page 104).
X
Third-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
forward (Y page 235).
X
Pull head restraint 1 to its uppermost
position.
X
Press release button 2 and pull out head
restraint 1.
X
Second-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
rearward until it engages.
X
Third-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
rearward (Y page 235).
106
Multicontour seat
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built into
the seat backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
1 Seat cushion depth
2 Seat backrest side bolster
3 Seat backrest center
4 Seat backrest bottom
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Seat cushion depth: Adjust the seat
cushion depth to the length of your upper
leg using switch 1.
X
Seat backrest contour: Adjust the
contour of the seat backrest to the desired
position using + or -.
Controls in detail
Seats
X
X
Move the seat backrest support cushion to
the bottom with button 4 or to the center
with button 3.
Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust the
side bolsters so that they provide good
lateral support using switch 2.
Seat ventilation
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on: Press switch 1.
Three blue indicator lamps 2 in the switch
come on.
X
Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
desired ventilation level is set.
X
Switching off: Press switch 1 repeatedly
until all indicator lamps 2 go out.
Seat heating
1 Seat ventilation switch
2 Indicator lamps
The blue indicator lamps in the switch come
on to show which ventilation level you have
selected.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
can be activated using summer opening
feature (Y page 127).
1 Front seat heating switch
2 Indicator lamps
The switches for the outboard second-row
seat heating are located in the rear center
console.
1 Rear seat heating switch
2 Indicator lamps
The red indicator lamps in the switch come
on to show which heating level you have
selected.
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
The seat heating automatically switches off
after approximately 20 minutes.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on: Press switch 1.
Three red indicator lamps 2 in the switch
come on.
Z
107
Controls in detail
Multifunction steering wheel
X
Continue pressing switch 1 until desired
seat heating level is reached.
X
Switching off: Press switch 1 repeatedly
until all indicator lamps 2 go out.
If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 in the
seat heating switch 1 are flashing, there is
insufficient voltage available since too many
electrical consumers are turned on. The seat
heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
Multifunction steering wheel
Safety notes
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
driving, or driving without the steering
wheel adjustment feature locked could
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Make sure
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows
Ryou
Rall
can move your legs freely
displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible
108
Steering wheel adjustment, manual
(USA only)
1 Release handle
X
Unlocking: Pull release handle 1 out to
its stop limit.
X
Move steering wheel to the desired
position.
X
Locking: Push release handle 1 back to
its original position.
X
Make sure the steering wheel is securely
locked by trying to move it up and down as
well as in and out before driving off.
Controls in detail
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical
Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows the driver an easier entry
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is
in its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the
control system (Y page 163).
G Warning!
1 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out
2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down
X
Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move
stalk in direction of arrows 1.
X
Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
Move stalk in direction of arrows 2.
i The memory function (Y page 113) lets
you store the settings for the steering
wheel together with the settings for the
seat position and the exterior rear view
mirrors.
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement do one
of the following:
RMove
steering wheel adjustment stalk.
RPress
one of the memory position
buttons.
RPress
memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could open the driver’s
door and unintentionally activate the easyentry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position is
stored when the ignition is switched off or
the position is stored in memory
(Y page 114).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position
1.
i When the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
steering wheel will no longer be able to
move upward when the easy-entry/exit
feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly
interrupted when the engine is started.
109
Z
Controls in detail
Multifunction steering wheel
G Warning!
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the
stalk in direction of arrow 1.
Indicator lamp 3 comes on.
i The steering wheel heating may be
suspended temporarily. However, indicator
lamp 3 remains on. The steering wheel
heating is suspended when the
temperature of the vehicle interior is above
86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
temperature of the steering wheel is above
95‡ (35†).
When these conditions do not apply
anymore, steering wheel heating
continues.
Heated steering wheel
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
X
Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
stalk in direction of arrow 2.
Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
i Indicator lamp 3 flashes or goes out in
case of power surge or undervoltage or if
the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
1 Switching on
2 Switching off
3 Indicator lamp
110
i The steering wheel heating switches off
automatically when you remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch or, on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
switch off the ignition and open the driver’s
door.
For more information on the steering wheel,
see “Multifunction steering
wheel” (Y page 148).
Controls in detail
Mirrors
Mirrors
Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.
Interior rear view mirror
X
Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually.
For more information, see “Auto-dimming
rear view mirrors” (Y page 112).
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
position
X
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by
moving lever 1 towards the windshield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
Exterior rear view mirrors
3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
button
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button 1 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 3 for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
comes on for approximately 15 seconds.
If you do not make adjustments to the
selected exterior rear view mirror within
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
You will then have to select the desired
exterior rear view mirror again before
adjustments can be made. Adjustments
can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated.
X
Press adjustment button 2 up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
G Warning!
Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved
surface for a wider field of view). Objects in
mirror are closer than they appear. Check
your interior rear view mirror and glance
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
1 Lever
button
2 Adjustment button
! Vehicle with power folding exterior rear
view mirrors:
Z
111
Controls in detail
Mirrors
If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from front),
press fold button to fold mirrors in, then
press fold button again to fold mirrors out.
Do not force mirrors by hand as this may
damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
side and the interior rear view mirror will
respond automatically to glare when the
ignition is switched on and incoming light
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
interior rear view mirror.
The rear view mirrors will not react if the
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear
R or the interior lighting is switched on.
112
G Warning!
The auto-dimming function does not react
if incoming light is not aimed directly at
sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the
exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side
do not react, for example, when
transporting cargo which covers the rear
window.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic
conditions and could cause an accident.
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors
! Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
damaged.
Folding in and out automatically
When the corresponding function in the
control system is activated (Y page 164):
RThe
exterior rear view mirrors fold in
automatically as soon as the vehicle is
locked from the outside.
RThe
exterior rear view mirrors fold out
automatically as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front
passenger door are subsequently opened.
Synchronizing
The power folding rear view mirrors may have
to be synchronized after the vehicle battery
has been disconnected or discharged. If the
exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly
upon locking or unlocking the vehicle
although the corresponding function in the
control system is activated (Y page 164), do
the following:
X Fold each exterior rear view mirror in
completely (Y page 113).
X
Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
completely (Y page 113).
When the exterior rear view mirrors fold
properly upon locking the vehicle, the exterior
mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeat
the above steps.
Controls in detail
Memory function
Folding in and out manually
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not folded out completely.
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
front), press button 1 to fold mirrors in,
then press button 1 again to fold mirrors
out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.
Please make sure both rear view mirrors
are folded out before driving off.
Memory function
Notes
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
seat.
Each memory position button on the driver’s
side can store all of the following settings:
RSeat
position
RMulticontour seat: previously saved setting
RSteering
RExterior
1 Button for folding exterior rear view
mirrors in and out
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Folding in: Briefly press button 1.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
i If you are driving at more than
approximately 30 mph (47 km/h), you will
not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in.
X
Folding out: Briefly press button 1.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
wheel position
rear view mirrors’ position
G Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Each memory position button on the front
passenger side can store all of the following
settings:
RSeat
position
RMulticontour seat: previously saved setting
Z
113
Controls in detail
Lighting
Recalling positions from memory
X
Press and hold desired memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has
completely moved to the stored position.
On the driver’s side, also wait for the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to move to the stored position.
i Releasing the memory position button
M
Memory button
1, 2, 3 Memory position button
Storing positions into memory
X
Adjust the seats.
X
On the driver’s side, additionally adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X
Press memory button M.
X
Release memory button M and press
memory position button 1, 2 or 3 within
3 seconds.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
114
stops movement to the stored positions
immediately.
Lighting
Notes
i If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than the
country where the vehicle is registered, you
must have the headlamps modified for
symmetrical low beams. Relevant
information can be obtained at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon
headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor the
vehicle’s steering angle and speed, then
automatically shift their beams to either
side to better follow the curvature of the
road ahead, increasing usable illumination
over conventional headlamps.
Controls in detail
Lighting
starter switch or open the driver’s door with
the ignition switched off.
When the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp are switched on and you remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch or open
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal
sounds.
In addition the message Switch Off
Lights appears in the multifunction
display.
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp manually.
Exterior lamp switch
$ a Standing lamps, left
% g Standing lamps, right
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps
when leaving the vehicle may result in a
discharged battery.
& M Off
(U
)C
*B
,¥
.†
Daytime running lamp mode
Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps and instrument panel lamps)
Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
headlamps
Front fog lamps
Rear fog lamp
i The exterior lamps go out automatically
when you remove the SmartKey from the
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
RInstrument
panel lamps
RGreen indicator lamp C in the exterior
lamp switch
X
Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position M.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps come on and go out
automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
RLow-beam
RTail
headlamps
lamps
Low-beam headlamps
RParking
lamps
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on
and off with the exterior lamp switch.
X Switch on the ignition.
RLicense
plate lamps
X
Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B.
The following lamps come on:
RLow-beam headlamps
RTail
lamps
RParking
lamps
RSide
marker lamps
G Warning!
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
the headlamps will not automatically come
on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others,
activate headlamps by turning exterior
lamp switch to B when driving or when
115
Z
Controls in detail
Lighting
traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions
require you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible
for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at
all times.
X
Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button pressed once, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps and the side
marker lamps will come on and go out
depending on the brightness of the ambient
light.
When the engine is running the low-beam
headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the
license plate lamps and the side marker
lamps will come on and go out depending
on the brightness of the ambient light.
116
Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only
available with the exterior lamp switch in
position B.
Daytime running lamp mode
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated by default. Activate the
daytime running lamp mode using the control
system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)” (Y page 161).
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
M or U.
When the engine is running, the low-beam
headlamps come on.
In low ambient lighting conditions, the
following lamps will come on additionally:
RTail
lamps
RParking
lamps
RLicense
plate lamps
RSide
marker lamps
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, you cannot
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually.
Canada only
With the exterior lamp switch in position
M or U, you cannot switch on the highbeam headlamps.
The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B to permit activation
of the high-beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you
Rshift
from a driving position to neutral
position N or park position P with the
vehicle at a standstill, the low-beam
headlamps will go out with a delay of 3
minutes
Rturn
the exterior lamp switch to position
C, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps
and the side marker lamps come on
Rturn
the exterior lamp switch to position
B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 115).
Controls in detail
Lighting
USA only
With the exterior lamp switch in position
M, you cannot switch on the high-beam
headlamps.
The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B or U to permit
activation of the high-beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you turn the
exterior lamp switch to position C or
B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 115).
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps
and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
regarding permissible lamp operation.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
C or B (Y page 115).
X
Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to first stop.
The green indicator lamp ¥ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
X
Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps and
the yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch come on.
Fog lamps
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position U. To
switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior
lamp switch to position B first.
G Warning!
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe
location.
X
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
Locator lighting and night security
illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see “Setting locator
lighting” (Y page 161) and “Setting night
security illumination (Headlamps delayed
shut-off feature)” (Y page 162).
Combination switch
1 High beam
2 High-beam flasher
Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop.
Z
117
Controls in detail
Lighting
High beam
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
B (Y page 115).
X
Switching on: Push the combination
switch in direction of arrow 1.
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
A in the instrument cluster comes on.
X
Switching off: Pull the combination switch
in direction of arrow 2 to its original
position.
High-beam flasher
X
Switching on: Pull the combination switch
briefly in direction of arrow 2.
Turn signals
The hazard warning flasher can be switched
on at all times, even with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch.
The hazard warning flasher comes on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
X
Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes.
The combination switch resets automatically
after major steering wheel movements.
i To signal minor directional changes such
as changing lanes, press combination
switch only to point of resistance and
release. The corresponding turn signal
lamps will flash three times.
118
Hazard warning flasher
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
X
Switching on: Press hazard warning
flasher switch 1.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either
left or right turn, only the respective left or
Controls in detail
Lighting
right turn signals will operate when the
ignition is switched on.
X
Switching off: Press hazard warning
flasher switch 1 again.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard
warning flasher switch 1 once to switch
off.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps will be cleaned with a highpressure water jet automatically when the
engine is running and you have
Rswitched
on the headlamps
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only operate
Rin
windshield wipers have wiped the
windshield with washer fluid five times
The counter resets when you switch off the
headlamps.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 271).
low ambient lighting conditions
Rat
vehicle speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h)
Rwith
the front fog lamps switched off
Rwith
the engine is running
Switching on
X
and
Rthe
front fog lamp comes on on the side of the
turn signal.
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
B or U.
or
X
Activate the daytime running lamp mode
(Y page 116).
X
Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning left
or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If
you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
other direction, the corner-illuminating
or
X
Turn steering wheel in the desired
direction.
Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the
side of your steering direction comes on.
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp
opposite to your steering direction comes
on.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on
either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
will also go out automatically depending on
the steering angle and vehicle speed.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
temporarily come on on both sides of the
vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
direction and then again in the other direction
shortly thereafter.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
remains lit for a maximum of 3 minutes.
Afterward, it goes out even if the turn signal
is still switched on.
Z
119
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching off
X
Interior lighting in the front
Automatic control
X
Switch off the left or right turn signal.
or
X
Steer straight ahead.
i There may be a brief delay before the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
Activating: Press button ].
Button ] disengages and sits flush with
the other buttons.
The interior lighting and the locator lighting
(Y page 161) come on in darkness, when
you:
Runlock the vehicle
Rremove
the SmartKey from the starter
switch
X
Ropen
a door
Ropen
the tailgate
Deactivating: Press button ].
Button ] engages.
The interior lighting goes out after a preset
time (Y page 162).
1 X Left front reading lamp on/off
2 ò Rear interior lighting on/off
3 ] Automatic control on/off
4 ð Front interior lighting on/off
5 X Right front reading lamp on/off
6 Front interior lighting
7 Front reading lamps
8 Front interior lighting
120
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
go out automatically after approximately
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed
or in starter switch position 0.
Manual control
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON
position for extended periods of time with
the engine turned off could result in a
discharged battery.
X
Switching on/off front interior
lighting: Press switch ð.
X
Switching on/off rear interior lighting:
Press switch ò.
X
Switching on/off front reading lamps:
Press respective switch X.
Interior lighting in the rear
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON
position for extended periods of time with
the engine turned off could result in a
discharged battery.
Third-row reading lamps
The third-row reading lamps are located in the
rear overhead control panel.
Second-row reading lamps
The second-row reading lamps are located
above the rear door windows.
Emergency lighting
1 X Right third-row reading lamp on/off
When the interior lighting is set to automatic
mode, the interior lighting is activated
automatically if the vehicle is involved in an
accident.
X Switching off: Press button ].
2 X Left third-row reading lamp on/off
3 Left third-row reading lamp
4 Rear interior lighting
5 Right third-row reading lamp
or
X
1 Second-row reading lamp
or
X
X
Press hazard warning flasher switch
(Y page 118).
Unlock the vehicle.
X
Switching on/off rear reading lamps:
Press second-row reading lamp 1 as
indicated by the arrow.
Switching on/off third-row reading
lamps: Press respective reading lamp
switch X.
i The rear interior lighting is switched on
and off using the button on the front
overhead control panel (Y page 120).
Z
121
Controls in detail
Wipers
Wipers
Notes
! Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield/rear window is dry. Dust that
accumulates on a windshield/rear window
might scratch the glass and/or damage the
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield/rear window. If it is necessary
to operate the wipers in dry weather
conditions, always operate the wipers with
washer fluid.
Windshield wipers
Switching on/off
M
Windshield wipers off
U
Slow intermittent wiping
Rain sensor operation with low
sensitivity.
V
Fast intermittent wiping
Rain sensor operation with high
sensitivity.
u
Slow continuous wiping
t
Fast continuous wiping
X
Turn the combination switch in direction of
arrow 2 to the desired position,
depending on the intensity of the rain.
Intermittent wiping
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
Wiping with washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
X
Switch on the ignition.
122
Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
weather conditions or in the presence of
precipitation.
When you select intermittent wiping, the rain
sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
suitable wiping interval depending on the
wetness of the sensor surface automatically.
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will
operate in the presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and windshield wipers
may be damaged as a result.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
the surface of the rain sensor or optical
effects may cause the windshield wipers to
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could
then damage the windshield wiper blades
or scratch the windshield. You should
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry.
X
Turn the combination switch to position
U or V.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor
automatically.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Controls in detail
Wipers
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
doors are closed and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R
or
Rthe
wiper setting is changed using the
combination switch
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 271).
For information on cleaning the headlamps
with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 119).
6 Rear window wiper indicator
Rear window wiper/washer
Single wipe
X
Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with washer fluid
X
Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with washer
fluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
washer fluid every now and then even when
it is raining.
Combination switch
1 Rear window wiper switch
% Wiping rear window with washer fluid
& Intermittent wiping
( Rear window wiper off
) Wiping rear window with washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
The rear window wiper engages automatically
when the automatic transmission is shifted
into reverse gear R with the windshield wipers
switched on.
X Activating intermittent wiping: Turn rear
window wiper switch 1 to position &.
In the lower multifunction display you will
see rear window wiper indicator 6,
indicating that the rear window wiper is
activated.
X
Deactivating intermittent wiping: Turn
rear window wiper switch 1 to position
(.
Indicator 6 for the rear window wiper is
cleared from the lower multifunction
Z
123
Controls in detail
Power windows
display, indicating that the rear window
wiper is deactivated.
X
Wiping with washer fluid: Turn and hold
rear window wiper switch 1 in position
% or ) until the rear window is clean.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 271).
Problems with wipers
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a
safe location, and
R-
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or
-
turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the
driver’s door open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with SmartKey
removed from starter switch)
-
engage the parking brake
124
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
RRemove
RTurn
blockage.
the windshield wipers on again.
If the windshield wipers fail to function at
all with the combination switch in position
U or V,
Rset
the combination switch to the next
higher wiper speed
Rhave
the windshield wipers checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
Power windows
Opening and closing
The door windows and the hinged quarter
windows are opened and closed electrically.
The switches for all door windows and the
hinged quarter windows are located on the
driver’s door control panel. The switches for
the respective door windows are located on
the front passenger door and the rear doors.
The hinged quarter windows can be operated
from the driver’s seat only.
i Operating the rear door windows from
the rear is not possible when you activate
the override switch (Y page 74).
Vehicles equipped with the PRE-SAFE®
system: If the vehicle is in a severe skid or is
spinning, the door windows close until only a
small gap remains.
G Warning!
When opening or closing the windows,
make sure there is no danger of anyone
being harmed by the opening/closing
procedure.
The door windows are equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If in express operation mode a
Controls in detail
Power windows
door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path, the automatic reversal
function will stop the door window and
open it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when
the switch is pressed and held. See the
“Closing when a door window is blocked”
section in this chapter for details.
The closing of a door window can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch
or, if the switch was pulled past the
resistance point and released, by either
pressing or pulling the respective switch.
The closing of the hinged quarter windows
can be immediately halted by pressing or
pulling the switch.
If a window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path in a circumstance where you
are closing the windows by pressing and
holding button j on the SmartKey or by
pressing and holding the lock button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside
door handle, the automatic reversal
function will not operate.
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure
themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in
the window opening.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
G Warning!
Do not keep any part of your body up
against the window pane when opening a
window. The downward motion of the pane
may pull that part of your body down
between the window pane and the door
frame and trap it there. If there is a risk of
entrapment, release the switch and pull it
to close the window.
i You can also open or close the windows
using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
feature” (Y page 127) and “Convenience
closing feature” (Y page 127).
i After switching off the ignition or
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch, you can operate the windows until
you open the driver’s or front passenger
door. If no door was opened you can
operate the windows for up to 5 minutes.
1 Left front door window
2 Right front door window
3 Right rear door window
4 Left rear door window
5 Hinged quarter windows
Door windows
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Opening/Closing: Press or pull and hold
switch 1 to 4 to the resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards or upwards until you release
the switch.
Z
125
Controls in detail
Power windows
X
X
Express operation: Press or pull switch
1 to 4 past the resistance point and
release.
The corresponding window opens or closes
completely.
Stopping during express operation:
Press or pull the respective switch again.
Closing when a door window is blocked
G Warning!
Make sure that nobody can become
trapped and be seriously or even fatally
injured when closing a door window with
greater force or without automatic reversal
function.
If the upward movement of a door window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
door window will stop and open slightly.
However, the door window will exert greater
force before reversing than when the door
window is closed in express operation. Please
exercise caution!
X
Immediately after the door window has
stopped because it was blocked, pull the
respective switch upwards until the door
window is fully closed.
126
If the door window is blocked again and opens
slightly:
X
Immediately after the door window was
blocked, pull the respective switch
upwards until the door window is fully
closed.
the closing process, they will stop and open
slightly.
X
G Warning!
Pressing and holding the switch to close the
door window immediately after it had been
blocked two times will cause the door
window to close without any reversal
function for as long as you hold the switch.
Halting closing process: Press or pull
switch 5 once more during the closing
process.
The hinged quarter windows will stop and
open completely.
i For your safety, the hinged quarter
windows cannot be opened again until
4 seconds have passed.
Synchronizing door windows
Hinged quarter windows
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Opening: Press switch 5 and release.
Both hinged quarter windows open
completely.
X
Closing: Pull switch 5 and release.
Both hinged quarter windows close
completely.
i When the obstruction sensor detects that
a hinged quarter windows is blocked during
The door windows must be synchronized after
the battery has been disconnected or if the
door windows cannot be fully closed (express
operation).
Each door window must be synchronized
separately.
X Close all doors.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Pull and hold switch 1, 2, 3 or 4
(Y page 125) until the respective door
window is closed.
The door window opens again slightly.
Controls in detail
Power windows
X
Pull and hold the respective switch once
more immediately until the door window is
completely closed.
X
Hold the respective switch for
approximately 1 second.
The door window is synchronized.
Summer opening feature
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate the
vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:
Ropening
the door windows
Ropening
the hinged quarter windows
Ropening
the tilt/sliding sunroof
Rswitching
on the seat ventilation for the
driver’s seat
The “Summer opening” feature can only be
activated via the remote control of the
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close
proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
driver’s outside door handle.
X
Press and hold button k on the
SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof have reached the desired
position.
The vehicle unlocks.
X
Release button k on the SmartKey to
interrupt the opening procedure.
Convenience closing feature
closing procedure, press and hold button
j.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RRelease
the lock button on the outside
door handle to stop the closing
procedure.
RImmediately
pull on the same outside
door handle and hold firmly. The windows
and the tilt/sliding sunroof will open for
as long as the door handle is held but the
door not opened.
When locking the vehicle, you can
simultaneously close
Rthe
door windows
Rthe
hinged quarter windows
Rthe
tilt/sliding sunroof
G Warning!
When closing the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof, make sure there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as
follows:
button j to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button k. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there is
no danger of anyone being harmed by the
With SmartKey
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
the driver’s outside door handle.
X
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
driver’s outside door handle.
X
Press and hold button j on the
SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof are completely closed.
The vehicle locks.
X
Release button j on the SmartKey to
interrupt the closing procedure.
RRelease
Z
127
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
With KEYLESS-GO
Driving and parking
Starting the engine
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.
X Close all doors.
Safety notes
G Warning!
X
Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (Y page 87) until the
door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
are completely closed.
X
Release the lock button on the outside door
handle to interrupt the closing procedure.
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking
maneuvers the objects could get caught
between the pedals. You could then no
longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
to accidents and injury.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and
steering systems. In this case, it is
important to keep in mind that a
considerably higher degree of effort is
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Adapt your driving accordingly.
128
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible
death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while
driving, have the cause determined and
corrected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive only with at
least one window fully open at all times.
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
1 Button for selecting park position P
Á Park position
 Reverse gear
With SmartKey
X
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X
Gasoline engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 3 (Y page 95) and
release it.
The engine starts automatically.
X
Diesel engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 2 (Y page 95).
Preglow indicator lamp q in the
instrument cluster comes on.
X
As soon as preglow indicator lamp q
goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 3 and release it.
The engine starts automatically.
À Neutral position
¿ Drive position
i If the engine is at operating temperature,
For more information on how to operate the
gear selector lever, see “Automatic
transmission” (Y page 135).
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P
(Y page 137).
With KEYLESS-GO
they could otherwise accidentally start the
engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the starter
switch.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
preglow indicator lamp q may not stay
on and you can start the engine without
preglowing.
G Warning!
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle,
the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never
leave children unattended in the vehicle, as
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
Z
2 Canada only
129
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
X
Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button is inserted in the starter switch.
Starting difficulties
! Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.
i If you wish to start the engine with the
SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO
function, remove the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button from the starter switch and
proceed as described in “With
SmartKey” (Y page 129).
X
Depress the brake pedal during the starting
procedure.
X
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X
Gasoline engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once.
The engine starts automatically.
X
Diesel engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once.
The engine preglows and starts
automatically.
i If the engine is at operating temperature,
the time the engine needs to preglow is
reduced.
130
The engine does not start. You can hear
the starter.
There could be a malfunction in the engine
electronics or in the fuel supply system.
Carry out the following steps:
X
X
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The engine does not start. You cannot
hear the starter.
The battery may not be sufficiently charged.
X Get a jump start (Y page 410).
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting
procedure.
If the engine will not start despite a jump
start:
If you are starting the engine with KEYLESSGO: Close any doors that may be open to
allow for better detection of the SmartKey.
The starter has been exposed to excessive
temperatures.
X Let the starter cool for about two minutes.
or
X
Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
X
Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
signals from another source may be
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
X
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts:
Repeat the starting procedure.
X
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Driving off
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service life
of the engine. This is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! If you hear a warning signal and the
message Release Parking Brake
appears in the multifunction display when
driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
automatic transmission could be damaged.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be used.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
automatic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs in the doors move
down.
The automatic door lock feature can be
deactivated (Y page 163).
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved up or
down, but the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
Automatic transmission
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or
neutral position N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake
pedal.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the
X
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
If engaged, release the parking brake.
X
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission
shifts at a higher engine revolution. This
allows the catalytic converter (gasoline
engine) or the oxidation catalyst (diesel
engine) to reach its operating temperature
earlier.
131
Z
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
For more information on driving, see “Driving
instructions” (Y page 299).
For information on off-road driving, see “Offroad driving” (Y page 303).
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
RGasoline
engine: An ignition cable may
be damaged.
RThe
engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
RGasoline engine: Unburned gasoline may
have entered the catalytic converter and
damaged it.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
as possible.
X
Turn off the engine immediately.
X
Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant if
necessary (Y page 271).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
X
Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
X
Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
roadway.
X
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
X
Give very little gas.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
X
Have the problem checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The coolant temperature is above
248‡ (120†)
If no damage on major assemblies, fuel
system, and engine mount can be
determined:
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
the engine.
X
132
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Parking
G Warning!
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay
or leaves can come into contact with the
hot exhaust system, as these materials
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of serious personal
injury, or damage to the vehicle or the
vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle
movement, always do the following before
turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle:
RKeep
right foot on the brake pedal.
REngage
the parking brake.
RShift
the automatic transmission into
park position P.
RSlowly
release the brake pedal.
RWhen
parked on an incline, always turn
the front wheels towards the road curb.
RTurn
the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Turning off the engine
from the starter switch, or press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
G Warning!
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Parking brake
G Warning!
Engaging the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion can cause the rear
wheels to lock up. You could lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident. In
addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not
light up when the parking brake is engaged.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
X
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake
and/or shift the automatic transmission
out of park position P, either of which could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
X
Releasing: Pull on release handle 1.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the brake warning
lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada
only) in the instrument cluster goes out.
Engaging: Step firmly on parking brake
pedal 2.
When the engine is running, the brake
warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
comes on.
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
has come to a complete stop. With the
engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree
of effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
i If the engine cannot be turned off as
described, see “Emergency engine
shutdown” (Y page 417).
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X
Engage the parking brake.
i Always engage the parking brake in
addition to shifting the automatic
transmission into park position P.
When parked on an incline, also turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
i Observe instructions if you want the
automatic transmission to remain in
Z
133
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
neutral position N, see “Remaining in
neutral position N” (Y page 136).
With SmartKey
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey,
and remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch or open a front door, the automatic
transmission will shift into park position P
automatically.
G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine
alone only will shift the automatic
transmission into neutral position N
automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission
into park position P before turning off the
engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
134
With KEYLESS-GO
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With the driver’s door closed, the starter
switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s
door opened, the starter switch is set to
position 0, same as the SmartKey removed
from the starter switch (Y page 95).
If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESSGO start/stop button and open a front door,
the automatic transmission will shift into park
position P automatically.
G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine
alone only will shift the automatic
transmission into neutral position N
automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission
into park position P before turning off the
engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i In an emergency you can turn off the
engine while driving by pressing and
holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
for approximately 3 seconds.
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
turn it off as described above:
X
Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
The engine turns off. The starter switch is
in position 0 (Y page 95).
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and
parking” (Y page 128).
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking
maneuvers the objects could get caught
between the pedals. You could then no
longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
to accidents and injury.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up
more quickly to operating temperature.
Gear selector lever
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or
neutral position N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake
pedal.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
automatic transmission could be damaged.
! The vehicle must be stopped when you
shift the automatic transmission
! Allow engine to warm up under low load
use. Do not place full load on the engine
until the operating temperature has been
reached.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces.
This may cause serious damage to the
engine and the drivetrain which is not
G Warning!
between drive position D and
reverse gear R
Rdirectly
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
1 Button for selecting park position P
Rdirectly
Á Park position
 Reverse gear
Rdirectly
À Neutral position
¿ Drive position
Otherwise the automatic transmission
could be damaged.
between reverse gear R and
drive position D
into park position P
135
Z
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the
vehicle” (Y page 139).
open a front door, the automatic transmission
will shift into park position P automatically.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
Keep in mind that turning off the engine
alone only will shift the automatic
transmission into neutral position N
automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission
into park position P before turning off the
engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved up or
down, but the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
i The gear selector lever always returns to
its original position.
The current transmission position P, R, N,
or D appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 137).
G Warning!
i Moving the gear selector lever up or down
shifts the automatic transmission out of
park position P.
Shifting into park position P
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, press button
1 on the gear selector lever to select park
position P.
SmartKey: When you turn off the engine using
the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch or open a front door,
the automatic transmission will shift into park
position P automatically.
KEYLESS-GO: When you turn off the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
136
Shifting into neutral position N
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and move the gear selector
lever up or down to the resistance point to
select neutral position N.
When you turn off the engine, the automatic
transmission will shift into neutral position
N automatically.
SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the
starter switch or opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic
transmission into park position P
automatically.
KEYLESS-GO: Opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic
transmission into park position P
automatically.
Remaining in neutral position N
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking
the vehicle through an automatic conveyortype car wash, observe the following
instructions:
G Warning!
When leaving the SmartKey in the starter
switch, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle. It is possible for children to
switch on the ignition which could result in
unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
With SmartKey:
X
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
If engaged, release the parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
If engaged, release the parking brake.
Shifting into reverse gear R
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
X
With KEYLESS-GO:
X
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
pressed.
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and move the gear selector
lever up past the resistance point to select
reverse gear R.
Shifting into drive position D
X
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual
gears automatically, depending on:
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 139)
Rthe
position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe
vehicle speed
With drive position D selected, you can
influence transmission shifting by limiting or
extending the gear range.
Transmission positions
The current transmission position appears in
the multifunction display.
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and move the gear selector
lever down past the resistance point to
select drive position D.
1 Transmission position indicator
Z
137
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
If the current transmission position does not
appear in the multifunction display due to a
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
automatic transmission is in the desired
position:
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D.
X
Do not limit the gear range.
X
Drive off carefully.
ì
í
138
Effect
Effect
Park position
Shift the automatic transmission
into park position P only when the
vehicle is stopped. The park
position is not intended to serve
as a brake when the vehicle is
parked. Rather, the driver should
always engage the parking brake
in addition to shifting the
automatic transmission into park
position P to secure the vehicle.
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
malfunctioning, the automatic
transmission could remain locked
in park position P.
X Have the vehicle’s electrical
system checked as soon as
possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Reverse gear
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped.
ë
Neutral position
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle
can be moved freely (pushed or
towed).
To avoid damage to the
transmission, never shift the
automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving.
Exception: If the ESP® is
deactivated or malfunctioning,
shift the automatic transmission
into neutral position N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding.
! Coasting the vehicle, or
driving for any other reason with
the automatic transmission in
neutral position N can result in
transmission damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
ê
Drive position
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Effect
The automatic transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
Driving tips
Kickdown
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Canada vehicles only:
X
Depress the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance to use the kickdown.
Rocking the vehicle
Rocking the vehicle by shifting the automatic
transmission directly between drive position
D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle
stuck in mud or snow. The engine control
system of this vehicle electronically limits
directly shifting the automatic transmission
between drive position D and reverse gear R
to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph
(9 km/h). To shift the automatic transmission
directly between drive position D and reverse
gear R, move the gear selector lever past the
resistance point up or down.
Gear ranges
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range, see “One-touch
gearshifting” (Y page 140).
The current gear range appears in the
multifunction display.
Working on the vehicle
G Warning!
When working on the vehicle, engage the
parking brake and shift the automatic
transmission into park position P.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
1 Gear range indicator
Towing a trailer
X
When you tow a trailer, shift into a lower
gear range manually if the automatic
transmission hunts between gears on
inclines.
A lower gear range and reduction of speed
reduces the potential to overload or to
overheat the engine.
For more information on trailer towing, see
the “Operation” section (Y page 310).
Z
139
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Effect
è With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine.
ç Allows the use of engine’s braking
power when driving
Ron steep downgrades
Rin
One-touch gearshifting
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range using the steering wheel gearshift
contol.
mountainous regions
Limiting gear range
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
X
Runder
extreme operating
conditions
æ For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
Steering wheel gearshift control
1 Limiting gear range
Briefly pull left gearshift control 1.
The automatic transmission will shift into
the next lower gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
i To avoid overrevving the engine when
downshifting, the automatic transmission
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
maximum speed would be exceeded.
Downshift (in manual program mode M)
2 Extending gear range
Upshift (in manual program mode M)
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift control when the automatic
transmission is in park position P, neutral
position N, or reverse gear R.
140
Extending gear range
X
Briefly pull right gearshift control 2.
The automatic transmission will shift into
the next higher gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
Controls in detail
Transfer case
i If you press on the accelerator pedal
when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit
X
Pull and hold right gearshift control 2 until
the gear range indicator disappears from
the multifunction display.
The automatic transmission will shift from
the current gear range directly into gear
range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
X
Pull and hold left gearshift control 1.
The automatic transmission will select the
gear range suited for optimal acceleration
and deceleration automatically. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less
responsive or sluggish or the automatic
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
transmission is most likely operating in limphome (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
X
Restart the engine.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
R.
X
Have the automatic transmission checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Transfer case
The vehicle is equipped with all-wheel drive
(4MATIC). Both the front and rear axles are
powered at all times when the vehicle is being
operated.
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
! Because the ESP® operates
automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
longer than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
141
Controls in detail
Transfer case
LOW RANGE mode (Canada only)
The LOW RANGE mode is available on
vehicles with enhanced off-road package.
In the following situations you should switch
to the LOW RANGE mode:
Rduring
off-road driving
Rbefore
driving through water
Gear ranges
There are two possible settings.
HIGH
RANGE
Road position for all normal
driving situations.
(LOW RANGE mode off)
LOW
RANGE
Off-road position for
traveling on rough terrain.
(LOW RANGE mode on)
Also use the off-road
position when driving onroad on steep gradients,
especially when towing a
trailer.
LOW RANGE acts by raising
the engine’s gear ratio. The
vehicle travels at roughly
third the speed compared to
when in HIGH RANGE
position, leading to an
increase in the engine’s
drive power.
Rwhen towing up or down on steep gradients
With LOW RANGE selected, the engine’s
power delivery and the shifting behavior of
the automatic transmission are adjusted.
Furthermore, the ABS, the ESP®, and the
4-ETS functions especially adapted to offroad travel are activated.
For more information on off-road driving, see
“Off-road driving” (Y page 303).
For information on driving safety systems
during LOW RANGE mode, see “Driving safety
systems” (Y page 75).
G Warning!
Always wait until the procedure of shifting
from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE – and
from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE – has
142
been entirely completed. During this
procedure do not turn off the engine or shift
the automatic transmission into another
gear.
If you do not wait until the shifting
procedure has been entirely completed
then it might not be correctly performed.
The transfer case might be in neutral, thus
interrupting the transfer of power between
the engine and the drive axle.
The vehicle is then freely movable, even if
a gear has been selected, and could
unintentionally be set into motion –
particularly on up – or downhill grades. This
could lead to an accident and cause injury
to yourself and others.
Please observe related messages
appearing in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Transfer case
Switching LOW RANGE mode
Switching LOW RANGE mode on
(switching from HIGH RANGE to LOW
RANGE)
! The shifting procedure can only be
performed when the following conditions
are met:
RThe
engine is running.
RThe
automatic transmission is in neutral
position N.
i You can cancel the procedure by pressing
the LOW RANGE switch again while the
indicator lamp is flashing.
Switching LOW RANGE mode off
(switching from LOW RANGE to HIGH
RANGE)
! The shifting procedure can only be
performed when the following conditions
are met:
RThe
1 LOW RANGE switch
2 Indicator lamp
vehicle speed does not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
RThe
RThe
automatic transmission is in neutral
position N.
i There is no reset to HIGH after the ignition
RThe
vehicle speed does not exceed
43 mph (70 km/h).
has been switched off.
X
3 LOW RANGE indicator
Press LOW RANGE switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes.
If the system senses that all conditions are
met, it will switch from HIGH RANGE to
LOW RANGE. A chime sounds and LOW
RANGE indicator 3 appears in the
multifunction display.
Indicator lamp 2 on LOW RANGE switch
1 comes on continuously, indicating that
the LOW RANGE mode has been activated.
engine is running.
i There is no reset to LOW after the ignition
has been switched off.
X
Press LOW RANGE switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes.
If the system senses that all conditions are
met, it will switch from LOW RANGE to
HIGH RANGE. A chime sounds and LOW
RANGE indicator 3 disappears from the
multifunction display.
Z
143
Controls in detail
Differential locks (Canada only)
Indicator lamp 2 on LOW RANGE switch
1 goes out, indicating that the LOW
RANGE mode has been deactivated.
i You can cancel the procedure by pressing
the LOW RANGE switch again while the
indicator lamp is flashing.
For messages in the multifunction display,
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 352).
Differential locks (Canada only)
Vehicles with enhanced off-road package are
equipped with automatic locks for the center
and rear axle differential to improve vehicle
traction.
The center differential compensates for
differences in wheel rotation between the
front and rear axle.
The rear axle differential compensates
differences between the rear wheels.
i At the front axles, the 4-ETS system
compensates for any traction problems.
For more information on off-road driving, see
“Off-road driving” (Y page 303).
A few words about differentials and
differential locks
When a vehicle negotiates a turn, wheels on
the outside of the curve must travel farther
and rotate faster than the inside wheels. The
differential, the operation of a set of gears
that allows the powered wheels in a vehicle
to turn at different speeds, makes this
essential function possible.
The drawback is that the differential also
sends most of the engine’s power to the
144
wheel with the least load or strain on it. For
example, if one of a vehicle’s powered wheels
sits on a patch of snow and spins because
there is no traction, all of the engine’s power
will go to that wheel because the power will
take the path of least resistance. Meanwhile,
the opposite wheel, sitting on dry pavement
where it could get enough grip to start the
vehicle moving, sits idle because it receives
no power.
The 4-ETS addresses this problem and
provides for good control and steering ability
by automatically slowing the slipping wheel
and thus increasing the power to the other
non-slipping drive wheels to get the vehicle
moving. The ESP® and the 4-ETS in this
vehicle feature such intelligent limited-slip
differential technology, ideally suited for onroad and light off-road driving. Transfer case
position LOW (Y page 142) also enhances offroad driving capabilities.
More extreme off-road conditions may call for
another solution, engaging a differential lock
or preventing the differential from operating
altogether. This vehicle comes with two
differential locks: transfer case (center) and
rear. Each can be engaged simply by
operating the rotary switch located on the
center console (Y page 145). When the
transfer case (center) differential is locked,
Controls in detail
Differential locks (Canada only)
the combined (or average) speed of the front
wheels is identical to the combined rear
wheel speed. When the rear differential is
locked, both rear wheels turn at the same
speed, independent of the individual torque.
Please be aware that engaging the differential
locks will significantly reduce the steering
ability of the vehicle.
For your safety and the safety of others and
to prevent damage to the vehicle, the
differential locks must not be engaged when
driving on paved roads. It is important to
understand that during on-road/paved
driving, differentials are absolutely necessary
for providing the essential control and
steering ability of the vehicle. The differential
locks, therefore, must not be engaged when
driving on paved roads and should only be
used to the extent necessary to negotiate offroad conditions which cannot be handled by
the systems (the 4-ETS, the ESP®, and the
transfer case in LOW RANGE mode) this
vehicle comes equipped with.
Switching differential locks
( Center and rear axle differential are
completely locked
! If the differential locks are engaged,
accelerate gently when setting the vehicle
in motion.
Only operate the vehicle on a single axle
dynamometer if the axle not being driven is
jacked up or the associated propeller shaft
is disconnected.
Otherwise the transmission could be
damaged.
AUTO mode
The AUTO mode is adequate for most driving
situations since the center differential is
locked and released as required.
i At speeds up to 19 mph (30 km/h), it is
possible to manually lock the differential
locks for driving on rough terrain.
You can select between three locking modes.
X
Start the engine.
The center differential lock is in AUTO
mode. The indicator lamp on adjustment
ring 1 above symbol U is on.
Rotary switch for differential locks
1 Rotatable outer adjustment ring with
indicator lamp
% AUTO mode: center differential is
automatically locked
Z
& Center differential is completely locked
145
Controls in detail
Differential locks (Canada only)
Center and rear axle differential locks
Engage differential locks:
G Warning!
Rfor
off-road driving
Rfor
driving through water
Never drive on a paved surface with the
center and rear axle differential locks
manually engaged. Ability to steer the
vehicle is greatly reduced when the
differential locks are manually engaged,
increasing the risk of an accident.
For safety reasons, the locks are
automatically released at a vehicle speed
above 31 mph (50 km/h). Nevertheless,
you should only manually lock the
differential if absolutely necessary because
engaged locks will restrict the vehicle
drivetrain while cornering and cause the
vehicle to chatter. This could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle and cause an
accident.
Rwhen
driving on deep snow and icy or
fouled surfaces
X
Start the engine.
X
To select the desired locking mode, rotate
adjustment ring 1 to position & or
( (Y page 145).
The indicator lamp on adjustment ring 1
at the respective symbol comes on.
A message indicating that the respective
differential is completely locked appears in
the multifunction display.
! The differential locks must not be
engaged manually when towing the vehicle
or spinning the wheels.
The differential locks should only be engaged
manually if traction is insufficient in AUTO
mode.
The differential locks can be engaged in the
sequence &, ( (Y page 145) up to a speed
of 19 mph (30 km/h).
146
Example illustration
5 Center differential completely locked
! If the differential locks have been
manually engaged, the tires will scuff on the
road surface when cornering because the
differences between the individual wheel
rotation speeds will not be compensated
for.
i The differential locks are reset to AUTO
mode after the ignition has been switched
off for longer than 10 seconds.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For information on changing the instrument
cluster settings, e.g. the language, see
(Y page 158).
Instrument cluster
Introduction
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument
cluster” (Y page 32).
Adjusting the instrument cluster
illumination
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/
warning messages or the failure of any
systems. Driving characteristics may be
impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
i The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also
be adjusted automatically when you switch
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
1 To dim instrument cluster illumination
2 Reset button
3 To brighten instrument cluster
illumination
i With the exterior lighting switched on, the
brightness of the switches in the center
console will also be adjusted when using
button 1 or 3.
Activating the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster is activated when you
Ropen
a front door
Rswitch
Rpress
To brighten illumination: Press and hold
button 3 until the desired level of
illumination is reached.
X
To dim illumination: Press and hold
button 1 until the desired level of
illumination is reached.
on the ignition
reset button 2
Rswitch
X
on the exterior lamps
i Opening a front door or pressing the reset
button without switching on the ignition or
the exterior lamps activates the instrument
cluster illumination only for 30 seconds.
Z
147
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting trip odometer
X
X
Make sure you are viewing the standard
display (Y page 152) in the multifunction
display.
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (Y page 147) until the
trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer
(Y page 35) denotes excessive engine speed.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
as it may result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
interrupted if the engine is operated within
the red marking.
Control system
Introduction
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 95).
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display,
and much more.
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the
multifunction steering wheel should only be
done by the driver when traffic and road
conditions permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to the
multifunction display.
148
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display and
the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel.
Controls in detail
Control system
1 Multifunction display
2 Press button
s to take a call
to dial6
to redial6
t to end a call
to reject an incoming call
Press button
æ to select submenus in the
ç Settings menu
to set values
to set the volume
Press button
! to turn Voice Control System
on7, see separate operating
instructions
3 Press button
è to select next or previous menu
ÿ
6
7
j Within Audio/DVD menu to
k select previous or next track
with quick search or to select
previous or next station in
station list or wave band.
Within Telephone menu to
start the quick search in the
phone book.
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel will alter what appears in the
multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction
display is arranged in menus and
accompanying functions and submenus.
The individual functions are then found within
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
These functions serve to call up relevant
information or to customize the settings for
your vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly to
pass through each menu one after the
other.
Press button
X
Press button briefly
j to move within a menu
k Within Audio/DVD menu to
select previous or next track,
scene or stored station.
Within Telephone menu to
switch to the phone book and
select a name or number.
Press and hold button
0 to turn Voice Control System
off7, see separate operating
instructions
Press button k or j repeatedly to
pass through each function display, one
after the other, in the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
you will find a number of submenus for calling
up and changing settings. For instructions on
Z
Function only available in telephone menu.
Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
using these submenus, see “Settings
menu” (Y page 157).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.
Multifunction display
1 Trip odometer
150
2 Main odometer
3 Transmission position/gear range
indicator
4 Outside temperature or digital
speedometer
For more information on menus displayed in
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
submenus” (Y page 151).
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus and submenus
Z
151
Controls in detail
Control system
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to
those shown in the multifunction display.
The first function displayed in each menu
will automatically show you which part of
the system you are in.
Function
1
8
Standard display menu
(Y page 152)
2
Audio/DVD menu (Y page 153)
3
Navigation menu (Y page 155)
4
Off-road menu (Y page 155)
5
Distronic menu (Y page 156)
6
Vehicle status message memory8
menu (Y page 156)
7
Settings menu (Y page 157)
8
Vehicle configuration menu
(Y page 164)
Function
Press button j or k to select the
functions in the Standard display menu.
9
Trip computer menu (Y page 165)
The following functions are available:
a
Telephone menu (Y page 167)
RChecking
tire inflation pressure
(Y page 281)
RChecking
Standard display menu
In the standard display, the main odometer
and the trip odometer appear in the
multifunction display.
coolant temperature
(Y page 152)
RCalling
up digital speedometer or outside
temperature (Y page 153)
RCalling
up maintenance service indicator
display (Y page 317)
Checking coolant temperature
G Warning!
Standard display
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
X
If you see another display, press button
è or ÿ repeatedly until the standard
display appears.
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
152
X
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get
Controls in detail
Control system
out of the vehicle and do not stand near the
vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the coolant temperature appears in the
multifunction display.
Calling up digital speedometer or
outside temperature
You can select whether the digital
speedometer or the outside temperature
appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 159).
G Warning!
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stopand-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
The engine should not be operated with a
coolant temperature above 248‡
(120†). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that
purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may still
be icy, especially in wooded areas or on
bridges.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the digital speedometer or the outside
temperature appears in the multifunction
display.
Digital speedometer
Outside temperature
Audio/DVD menu
The functions in the Audio/DVD menu
operate the audio or video equipment which
you have currently turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned on,
the message AUDIO Off appears in the
multifunction display.
Z
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Operating audio devices/audio media
The following functions are available:
RSelecting
radio station (Y page 154)
X
Turn on the COMAND system and select
the audio device or audio media. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
multifunction display.
ROperating
audio devices/audio media
(Y page 154)
ROperating
video DVD (Y page 155)
Selecting radio station
The HD-radio with SIRIUS satellite radio is
treated as a radio application.
For more information on HD-radio with
SIRIUS satellite radio, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
Additional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to satellite radio service
provider are required for satellite radio
operation. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for details and availability for
your vehicle.
X Turn on the COMAND system and select
radio. Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the currently tuned station appears in the
multifunction display.
154
Example illustration
1 Wave band setting and stored memory
position
2 Station frequency
X
Select next or previous stored station:
Press k or j briefly to select a
stored station.
X
Select next or previous station in the
station list: Press and hold k or j
to select a station.
X
Select next or previous station in wave
band (Only if no station list is available):
Press and hold k or j to select a
station.
You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
Example illustration
1 Disc number
2 Current track
X
Selecting previous or next track: Press
button k or j briefly.
X
Selecting a track from the track list
(quick search): Press and hold button
k or j.
The current track does not appear during
Audio AUX mode operation.
Controls in detail
Control system
Operating video DVD
X
Turn on the COMAND system and select
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
system operating instructions.
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
multifunction display.
Navigation menu
The Navigation menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Navigation menu appears in the
multifunction display.
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the
navigation system:
RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message NAV off appears in the
multifunction display.
The Off-road menu displays the messages for
air suspension, differential locks and the
direction into which you are currently driving.
X Press button è or · repeatedly until
one of the following messages appears in
the multifunction display.
Vehicles with air suspension:
RWith
1 Disc number
2 Current scene
X
Press button k or j to select a
scene.
the COMAND system switched on
but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the
name of the street currently traveled on
appear in the multifunction display.
Off-road menu
Vehicles with air suspension and differential
locks:
RWith
the COMAND system switched on
and route guidance activated, the
direction of travel and maneuver
instructions appear in the multifunction
display.
Please refer to the COMAND system
operating instructions for instructions on how
to activate the route guidance system.
For information on air suspension, see “Air
suspension program” (Y page 185).
For information on differential locks, see
“Differential locks” (Y page 144).
155
Z
Controls in detail
Control system
For information on the compass, see “Vehicle
submenu” (Y page 163) and
“Compass” (Y page 260).
Distronic menu
Use the Distronic menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system is activated or deactivated.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section
of this manual (Y page 172) for instructions
on how to activate Distronic.
Vehicle status message memory
menu
Use the Vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the memory.
Such messages appear in the multifunction
display and are based on conditions or
system status the vehicle’s system has
recorded.
The Vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if messages have been stored.
156
G Warning!
Malfunction and warning messages are
only indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
malfunction and warning messages are
simply a reminder with respect to the
operation of certain systems. They do not
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed
on the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
address the malfunction and warning
messages.
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Vehicle status message memory
menu appears in the multifunction display.
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction
display:
X
Press button j or k.
The stored messages will now be displayed
in the order in which they have occurred.
For malfunction and warning messages,
see “Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display” (Y page 330).
i After you have scrolled through all
recorded status messages, the first
recorded message appears again.
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction
display when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is turned to position 0 or removed
from the starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO,
the number of messages will reappear when
you turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the
driver’s door.
Controls in detail
Control system
Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
status message memory will be cleared when
you switch off the ignition.
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu there are two
functions: The function To reset, press
reset button for 3 seconds, with which
you can reset all the settings to the original
factory settings and a collection of submenus
with which you can make individual settings
for your vehicle.
The following settings and submenus are
available in the Settings menu:
RResetting to factory settings (Y page 157)
RSubmenus
in the Settings menu
(Y page 158)
RInstrument
cluster submenu (Y page 158)
RTime/Date
submenu (Y page 160)
RLighting
RVehicle
Resetting to factory settings
You can reset the functions of all submenus
to the factory settings.
For safety reasons, the function Lamp
Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting
submenu cannot be reset while driving.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Settings
Cannot be
completely reset
to factory settings
while driving.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press the reset button in the instrument
cluster for approximately 3 seconds.
The request to press the reset button once
more to confirm appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press the reset button once more.
The functions of all the submenus will be
reset to factory settings.
The settings you have changed will not be
reset unless you confirm the action by
pressing the reset button a second time. After
approximately 5 seconds, the Settings
menu reappears in the multifunction display.
submenu (Y page 160)
submenu (Y page 163)
RComfort
submenu (Y page 163)
Z
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu
X
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
Press button j.
The collection of the submenus appears in
the multifunction display. There are more
submenus than can be simultaneously
displayed.
k to move to the previous function
within that submenu.
X
Use button æ or ç to change the
settings of the respective function.
The following lists show what settings can be
changed within the various menus. Detailed
instructions on making individual settings can
be found on the following pages.
Instrument cluster submenu
RSelecting speedometer display mode
(Y page 159)
RSelecting
language (Y page 159)
RSelecting
display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 159)
X
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
X
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
with button æ.
X
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button j to access the
individual functions within that submenu.
X
Once within the submenu, use button
j to move to the next function or button
158
Time/Date submenu
RSetting the time (Y page 160)
RSetting
the date (Y page 160)
Lighting submenu
RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA
only) (Y page 161)
RSetting
locator lighting (Y page 161)
RSetting
night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)
(Y page 162)
RSetting
interior lighting delayed shut-off
(Y page 162)
Vehicle submenu
RSetting automatic cental locking
(Y page 163)
Comfort submenu
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 163)
RSetting
fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors (Y page 164)
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the Instrument Cluster submenu
via the Settings menu. Use the Instrument
Cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings.
Controls in detail
Control system
The following functions are available:
speedometer display mode
(Y page 159)
X
RSelecting
RSelecting
language (Y page 159)
RSelecting
display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 159)
Selecting language
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
X
Selecting speedometer display mode
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
X
Press button æ or ç to set
speedometer unit to Km or Miles.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Status Line Display
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Press button æ or ç to select the
desired setting.
The selected display is then shown
continuously in the status indicator (lower
display).
The other display now appears in the
Standard display menu (Y page 152).
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Language appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Display Unit Digital
Speedometer appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
Selecting display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Instrument
Cluster submenu.
Press button æ or ç to select the
language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Z
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
submenu to change the time and date display
settings.
The following functions are available:
RSetting
the time (Y page 160)
Example illustration for setting the hour
Example illustration for setting the month
RSetting
the date (Y page 160)
X
X
If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND
system and navigation module, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions for
information on how to set the time and date.
Setting the time
This function is not available if your vehicle is
equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Clock Set Hour or Clock
Set Minute(s) appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
160
Press button æ or ç to set the hours
or minute(s).
Setting the date
This function is not available if your vehicle is
equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Date Set Month, Date Set
Day, or Date Set Year appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button æ or ç to set the
month, day, or year.
Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle.
The following functions are available:
RSetting
daytime running lamp mode (USA
only) (Y page 161)
RSetting
locator lighting (Y page 161)
RSetting
night security illumination
(Y page 162)
RSetting
interior lighting delayed shut-off
(Y page 162)
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA
only)
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Lamp Circuit Headlamp
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (Manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (Constant).
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in position
M or U, the low-beam headlamps are
switched on when the engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the following
lamps will come on additionally:
RParking
RTail
lamps
lamps
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
For more information on the daytime running
lamp mode, see “Lighting” (Y page 116).
For safety reasons, changing the setting for
the daytime running lamp mode is not
possible while the vehicle is in motion.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Settings can only be made at a
standstill.
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
of all submenus to the factory settings while
driving (Y page 157) will not deactivate the
daytime running lamp mode.
Setting locator lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated, the
exterior lamp switch in position U and the
interior lighting in automatic mode
(Y page 120), the following lamps will come
on during darkness when the vehicle is
unlocked using button k on the
SmartKey:
RParking lamps
RTail
lamps
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
RFront
fog lamps
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
door is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
lamps will go out automatically after
approximately 40 seconds.
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Surround Lighting
Function appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Z
161
Controls in detail
Control system
RSide
marker lamps
RFront
X
Press button æ or ç to switch the
locator lighting function On or Off.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
U when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activated.
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the
vehicle and closing all doors.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned off,
the following lamps will come on when the
engine is turned off:
RParking
RTail
RLicense
162
lamps
lamps
plate lamps
Press button æ or ç to switch the
headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
Off.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
U before turning off the engine.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
activated.
fog lamps
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
open a door or do not close an opened door,
the lamps will automatically go out after
60 seconds.
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Headlamp Delayed Shutoff appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
You can temporarily deactivate the
headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
X
Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to position
0.
X
Then turn it to position 2 and back to
position 0.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
you start the engine.
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Controls in detail
Control system
X
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Interior Lighting
Delayed Shut-off appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Setting automatic central locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate the
automatic central locking. With the automatic
central locking system activated, the vehicle
is centrally locked at a vehicle speed of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Automatic Door Locking
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
(Y page 163) or to set the fold-in function for
exterior rear view mirrors (Y page 164).
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 109).
G Warning!
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement do one
of the following:
RMove
steering wheel adjustment stalk.
RPress
X
one of the memory position
buttons.
Press button æ or ç to switch the
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
On or Off.
Vehicle submenu
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
to set the automatic locking.
RPress
X
Press button æ or ç to switch the
automatic central locking On or Off.
memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could open the driver’s
door and unintentionally activate the easyentry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Comfort submenu
Access the Comfort submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Comfort submenu
to activate the easy-entry/exit feature
Z
163
Controls in detail
Control system
X
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Comfort submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Easy-entry Function
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
X
using the button on the door control panel
(Y page 112).
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
folded out completely before driving off.
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Comfort submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Fold In Mirrors When
Locking appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button æ or ç to switch the
easy-entry feature On or Off.
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors
Use this function to set the exterior rear view
mirrors to be automatically folded in when
you lock your vehicle.
With this function set to On and the exterior
rear view mirrors folded in using the button
on the door control panel (Y page 112), the
exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out
when you switch on the ignition. You will then
have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors
164
Vehicle configuration menu
Use the Vehicle configuration menu to
activate/deactivate the Distance warning
function (Y page 164) or to set the DSR
speed (Y page 165).
Distance warning function
In vehicles equipped with Distronic, you can
determine whether the distance warning
function is to be enabled or disabled. With this
function set to On, the system will alert you
when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a
slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path
and the danger of a collision exists, even
when the Distronic is switched off.
X Press button è or · repeatedly until
the vehicle configuration menu appears
in the multifunction display.
X
X
Press button æ or ç to switch
function On or Off.
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Distance Warning appears
in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Controls in detail
Control system
X
X
X
Press button æ or ç to switch the
distance warning function On or Off.
Press button è or · repeatedly until
the Vehicle configuration menu appears
in the multifunction display.
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message DSR Speed appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Trip computer menu
Use the Trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle.
The following information is available:
RFuel
consumption statistics since start
(Y page 165)
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 166)
RResetting
fuel consumption statistics
(Y page 166)
RDistance
1 Symbol for activated distance warning
When you enter the Trip computer menu,
you will always see the fuel consumption
statistics since start first.
function
If the distance warning function is activated
you will see the symbol : in the Standard
display. When the distance warning function
is deactivated the symbol : will not
appear.
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
programmed default speed
Use this function to program the default
speed the DSR is set to when it is activated.
You can program the default speed between
4 - 10 mph (Canada: 6 - 18 km/h). The set
value is increased in 1 mph (Canada:
2 km/h) increments.
to empty (Y page 166)
X
Press button æ or ç repeatedly until
the desired speed is shown in the
multifunction display.
When DSR is switched on, DSR will use the
programmed default speed to regulate the
vehicle’s speed.
Fuel consumption statistics since start
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the
set speed using the cruise control lever
(Y page 183).
Z
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Distance to empty
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last reset
All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
X
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message From Reset appears in the
multifunction display.
166
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the reading that you want to reset appears
in the multifunction display.
X
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster until the respective
values are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Range: appears in the
multifunction display.
The calculated remaining driving range
based on the current fuel tank level
appears in the multifunction display.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
vehicle at the fuel pump ¿ appears
instead of the remaining driving range.
Controls in detail
Control system
Telephone menu
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking
a telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the
telephone when weather, road and traffic
conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
without being connected to an external
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident
and/or personal injury.
You can connect your telephone to the
COMAND system via Bluetooth®, see
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
X Switch on the COMAND system.
Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display.
One of the following messages will appear
in the multifunction display:
RNo Service: No network is available.
RBluetooth
Ready: The telephone has
not been connected to the COMAND
system via Bluetooth® yet.
X Connect the telephone to the
COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
RReady
or name of the network provider
(if available): The telephone has found a
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.
multifunction display you will then see the
following message, or if available, the caller
ID (number or name):
X
Press button s.
You have answered the call.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
call
X
Press button t.
Dialing a number from the phone book
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you can answer a call at any time. In the
Z
167
Controls in detail
Control system
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
If you press and hold button j or
k for longer than 1 second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
The stored names are displayed in
ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
your phone book) you are calling will
appear in the multifunction display.
The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
or
X
Press button t if you do not want to
make the call.
Redialing
1 Selected name from the phone book
X
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
168
The control system stores the most recently
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
need to search through your entire phone
book.
X Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press button s.
The first number in the redial memory
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the desired number or name appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
Introduction
This section describes the following driving
systems of your vehicle:
RCruise
control and Distronic
RDistance
warning function is only available
with Distronic
RHill
start assist system
RDownhill
Speed Regulation (DSR)
ROff-road
driving program (vehicles without
enhanced off-road package)
RAir
suspension program (Adaptive
Damping System (ADS) and vehicle level
control)
RParktronic
RRear
system
view camera
Vehicles with enhanced off-road package:
For information on LOW RANGE mode, see
“LOW RANGE mode” (Y page 142) and for
information on differential locks, see
“Differential locks” (Y page 144).
The ABS, BAS, EBP, ESP® and 4-ETS driving
safety systems are described in the “Safety
and security” section (Y page 75).
Cruise control
The cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
The use of the cruise control is recommended
for driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time.
The currently set speed or last set speed
(“Resume” function) appears in the status
indicator of the multifunction display:
RUSA
only: e.g. Cruise 55 Miles
RCanada
only: e.g. Ñ 90 Km/h
i The cruise control should not be activated
during off-road driving.
G Warning!
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road,
traffic, and weather conditions make it
advisable to travel at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow
safe driving at a constant speed.
RThe
use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
changes in tire traction can result in
wheel spin and loss of control.
RDeactivate
the cruise control when
driving in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
G Warning!
The cruise control brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded. The
brake pedal depresses automatically when
the cruise control engages the brakes.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear at all times,
including the area under the brake pedal.
Objects stored in this area may impair
pedal movement which could interfere with
the braking ability of the cruise control
system.
Do not place your foot under the brake
pedal – your foot could become caught.
Z
169
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
position N
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
due to a malfunction
The vehicle speed displayed in the
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
setting for the cruise control system.
1 Setting current or higher speed
2 Setting current or lower speed
3 Canceling the cruise control
4 Activating the cruise control or resuming
Setting current speed
X
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or press in direction
of arrow 2.
to last set speed
Activating cruise control
X
You can activate the cruise control at a
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
You cannot activate the cruise control:
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
Rwhen
you brake
Rwhen
you have engaged the parking brake
170
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on
longer downhill grades the automatic
transmission will downshift automatically.
Canceling cruise control
X
Depress the brake pedal.
or
X
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3.
The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
when the engine is turned off.
The cruise control switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake.
The cruise control switches off automatically
and an acoustic warning will sound when
Rthe
vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
Rthe
ESP® is in operation
ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch
Rthe
ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Rthe
Ryou
shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving
Observe additional messages in the
multifunction display that may appear.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last set speed.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is increased or
Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has made the
necessary adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed
to a value that the prevailing road
conditions and legal speed limits permit.
Otherwise, sudden and unexpected
acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious
injury to you and others.
You can increase or decrease the set speed
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will brake the
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
X
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down to the
resistance point.
Changing the set speed
G Warning!
lever down past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2 to decrease.
X
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the
resistance point in direction of arrow 1 to
increase or press the cruise control lever
down to the resistance point in direction of
arrow 2 to decrease.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate.
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
Resume last stored speed
G Warning!
The set speed stored in memory should
only be set again if prevailing road
conditions and legal speed limits permit.
Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to the
preset speed could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
X
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down past the
resistance point.
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4.
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored.
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past
the resistance point in direction of arrow
1 to increase or press the cruise control
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
when the engine is turned off.
i The set speed value is increased or
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the set speed.
171
Z
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic
Safety notes
When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise
control increases the driving convenience
afforded by the cruise control while traveling
on expressways and other major roadways.
RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a
slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your
vehicle speed will be reduced so that you
follow that vehicle at your preset following
distance.
RIf
there is no vehicle directly ahead of you,
the Distronic will function in the same way
as standard cruise control (Y page 169).
G Warning!
The Distronic is a convenience system. Its
speed adjustment reduction capability is
intended to make cruise control more
effective and usable when traffic speeds
vary. It is not however, intended to, nor
does it, replace the need for extreme care.
The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure a
safe stopping distance, always remains
with the driver.
172
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the Distronic. This could
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
G Warning!
The Distronic adaptive cruise control is not
a substitute for active driving involvement.
It does not react to pedestrians or on
stationary objects, nor does it recognize or
predict the lane curvature or the movement
of preceding vehicles.
The Distronic can only apply 20% of the
maximum braking power of the vehicle.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
conditions. Additionally, the driver must
provide the steering, braking and other
driving inputs necessary to remain in
control of the vehicle.
High-frequency sources such as toll
stations, speed measuring systems etc.
can cause the Distronic system to
malfunction.
G Warning!
The Distronic requires familiarity with its
operational characteristics. We strongly
recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
G Warning!
The Distronic cannot take road and traffic
conditions into account. Only use the
Distronic if the road, weather and traffic
conditions make it advisable to travel at a
constant speed.
G Warning!
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire
traction can result in wheel spin and loss of
control.
The Distronic does not function in adverse
sight and distance conditions. Do not use
the Distronic during conditions of fog,
heavy rain, snow or sleet.
G Warning!
The Distronic cannot take weather
conditions into account. Switch off the
Distronic or do not switch it on if:
Rroads
are slippery or covered with snow
or ice. The wheels could lose traction
Controls in detail
Driving systems
while braking or accelerating, and the
vehicle could skid.
Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty
or visibility is diminished due to snow,
rain or fog, for example. The distance
control system functionality could be
impaired.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while the Distronic is
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be
able to recognize dangerous situations until
it is too late. This could cause an accident
in which you and/or others could be
injured.
G Warning!
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
G Warning!
Close attention to road and traffic
conditions is imperative at all times,
regardless of whether or not the Distronic
is activated.
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Distronic will not react to stationary
objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled
vehicle). The Distronic will also not respond
to oncoming vehicles.
Switch off the Distronic:
Rwhen
changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
Rwhen
altering of the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
entering a turn lane or highway off
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
ramp
Rin
In these situations, the Distronic will
continue to maintain the set speed unless
deactivated.
The Distronic is designed and intended only
to maintain a set speed and keep a set
distance from moving objects in front of it.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Z
173
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer
The intermittent warning sound ceases and
the distance warning lamp l goes out
when the necessary distance to the vehicle
ahead is established again.
G Warning!
1 Set speed
If the Distronic is activated, one or two cruise
control speed segments come on around the
set speed.
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
setting on the Distronic system.
174
1 Set speed
2 Cruise control speed segments
3 Speed of the vehicle ahead
If the Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the cruise control speed segments
2 appear in the speedometer. These
segments represent the difference between
the set speed of your vehicle 1 and the
speed of the preceding vehicle 3.
If the Distronic calculates that there is a
danger of collision, the distance warning lamp
l in the instrument cluster comes on and
an intermittent warning sounds.
X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a
collision.
Under no circumstances should the driver
await the intermittent warning sound
before braking.
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster is illuminated if the
Distronic system calculates that the
distance to the vehicle ahead and your
vehicle’s current speed indicate that the
Distronic will not be capable of slowing the
vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset
following distance, which creates a danger
of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
warning sound is intended as a final caution
in which you should intercede with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking. This will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact
being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
G Warning!
The Distronic brakes your vehicle with a
maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2
(2 m/s2). This corresponds to
approximately 20% of the maximum
deceleration of your vehicle.
The Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort
to restore the preset distance or to
maintain the set speed.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
including the area under the brake pedal.
Objects stored in this area may impair
pedal movement which could interfere with
the braking ability of the Distronic system.
Do not place your foot under the brake
pedal – your foot could become caught.
Distronic menu in the control system
Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system and/or the distance warning function
are activated or deactivated.
i To activate or deactivate the Distronic
system, see (Y page 176) or see
(Y page 178).
To activate or deactivate the Distance
warning function, see (Y page 164).
X
approximately 5 seconds. The following
display appears in the multifunction display.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
one of the following two displays appears
in the multifunction display.
Distronic deactivated
When the Distronic is deactivated, you will
see the standard Distronic display in the
multifunction display.
1 Distronic activated
2 Set vehicle speed
After approximately 5 seconds the currently
set speed appears in the status indicator of
the multifunction display:
RUSA
only: DTR XXX Miles
RCanada
1 Preceding vehicle, if detected
2 Actual distance to the preceding vehicle
3 Preset distance threshold to the
preceding vehicle
only: DTR XXX km/h
Cruise control lever
The Distronic system is operated by means of
the cruise control lever.
4 Your vehicle
Distronic activated
When the Distronic is activated, you will see
the set speed in the multifunction display for
Z
175
Controls in detail
Driving systems
After approximately 5 seconds the currently
set speed appears in the status indicator of
the multifunction display:
RUSA
only: e.g. DTR 55 Miles
RCanada
1 Setting current or higher speed
2 Setting current or lower speed
3 Deactivating the Distronic
4 Activating the Distronic or resuming to
the last set speed
Activating Distronic
You can activate the Distronic when the
vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)
and 110 mph (180 km/h).
When the Distronic is activated, one or two
cruise control speed segments around the set
speed in the speedometer dial are
illuminated. The multifunction display will
show a message such as
DISTRONIC 55 MPH
(Canada: DISTRONIC 90 km/h).
176
only: e.g. DTR 90 km/h
If the Distronic is not activated after the
cruise control lever is pulled in direction of
arrow 4 (Y page 175), you will see the
message DISTRONIC Off in the
multifunction display.
In the following cases you cannot activate the
Distronic:
Rup
to 2 minutes after starting the engine
Rwhen
you brake
Rwhen
you have engaged the parking brake
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
position N
the ESP® is switched off or has
switched off due to a malfunction
Rwhen
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
setting on the Distronic system.
Setting the current speed
X
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in
direction of arrow 2 (Y page 176).
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i If you do not take your foot off of the
accelerator pedal and continue to
accelerate past the set speed, the following
message will appear in the multifunction
display:
DISTRONIC Override
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in
front of you will not be set. Your vehicle
speed will then be determined only by the
accelerator pedal position.
Setting a higher speed
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has made the
necessary adjustments.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increase the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected acceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious
injury to you and others.
You can increase the set speed in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time
you lift the cruise control lever up to the
resistance point.
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the
resistance point in direction of arrow 1
(Y page 175).
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate.
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is increased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
you lift the cruise control lever up past the
resistance point.
engine’s braking power does not brake the
vehicle sufficiently.
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past
the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (Y page 175).
You can reduce the set speed in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a
brief moment until the vehicle has reached
the set speed.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
Setting a lower speed
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has made the
necessary adjustments.
Decrease the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected deceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious
injury to you and others.
i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will
automatically brake the vehicle if the
i The set speed value is decreased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time
you press the cruise control lever down to
the resistance point.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever down
to the resistance point in direction of
arrow 2.
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
decelerate.
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
you press the cruise control lever down
past the resistance point.
Z
177
Controls in detail
Driving systems
X
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever down
past the resistance point in direction of
arrow 2.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a
brief moment until the vehicle has reached
the set speed.
Setting stored speed (Resume function)
G Warning!
The set speed stored in memory should
only be set again if prevailing road
conditions and legal speed limits permit.
Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to the
preset speed could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
X
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (Y page 176).
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored.
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
178
Deactivating Distronic
X
Depress the brake pedal.
or
X
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (Y page 176).
The cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial will go out and the
following message appears briefly in the
multifunction display: DISTRONIC Off
The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
when the engine is turned off.
The Distronic switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake. In this case, the
cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial will go out.
The Distronic also switches off automatically
when
Rthe
vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
Rthe
ESP® is in operation
ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch
Rthe
ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Rthe
Ryou
shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving
The cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial goes out and an acoustic
warning will sound. Observe additional
messages in the multifunction display that
may appear.
G Warning!
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h)
by operation of the system. At that time the
driver must apply the brakes in order to
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to
a stop.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the Distronic. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronic
will resume the last set speed.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following distance
for Distronic by varying the time setting
between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time
Controls in detail
Driving systems
setting and the current speed of your vehicle,
Distronic calculates and sets the required
following distance to the preceding vehicle.
The set distance will be shown in the
multifunction display.
G Warning!
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion
to select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving
recommendations for safe following
distance.
X
X
Increasing distance: Turn distance
setting switch 1 in direction of arrow 3.
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the preceding vehicle.
Decreasing distance: Turn distance
setting switch 1 in direction of arrow 2.
Decreasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the preceding vehicle.
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is
required on the part of the driver. Be prepared
to brake in such situations. Braking will
deactivate the Distronic system.
G Warning!
1 Distance setting switch
2 To decrease distance
3 To increase distance
Distronic works to maintain the speed
selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in
the same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at
your set distance).
This means that:
RYour
vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you have changed lanes.
RWhile
in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your
vehicle could then accelerate to the
previously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distance
between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary
objects in the road, e.g.:
Ra
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Ra
disabled vehicle
Ran
oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means
of steering or braking the vehicle.
G Warning!
Distronic should not be used in snowy or
icy road conditions.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty Distronic system sensor
cover (located in the hood grille), especially
at times of snow and ice or heavy rain.
179
Z
Controls in detail
Driving systems
In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and
the message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable – See Operator’s Manual
appears in the multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic system
sensor cover, see (Y page 321).
Offset driving
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Narrow vehicles
i If the message DISTRONIC Available
Again appears during driving, the dirt (e.g.
slush) has dissolved; Distronic works again,
if you reactivate it (Y page 176).
Turns and bends
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from
your direct line of travel may not be detected
by Distronic. There will be insufficient
distance to the preceding vehicle.
Lane changing
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a
moving vehicle in front, or it may detect one
too soon. This may cause your vehicle to
brake late or unexpectedly.
180
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles
traveling near the outer edges of the lane
have not yet been detected by Distronic.
There will be insufficient distance to the
preceding vehicles.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distance warning function
When the Distronic is deactivated, this
function will continue to warn you when
recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path and the
danger of a collision exists:
RThe
distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
RAn
intermittent warning will sound if
necessary.
If these warnings are issued, you must brake
manually to maintain a safe distance and
avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.
When depressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound ceases. The warning sound
will also cease when the distance to the
preceding vehicle is sufficient again without
applying the brakes. In this case, the distance
warning lamp l will also go out.
G Warning!
If the distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
immediate attention on the part of the
driver is required. As required by the traffic
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
around a possible obstacle. However, do
not drive by relying on the distance warning
function, as this will result in an emergency
braking application. This will not always
enable you to avoid a collision, especially
when traveling on varying road surface
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning
function. This could result in wrong or
missing distance warnings.
X
Switch on the distance warning function in
the control system (Y page 164).
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving
immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
The hill start assist system is inactive
Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
grades
Rwith
Hill start assist system
G Warning!
The hill start assist system is not designed
to function as a parking brake and does not
prevent the vehicle from moving when
parked on an incline.
Always engage the parking brake in
addition to shifting the automatic
transmission into park position P.
the automatic transmission in neutral
position N
Rwith
the parking brake engaged
the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Rif
On uphill grades with a gradient angle of more
than 5°, the hill start assist system maintains
the pressure in the brake system for
approximately 1 second after you have
Z
181
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)
G Warning!
The Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is a
convenience system designed to assist the
driver during vehicle operation. The system
must be set to be appropriate for the
topographical and weather conditions
encountered which can change quickly.
The driver is and must remain at all times
responsible for the vehicle speed and for
safe brake operation.
Depending on the programmed speed,
actual vehicle speed and gradient,
switching on the DSR while driving can
cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly and
you may hear a sound which is caused by
the activation of the vehicle’s brake system
through the DSR. Sudden and unexpected
deceleration can result in loss of vehicle
control, causing an accident and/or
serious personal injury to you and others.
Do not switch on the DSR in a circumstance
where rapid deceleration could result in a
loss of vehicle control.
For more information, see “Off-road
driving” (Y page 303).
The DSR is an aid for driving downhill. The
DSR regulates your vehicle’s speed when
182
driving downhill to the value set in the control
system (Y page 165). The steeper the
downhill gradient is, the greater the brake
application. On flat road surfaces, the DSR
brakes only slightly or not at all.
The DSR regulates the vehicle’s speed in
automatic transmission positions D, or R.
i In addition, make use of the engine’s
braking effect by shifting the automatic
transmission into a lower gear.
on will not change the programmed default
speed. If the DSR is switched off and then
switched on again, the DSR will use the
programmed default speed.
Depending on the road surface and level of
downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to
maintain the set speed. To maintain the set
speed, apply the brakes if necessary.
Switching the DSR on/off
You can drive slower or faster than the set
speed at any time by braking the vehicle or
depressing the accelerator pedal.
i Whenever the DSR is switched on, the
DSR will use the programmed default
speed to regulate the vehicle’s speed. The
default speed programmed at the factory is
4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The default speed
can be reprogrammed using the control
system (Y page 165). The next time the
DSR is switched on, the DSR will use the
newly programmed default speed to
regulate the vehicle’s speed.
Once the DSR is switched on, you can
adjust the set speed using the cruise
control lever (Y page 170). Keep in mind
that adjusting the set speed using the
cruise control lever with the DSR switched
Vehicles without enhanced off-road package
1 DSR switch
2 Indicator lamp
Controls in detail
Driving systems
actual vehicle speed and gradient, the DSR
can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly.
Sudden and unexpected deceleration can
result in loss of vehicle control, causing an
accident and/or serious personal injury to
you and others.
Vehicles with enhanced off-road package
1 DSR switch
2 Indicator lamp
G Warning!
If the accelerator pedal is depressed while
the Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is
activated, the vehicle can drive faster than
the programmed set speed. You should
therefore drive downhill with particular
caution as it could otherwise lead to an
accident and/or serious injury to you or
others. Keep in mind that as soon as you
remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal with the DSR switched on, the DSR
will start regulating the vehicle’s speed
including use of brakes if required.
Depending on the programmed set speed,
Switching on the DSR
The DSR can only be switched on if the vehicle
speed is below 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).
X Press DSR switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
The message DSR and the set speed appear
in the multifunction display.
For information on how to program the set
speed while driving, see “Adjusting the DSR
speed” (Y page 183).
Switching off the DSR
X Press DSR switch 1.
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
The message DSR Off appears in the
multifunction display.
i At a speed above approximately 21 mph
(Canada approximately: 35 km/h), the DSR
is automatically switched off. The message
DSR Off appears in the multifunction
display and an acoustic signal sounds. For
information on how to switch the DSR on
again, see “Switching on the
DSR” (Y page 183).
Adjusting the DSR speed
i If the DSR is switched on at a speed above
With the DSR switched on (Y page 183), the
speed setting can be changed using the
cruise control lever.
18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h), the message
DSR Max. Speed 18 mph (Canada:
30 km/h) appears in the multifunction
display.
Z
183
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increase set speed:
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the
resistance point in direction of arrow 1.
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle speed increases in increments
of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Reduce set speed:
Cruise control lever
1 Increase set speed
2 Reduce set speed
You can change the set speed between
3-10 mph (Canada: 4-18 km/h).
You can increase or reduce the set speed in
two ways.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set value is increased or decreased in
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each
time you lift or depress the cruise control
lever to the resistance point.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever down
to the resistance point in direction of arrow
2.
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle speed decreases in increments
of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Each time the set speed is changed, DSR
will appear in the multifunction display and
the changed set speed is shown.
The set speed is canceled when the DSR is
switched off. If the DSR is switched on again,
the DSR will use the programmed default
speed (Y page 165).
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
i The set value is increased or decreased in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each
184
time you lift or depress the cruise control
lever past the resistance point.
Increase set speed:
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past
the resistance point in direction of arrow
1.
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle speed increases in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
Reduce set speed:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever down
past the resistance point in direction of
arrow 2.
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle speed decreases in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
Each time the set speed is changed, DSR
will appear in the multifunction display and
the changed set speed is shown.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the new set speed.
The set speed is canceled when the DSR is
switched off. If the DSR is switched on again,
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching off-road driving program off
the DSR will use the programmed default
speed (Y page 165).
X
Off-road driving program (Vehicles
without enhanced off-road package)
The off-road driving program is designed to
assist the driver when driving off-road in
terrain and crossing water. The off-road
driving program adjusts the engine power and
shifting of the automatic transmission to be
more suitable for the off-road use of the
vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP®, and 4-ETS
designed for off-road use are automatically
activated.
In the following situations you should switch
to the off-road driving program:
Rduring
Rwhen
off-road driving
crossing water (Y page 306)
Rwhen towing up or down on steep gradients
Press switch 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The symbol
y disappears.
Air suspension program
1 Switch for off-road driving program
2 Indicator lamp
Switching off-road driving program on
X
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The symbol
y appears in the lower multifunction
display.
The system consists of two components. The
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
(Y page 185) and the vehicle level control
(Y page 186).
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent
on:
Rroad surface conditions
Ryour
driving style
Ryour
personal ADS settings
Ryour
personal vehicle level settings
Z
185
Controls in detail
Driving systems
3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting
The following settings are available:
RAUTO
(for normal driving situations)
Indicator lamps 2 and 3 are off.
RSPORT
(for sporty driving)
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehicle is
lowered approximately 0.6 in (15 mm).
Vehicles without enhanced off-road package
1 ADS switch
2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting
3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting
RCOMF
(for comfort driving)
Indicator lamp 3 comes on.
X
Start the engine.
X
Press ADS switch 1 repeatedly until the
desired suspension tuning is reached.
The setting remains stored when you turn off
the engine.
Vehicles with enhanced off-road package
1 ADS switch
2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting
186
Vehicle level control
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to increase vehicle safety and to
reduce fuel consumption.
The vehicle automatically regulates its ride
height based on the set vehicle height and the
current speed:
RAs your driving speed increases, the vehicle
is lowered by increments until it reaches
highspeed level.
RVehicles
with ADS: If you are driving with
the ADS setting COMF or AUTO, the
vehicle is raised back to highway level as
your driving speed decreases.
RVehicles
with ADS: You can select the
highspeed level via the ADS setting
SPORT. In ADS SPORT, the vehicle is
lowered directly to highspeed level as your
driving speed increases.
The vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle
level as soon as the doors or tailgate are
unlocked or opened or closed with the vehicle
unlocked.
In order to operate the vehicle level control
switch (Y page 187) or (Y page 189),
however, the engine must be running.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
G Warning!
Make sure no one is near the wheel housing
or under the vehicle when you lower the
vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs could
become wedged into or under the vehicle.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
lowered with all doors and the tailgate
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door or
the tailgate is opened and will continue
after the door is closed again.
G Warning!
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
level, the center of gravity also rises.
Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle
level is as low as possible. With higher ride
height the ESP® may activate earlier in
certain situations.
Adapt your speed and driving to possible
changed driving behavior of the vehicle
after changing the vehicle level. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed. The ESP®
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle.
level may cause the vehicle underbody to
come in contact with the ground and result
in damage to the vehicle underbody.
Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient
ground clearance before adjusting it to a
lower level.
! Before jacking up the vehicle with
equipment that lifts one or more of the
wheels completely off of the ground,
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
For information on off-road driving, see “Offroad driving” (Y page 303).
Basic settings
The following vehicle chassis ride heights can
be selected using the vehicle level control
switch in the center console:
Level
Driving situation
Raised
For off-road driving or
driving in rough terrain. The
indicator lamp is on.
Highway
For driving on paved roads
in fair or better condition.
The indicator lamp is off.
Vehicles without enhanced off-road
package
i The third available level is the highspeed
level that is set automatically.
The following is the approximate change in
ride height for each of the level settings:
! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven
terrain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower
2 Indicator lamp
1 Vehicle level control switch
Level
Ride height
Raised
+2.3 in (60 mm)
Highway9
+/-0 in (0 mm)
Highspeed
-0.6 in (-15 mm)
Z
187
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i Vehicles with ADS:
Depending on the ADS setting
(Y page 185), the vehicle will be lowered to
the highspeed level when traveling at
higher speeds. At speeds below 40 mph
(64 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned
to the highway level.
When indicator lamp 2 is off:
X
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the raised level.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
being set:
i The highspeed level is not available when
towing a trailer. For more information on
towing a trailer, see “Trailer
towing” (Y page 310).
Raised level
Only select the raised level if appropriate for
the driving situation encountered. Otherwise
the fuel consumption may increase and/or
the handling characteristics of the vehicle
may be unfavorable.
i You can select the raised level at speeds
up to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds,
the message n Level Selection Not
Permitted appears in the multifunction
display.
X
Start the engine.
9
Ground clearance: 8.5 in (217 mm)
188
Highway level
! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
may cause the vehicle underbody to come
in contact with the road and result in
damage to the vehicle underbody. Always
make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground
clearance before adjusting it to a lower
level.
i The message can be cleared by pressing
the è, ·, j or k button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
When the raised level is reached, indicator
lamp 2 comes on continuously and the
following message appears in the
multifunction display for 5 seconds:
X
Start the engine.
When indicator lamp 2 is on:
X
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the highway level.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
being set:
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicles with enhanced off-road
package (Canada only)
i The message can be cleared by pressing
the è, ·, j or k button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
When the highway level is reached, indicator
lamp 2 goes out and the following message
appears in the multifunction display for
5 seconds:
1 Rotatable outer adjustment ring
% Set higher vehicle level
Level
Driving situation
Off-road 3
Exclusively for clearing
impracticable situations at
low speed. Lower, middle
and upper indicator lamps
are on.
Off-road 2
Off-road driving. Lower and
middle indicator lamps are
on.
Off-road 1
For driving on easy terrain.
Lower indicator lamp is on.
Highway
For normal driving. Indicator
lamps are off.
3 Indicator lamps
( Set lower vehicle level
i The vehicle is lowered to the highway level
automatically if the vehicle speed is above
55 mph (88 km/h) or if the vehicle speed
stays between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
55 mph (88 km/h) for approximately 20
seconds.
Basic settings
The following vehicle chassis ride heights can
be selected using the vehicle level control
switch in the center console:
i Another available level is the highspeed
level that is set automatically.
The following is the approximate change in
ride height for each of the level settings:
Level
Ride height
Off-road 3
+3.5 in (90 mm)
Off-road 2
+2.3 in (60 mm)
Z
189
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Level
Ride height
Off-road 1
+1.2 in (30 mm)
level 1: selectable below 60 mph
(96 km/h)
Highway9
+/-0 in (0 mm)
Highspeed
-0.6 in (-15 mm)
ROff-road
Depending on the ADS setting
(Y page 185), the vehicle will be lowered to
the highspeed level when traveling at
higher speeds. At speeds below 40 mph
(64 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned
to the highway level.
i The highspeed level is not available when
towing a trailer. For more information on
towing a trailer, see “Trailer
towing” (Y page 310).
You can only select the off-road levels below
a certain speed. At higher speeds, the
message Level Selection Not Permitted
appears in the multifunction display.
Ground clearance: 8.5 in (217 mm)
190
RAvoid
extreme, quick steering
movements.
ROff-road
ROff-road
i Vehicles with ADS:
9
You can select
level 2: selectable below 40 mph
(64 km/h)
level 3: selectable below 12 mph
(20 km/h)
Off-road levels
G Warning!
Vehicle off-road level 3 is not intended for
use on paved roads. This vehicle level is
intended for clearing impracticable
situations at low speed exclusively. The
vehicle has a very high center of gravity in
off-road level 3. This increases the
overturning hazard.
RSelect off-road level 3 exclusively for
clearing impracticable situations at low
speed.
RAdapt
your driving style to the modified
conditions.
RDo
not exceed a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
RKeep
in mind the vehicle’s driving
characteristics are modified.
You should therefore drive in off-road
level 3 with particular caution as it could
otherwise lead to an accident and/or
serious injury to you or others.
If you are driving too fast while using off-road
level 3, you will see the following message in
the multifunction display:
Reduce speed to under 12 MPH
(20 km/h)
In addition, an acoustic signal sounds.
i This message cannot be deactivated.
For more information, see “Display
messages” (Y page 351)
Only use off-road levels when necessary.
Otherwise the fuel consumption may
increase and/or the handling characteristics
of the vehicle may be unfavorable.
X Start the engine.
X
Turn outer adjustment ring 1 repeatedly
until indicator lamp 3 of the desired level
flashes.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
ROff-road
level 1, lower indicator lamp
flashes
ROff-road
level 2, lower and middle
indicator lamps flashes
ROff-road level 3, lower, middle and upper
indicator lamps flashes
The vehicle adjusts to the corresponding
off-road level. For example, the following
message appears in the multifunction
display while the level is being set:
The vehicle is raised from off-road level 1 to
off-road level 2.
i The message can be cleared by pressing
the è, ·, j or k button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
When the off-road level 2 is reached, the
following message appears in the
multifunction display for 5 seconds:
The lower and middle indicator lamps 3
comes on continuously.
While the vehicle is adjusting from off-road
level 2 to off-road level 3, you will see, for
example, the following message in the
multifunction display:
Once off-road level 3 is reached, you will see,
for example, the following message in the
multifunction display:
i The message Max. 12 MPH (20 km/h)
reminds you of the maximum permissible
driving speed with off-road level 3.
If you drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
a short period while using off-road level 3, the
following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Off-road level 3 is canceled.
If you continue to increase your speed, the
message remains in the multifunction
display.
The new level will not be shown until the
vehicle has been able to adjust to a level
191
Z
Controls in detail
Driving systems
appropriate for the speed at which you are
currently driving.
If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will
see, for example, the following message in
the multifunction display while the vehicle is
lowering
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 55 mph
(88 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds,
the off-road level 2 setting is canceled and
the vehicle is lowered to the off-road
level 1.
You will see, for example, the following
message in the multifunction display:
the highspeed level when traveling at
higher speeds. At speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned
to the highway level.
i The setting is stored when you turn off the
engine.
Highway level
! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2.
Once off-road level 2 is reached, you will see,
for example, the following message in the
multifunction display:
roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
may cause the vehicle underbody to come
in contact with the road and result in
damage to the vehicle underbody. Always
make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground
clearance before adjusting it to a lower
level.
RAt speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h) the off-
road level 1 setting is canceled and the
vehicle is lowered to the highway level.
You will see, for example, the following
message in the multifunction display:
X
When one or more indicator lamps 3 are on:
X
While driving, the vehicle is lowered
automatically as follows:
RAt
vehicle speeds above 55 mph
(88 km/h) or if the vehicle speed stays
192
RDepending
on the ADS setting
(Y page 185), the vehicle will be lowered to
Start the engine.
Turn outer adjustment ring 1 until all lit
indicator lamps 3 flash.
The vehicle adjusts to the highway level.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
being set:
Controls in detail
Driving systems
All-wheel drive
i The message can be cleared by pressing
the è, ·, j or k button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
When the highway level is reached, the
indicator lamps 3 go out and the following
message appears in the multifunction display
for 5 seconds:
Your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel drive
(4MATIC). Both, the front and rear axles, are
powered at all times when the vehicle is being
operated. The 4MATIC improves traction in
conjunction with the ESP® (Y page 77) and
the Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
(Y page 78).
G Warning!
If a drive wheel is spinning due to
insufficient traction:
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
ground. Observe instructions for towing the
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system and/or the transfer case which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
achieved with winter tires (Y page 297) or
snow chains as required.
pedal.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
i The vehicle is lowered to the highway level
automatically if the vehicle speed is above
60 mph (96 km/h).
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents
resulting from excessive speed.
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
could damage the transfer case, which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
Parktronic system
The Parktronic system is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed
to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
It indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle visually and audibly.
The Parktronic system is activated
automatically when you
Rswitch
on the ignition
and
Rrelease
Z
the parking brake
193
Controls in detail
Driving systems
and
Rthe
automatic transmission is in drive
position D, reverse gear R, or neutral
position N
The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At
lower speeds, the Parktronic system switches
on again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates when
you shift the automatic transmission into
park position P or engage the parking brake.
The Parktronic system monitors the
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
To function properly, the sensors must be free
of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors
regularly, being careful not to scratch or
damage the sensors, see “Cleaning the
Parktronic system sensors” (Y page 321).
G Warning!
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It
is not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always remains with the driver.
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
! Special attention must be paid to objects
1 Sensors in the front bumper
194
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
objects may not be detected by the system
and can damage the vehicle.
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or below
the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.
Range of the sensors
Controls in detail
Driving systems
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle
in this range, all the distance warning
segments illuminate and you hear a warning
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the
minimum distance, the actual distance may
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic
system.
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the
relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle.
Front sensors
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
2 Right side of the vehicle
3 Readiness indicators
Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for
either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
system is ready to measure when the yellow
readiness indicators 3 are illuminated.
The current transmission position determines
which warning indicator will be activated.
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Rear area warning indicator
1 Left side of the vehicle
Front area warning indicator
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
3 Readiness indicators
Z
195
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Current
transmission
position
Warning indicator
when the automatic transmission is shifted
into drive position D, or park position P, or
the parking brake is engaged.
D
Front area activated
Switching the Parktronic system on/off
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
The Parktronic system switches on
automatically when the ignition is switched
on.
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or
more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
RFront area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance
segment illuminates and a constant
acoustic warning lasting a maximum of
2 seconds will sound for the second red
distance segment. The signal is canceled
when the automatic transmission is shifted
into park position P or the parking brake is
engaged.
RRear
area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance
segment illuminates and a constant
acoustic warning lasting a maximum of
2 seconds will sound for the second red
distance segment. The signal is canceled
196
Vehicle with enhanced off-road package
1 Parktronic switch
2 Indicator lamp
Vehicle without enhanced off-road package
1 Parktronic switch
2 Indicator lamp
X
Switching off Parktronic system: Press
Parktronic switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
X
Switching on Parktronic system: Press
Parktronic switch 1 again.
i Vehicles with original equipment
Mercedes-Benz Trailer Hitch Kit:
The rear Parktronic sensor will disengage
automatically when towing a trailer.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system malfunction
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system, if only the red distance segments
illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds.
The Parktronic system will switch off
automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
lamp 2 in Parktronic switch 1 comes on.
X
Have the Parktronic system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
If only the red distance segments illuminate
and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,
ice, snow and slush) or there is an
interference from other radio or ultrasonic
signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers). The Parktronic system will
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and
indicator lamp 2 in Parktronic switch 1
comes on.
X Switch off the ignition.
X
Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(Y page 321).
X
Switch on the ignition.
or
X
Check the Parktronic system operation at
another location to rule out interference
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
Rear view camera
G Warning!
The rear view camera is only an aid and may
display obstacles from a distorted
perspective or inaccurately, or may not
display obstacles at all. The rear view
camera does not relieve you of the
responsibility to be cautious, take care and
pay careful attention. The rear view camera
may not show objects which are
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder
the rear bumper
Rabove
the tailgate handle
You are responsible for safety at all times
and must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area
behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.
Otherwise you could endanger yourself
and/or others.
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
G Warning!
The rear view camera either will not
function or will not function to its full
capability if
Rthe tailgate is open
Rit
is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
Rit
is night or you are parking/
maneuvering your vehicle in an area
where it is very dark
Rthe
camera is exposed to a very bright
white light
Rthe
immediate surroundings are
illuminated with fluorescent light (the
display may flicker)
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
the cold (lens condensation)
Rthe
camera lens is dirty or covered
Rthe
rear of your vehicle is damaged
Z
197
Controls in detail
Driving systems
In this case, have the position and setting
of the camera checked by a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you contact a
Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
Do not use the rear view camera in these
situations. Otherwise you could injure
yourself or others and/or damage property
including your vehicle while parking/
maneuvering.
The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
It shows you the area behind the vehicle in
the COMAND system display when reverse
gear R is engaged, for example during parallel
parking.
X
Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
X
Switch on the COMAND system.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to reverse
gear R.
The area behind the vehicle appears in the
COMAND system display.
i The area behind the vehicle is shown in
the COMAND system display as a mirror
image, like in the rear view mirror.
i The image from the rear view camera will
no longer be displayed if you select another
function on the COMAND system while
reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
image again, disengage and reengage
reverse gear R.
X
1 Rear view camera
198
Switching off: Shift the automatic
transmission into park position P, neutral
position N, or drive position D.
Controls in detail
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control
Rear automatic climate control
USA only
Canada only
The climate control combines an automatic
heating and ventilation system with a cooling
system. You can adjust the automatic climate
control separately for the driver’s and
passenger side.
The 3-zone automatic climate control
The rear-automatic climate control allows
combines an automatic heating and
separate climate settings for the rear
ventilation system with a cooling system. You compartment.
can adjust the 3-zone automatic climate
control separately for each zone in the
vehicle.
Z
199
Controls in detail
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Air vents
Center air vents
Side air vents
1 Left center air vent, adjustable
2 Right center air vent, adjustable
Example illustration driver’s side
1 Left side defroster air vent, fixed
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
2 Left side air vent, adjustable
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
G Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature).
This may cause burns or frostbite to
unprotected skin in the immediate area of
the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in
the vehicle interior that are not in the
immediate area of unprotected skin.
For best possible performance of the climate
control:
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X
Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction.
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
200
adjustable right center air vent
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent
X
Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels 3
and 4 in the required direction.
adjustable left side air vent
X
Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel 3 in
the required direction.
Controls in detail
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Rear center console air vents
1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
3 Rear climate control panel
When the front climate control panel is
switched on or off, the air supply through the
rear center air vents is also switched on or
off.
Air vents in the roof liner over the
second-row seats
Air vents in the roof liner over the thirdrow seats
Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control
only
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control
Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control
only
1 Left air vent, adjustable
2 Air vent, adjustable
2 Right air vent, adjustable
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
X
Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels 1
upward or downward.
adjustable right air vent
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left air vent
X
Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels 3
and 4 upward or downward.
Z
201
Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control
Control panel
Function
Recommendation/Notes
1
Temperature control, driver’s side
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
2
U Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode)
i Switches on the automatic mode. The indicator lamp (Y page 206)
in button U comes on.
202
(Y page 207)
Controls in detail
Climate control
3
Function
Recommendation/Notes
| Front defroster
i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or (Y page 207)
the side windows are clear again.
4
Q Increasing air volume
(Y page 207)
5
{ Air distribution (directs air through the windshield
and side air vents)
(Y page 207)
6
9 AC cooling on/off
i Switches on the air conditioning. The indicator lamp (Y page 206)
in button 9 comes on.
9 Residual heat/ventilation
i With the engine turned off, it is possible to continue
to heat or ventilate the interior.
7
Temperature control, passenger side
8
: Rear climate control on/off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off (USA only)
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
(Y page 209)
(Y page 207)
< Rear climate control on/off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off (Canada only)
9
a Air distribution (directs air through center and side
air vents)
(Y page 207)
a
Y Air distribution (directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
(Y page 207)
Z
203
Controls in detail
Climate control
Function
b
Air volume display
c
· Decreasing air volume
d
1 Rear window defroster
Recommendation/Notes
(Y page 207)
i At very low temperatures, rear window defroster
operation is delayed until the vehicle interior has
warmed up.
e
: Air recirculation
(Y page 223)
i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in a tunnel. (Y page 208)
Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lack of fresh
air.
f
Interior temperature sensor
g
´ Climate control on/off
i Switches on the climate control system. The indicator (Y page 205)
lamp in button ´ goes out.
204
Controls in detail
Climate control
Notes on climate control
The climate control is operational whenever
the engine is running. You can operate the
climate control system in either the
automatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the
selected interior temperature and the current
outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the
passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
G Warning!
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume to
the interior and the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and others. Have a clogged filter replaced
as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(Y page 206).
G Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for
heating and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
and others.
X
Deactivating: Press button ´.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Reactivating: Press button U.
i You can also press button ´ on the
climate control panel.
If you press button | to reactivate the
climate control system, the defrosting
mode is activated.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
interior before driving off, see “Summer
opening feature” (Y page 127). The climate
control will then adjust the interior
temperature to the set value much faster.
Deactivating the climate control
system
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the front
X
Deactivating: Press button :.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Reactivating: Press button :.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
G Warning!
When the climate control system is
switched off, the outside air supply and
circulation are also switched off. Only
choose this setting for a short time.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and others.
Z
205
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while the
engine is running and cools the interior air to
the temperature set by the operator. In
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
G Warning!
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
i Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air
conditioning. The interior air will then no
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
X Press button 9.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The cooling function switches off after a
short delay.
206
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning.
X Press button 9 again.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
are harmful to the ozone layer.
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated
again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic mode
When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with
dehumidification is switched on. This function
can be switched off if necessary.
G Warning!
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
X
Set the desired temperature
(Y page 207).
X
Activating: Press button U.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air volume and air distribution are
adjusted automatically.
i The settings for the passenger side are
also used for the rear passenger
compartment.
Controls in detail
Climate control
X
Deactivating: Press button · or Q.
The indicator lamp in button U goes out.
The automatic operation of air volume
switches off. The selected blower speed is
shown in air volume display b
(Y page 202).
or
X
Press air distribution button {, a, or
Y.
The indicator lamp in button U goes out.
The automatic operation of air distribution
switches off.
Adjusting air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
Symbol
Function
{
Directs air to the windshield and
side air vents
a
Directs air through the center
and side air vents
Y
Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
X
Decrease/increase: Press button · or
Q.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in air
volume display b (Y page 202).
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
Setting the temperature
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting
in small increments, preferably starting at
72‡ (22†).
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control 1 and/or 7
(Y page 202) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Adjusting air volume
X
Press the desired air distribution button
{, a, or Y.
The indicator lamp in button U goes out.
The automatic mode is switched off. Air
distribution is controlled according to the
desired button.
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
Activating
X
Press button |.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The climate control switches to the
following functions automatically:
Z
207
Controls in detail
Climate control
The indicator lamp in button | goes out.
The indicator lamp in button 9 comes
on.
Rmost
efficient blower speed and heating
power, depending on outside
temperature
Rair
flows onto the windshield and the
front door windows (side air vents must
be open)
or
X
Rthe
air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for airdrying
Adjustments
You can adjust the air volume and the
temperature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
X Press button Ï to decrease or button
Q to increase air volume to the desired
level.
The air volume decreases/increases to the
next lower/higher blower speed and
heating switches to the temperature that
was set before the front defroster was
switched on.
Turn temperature control 1 and/or 7
(Y page 202) slightly in any direction.
Heating switches to the temperature that
was set before the front defroster was
switched on.
The indicator lamp in button | goes out.
The indicator lamp in button 9 comes
on.
i The air conditioning compressor remains
on even if the indicator lamp in button
| goes out. This helps to prevent the
windshield from fogging.
Deactivating
X
Press button | again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect. The air conditioning compressor
remains switched on.
i To deactivate, you can also press button
´ or U.
208
Windshield fogged on the outside
X
Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 122).
X
Press air distribution button a or
Y.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
outside air and recirculates the air in the
passenger compartment.
G Warning!
Fogged windows impair visibility,
endangering you and others. If the windows
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning is activated, or press button
|.
X
Activating: Press button :.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Controls in detail
Climate control
i The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside
temperatures.
The indicator lamp in button : is not lit
when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
or the outside temperature is below 41‡
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
switch on automatically.
X
Deactivating: Press button :.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and
the battery voltage.
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery.
X
Activating: Switch off the ignition.
X
Press button 9.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Rafter
X
Deactivating: Press button 9 again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
The residual heat is deactivated
automatically:
i The manually selected air recirculation
mode is deactivated automatically:
5 minutes if the outside
temperature is below approximately
41‡ (5†)
air-drying are turned off
Rafter
30 minutes if the outside
temperature is above approximately
41‡ (5†)
Rwhen
Rafter
the ignition is switched on
approximately 30 minutes
Rif
the battery voltage drops
Rif
the coolant temperature is too low
Z
209
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
3-zone automatic climate control
Control panels
USA only
210
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Function
Recommendation/Notes
1
Temperature control, driver’s side
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
2
U Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode)
i Switches on the automatic mode. The indicator lamp (Y page 218)
(Y page 219)
in button U comes on.
3
| Front defroster
i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or (Y page 221)
the side windows are clear again.
4
Q Increasing air volume
(Y page 221)
5
{ Air distribution (directs air through the windshield
and side air vents)
(Y page 220)
6
9 AC cooling on/off
i Switches on the air conditioning. The indicator lamp (Y page 217)
in button 9 comes on.
9 Residual heat/ventilation
i With the engine turned off, it is possible to continue
to heat or ventilate the interior.
(Y page 223)
(Y page 219)
7
Temperature control, passenger side
8
: Operating the rear climate control from the front
(Y page 217)
9
a Air distribution (directs air through center and side
air vents)
(Y page 220)
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
Z
211
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Function
a
Y Air distribution (directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
b
Air volume display
c
· Decreasing air volume
d
1 Rear window defroster
Recommendation/Notes
(Y page 220)
(Y page 221)
i At very low temperatures, rear window defroster
operation is delayed until the vehicle interior has
warmed up.
e
: Air recirculation
(Y page 223)
i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in a tunnel. (Y page 222)
Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lack of fresh
air.
f
Interior temperature sensor
g
´ Climate control on/off
i Switches on the climate control system. The indicator (Y page 217)
lamp in button ´ goes out.
212
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
Function
Recommendation/Notes
1
Temperature control, driver’s side
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
2
U Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode)
i Switches on the automatic mode. The indicator lamp (Y page 218)
(Y page 219)
in button U comes on.
3
6 Air distribution, driver’s side (directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
(Y page 220)
Z
213
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
4
Function
Recommendation/Notes
| Front defroster
i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or (Y page 221)
the side windows are clear again.
5
Q Increasing air volume
6
1 Rear window defroster
(Y page 221)
i At very low temperatures, rear window defroster
operation is delayed until the vehicle interior has
warmed up.
(Y page 223)
7
Z Air distribution, passenger side (directs air through
the windshield and side air vents)
(Y page 220)
8
Ñ Operating the rear climate control from the front
(Y page 217)
9
Temperature control, passenger side
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
a
´ Automatic climate control on/off
i Switches on the climate control system. The indicator (Y page 217)
(Y page 219)
lamp in button ´ goes out.
b
Y Air distribution, passenger side (directs air through
the footwells and side air vents)
(Y page 220)
c
a Air distribution, passenger side (directs air through
center and side air vents)
(Y page 220)
214
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
d
Function
Recommendation/Notes
9 AC cooling on/off
i Switches on the air conditioning. The indicator lamp (Y page 217)
in button 9 comes on.
9 Residual heat ventilation
i With the engine turned off, it is possible to continue
to heat or ventilate the interior.
e
Display
f
ß Decreasing air volume
g
: Air recirculation
(Y page 223)
(Y page 221)
i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in a tunnel. (Y page 222)
Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lack of fresh
air.
h
7 Air distribution, driver’s side (directs air through
center and side air vents)
(Y page 220)
j
8 Air distribution, driver’s side (directs air through the
footwells and side air vents)
(Y page 220)
k
Interior temperature sensor
l
; Adopting driver’s side settings for all zones
(Y page 223)
Z
215
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Rear automatic climate control
1 Increasing air volume
2 Temperature control
3 Air distribution and air volume (automatic
mode)
4 Air distribution (directs air through the
side air vents)
5 Air distribution (directs air through the
footwells and side air vents)
6 Rear automatic climate control on/off
7 Decreasing air volume
216
Notes on 3-zone automatic climate
control
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic
climate control determines the relation of the
sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
the inside temperature for every individual
zone.
The automatic climate control is operational
whenever the engine is running. It cools the
vehicle’s interior according to the angle and
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside
temperature and the selected temperature.
You can operate the automatic climate
control in either the automatic or manual
mode.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the
passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
G Warning!
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume to
the interior and the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and others. Have a clogged filter replaced
as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(Y page 217).
G Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for
heating and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
and others.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
interior before driving off, see “Summer
opening feature” (Y page 127). The climate
control will then adjust the interior
temperature to the set value much faster.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Deactivating the climate control
system
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the front
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the rear
G Warning!
USA only
X
Deactivating: Press button ´.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Reactivating: Press button U.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
When the climate control system is
switched off, the outside air supply and
circulation are also switched off. Only
choose this setting for a short time.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and others.
X
X
X
Deactivating: Press button ´.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Canada only: Display e (Y page 213) is
cleared.
X
Deactivating: Press button Ñ.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
In display e (Y page 213), you will see
the ) symbol followed by MODE for
approximately 3 seconds.
X
Press button ´.
In display e, you will see the ) symbol
followed by OFF.
The rear climate control is switched off.
Reactivating: Press button U.
i You can also press button ´ on the
climate control panel.
If you press button | to reactivate the
climate control system, the defrosting
mode is activated.
Reactivating: Press button :.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Canada only
Deactivating the front climate control
X
Deactivating: Press button :.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Reactivating: Press button Ñ.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
In display e, you will see the ) symbol
followed by ON and MODE. The MODE display
is cleared and the indicator lamp in button
Ñ goes out after approximately
3 seconds.
The rear climate control switches on.
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while the
engine is running and cools the interior air to
the temperature set by the operator. In
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
G Warning!
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
i Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
217
Z
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the cooling
function of the climate control system. The
interior air will then no longer be cooled or
dehumidified.
X Press button 9.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The cooling function switches off after a
short delay.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning.
X Press button 9 again.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
are harmful to the ozone layer.
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated
again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned off.
10 Canada
11 USA
218
only
only
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Set the desired temperature
(Y page 219).
X
Activating: Press button U.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Automatic mode
You can switch the climate control system on
and off for each zone of the passenger
compartment as desired.
When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with
dehumidification is switched on. This function
can be switched off if necessary.
G Warning!
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
i The settings for the passenger side are
also used for the rear passenger
compartment.
X
Deactivating: Press button · or Q.
The indicator lamp in button U goes out.
The automatic air volume is switched off
and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
remains switched on.
or
X
Press one air distribution button 610,
Z10, 710, a, {11, 810 or
Y.
The indicator lamp in button U goes out.
The automatic air distribution is switched
off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
remains switched on.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Automatic mode with rear climate
control panel
X
Activating: Press button U.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The temperature, air volume and air
distribution are adjusted automatically.
X
Deactivating: Press button · or Q.
The automatic air volume is switched off
and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
remains switched on.
Setting the temperature
You can set the air temperature for each of
the 3 zones separately.You should raise or
lower the temperature setting in small
increments, preferably starting at 72‡
(22†).
Rear temperature with front climate
control panel
X
or
X
Press button Z or a.
The automatic air distribution is switched
off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
remains switched on.
Canada only
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control 1 and/or 9
(Y page 213) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Press button : (USA only) or Ñ
(Canada only).
Canada only: In display e (Y page 213) you
will see the ) symbol.
USA only
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control 7 (Y page 210)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Front temperature with front climate
control panel
USA only
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control 1 and/or 7
(Y page 210) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Canada only
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control 9 (Y page 213)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Z
219
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Rear temperature with rear climate
control panel
X
Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control 2 (Y page 216)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Adjusting air distribution
USA only
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
Symbol
Function
{
Directs air to the windshield and
side air vents
a
Directs air through the center
and side air vents
Y
Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
220
X
Press the desired air distribution button
{, a, or Y.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
on.
Symbol
Driver’s
side
Symbol
Function
Passenger
side
6
Z
Directs air to
the windshield
and side air
vents
7
a
Directs air
through the
center, side
and rear
passenger
compartment
air vents
8
Y
Directs air to
the footwells
and side air
vents
Canada only
The air distribution can be adjusted
separately on each side of the passenger
compartment.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
X
Press the desired air distribution button
6, 7, or 8 for the driver’s side,
or Z, a, or Y for the passenger
side.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
on.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
Adjusting air volume
USA only
X
Decrease/increase: Press button · or
Q.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in air
volume display b (Y page 210).
Canada only
X
Decrease/increase: Press button · or
Q.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed appears in display
e (Y page 213).
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
Activating
X
Press button |.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The climate control switches to the
following functions automatically:
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
power, depending on outside
temperature
was set before the front defroster was
switched on.
The indicator lamp in button | goes out.
The indicator lamp in button 9 comes
on.
or
X
Rair
flows onto the windshield and the
front door windows (side air vents must
be open)
Rthe
air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for airdrying
Adjustments
You can adjust the air volume and the
temperature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
X Press button Ï to decrease or button
Q to increase air volume to the desired
level.
The air volume decreases/increases to the
next lower/higher blower speed and
heating switches to the temperature that
Turn temperature control 1 and/or 7
(USA only) (Y page 210) or 1 and/or 9
(Canada only) (Y page 213) slightly in any
direction.
Heating switches to the temperature that
was set before the front defroster was
switched on.
The indicator lamp in button | goes out.
The indicator lamp in button 9 comes
on.
i The air conditioning compressor remains
on even if the indicator lamp in button
| goes out. This helps to prevent the
windshield from fogging.
Deactivating
X
Press button | once more.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Defrosting is turned off.
221
Z
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control
The previous settings are once again in
effect. The air conditioning compressor
remains switched on.
i To deactivate, you can also press button
´ or U.
Windshield fogged on the outside
X
Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 122).
X
Press button U.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Air volume and air distribution are
controlled separately for each zone.
If the automatic air volume and air
distribution are switched off:
X
Press buttons Y/812 and a/
712.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
outside air and recirculates the air in the
passenger compartment.
G Warning!
Fogged windows impair visibility,
endangering you and others. If the windows
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning is activated, or press button
|.
X
Activating: Press button :.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside
temperatures.
The indicator lamp in button : is not lit
when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
12 Canada
222
only
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
or the outside temperature is below 41‡
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
switch on automatically.
Air recirculation mode
X
Deactivating: Press button :.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i The manually selected air recirculation
mode is deactivated automatically:
Rafter
5 minutes if the outside
temperature is below approximately
41‡ (5†)
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
air-drying are turned off
Rafter
30 minutes if the outside
temperature is above approximately
41‡ (5†)
At outside temperatures above 79‡ (26†)
the system will not automatically switch back
to outside air. A quantity of outside air is
added after approximately 30 minutes.
Controls in detail
Rear window defroster
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and
the battery voltage.
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery.
X
Activating: Switch off the ignition.
X
Press button 9.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Deactivating: Press button 9 again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The residual heat is deactivated
automatically:
Rwhen
Rafter
the ignition is switched on
approximately 30 minutes
Rif
the battery voltage drops
Rif
the coolant temperature is too low
Using driver-side settings for all
temperature zones
This feature is only available in Canada
vehicles.
You can use the settings of the driver’s side,
such as temperature, air volume and air
distribution, for all temperature zones. These
settings only need to be made once and the
climate control system will automatically
regulate the settings for all temperature
zones quickly and comfortably.
X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air
volume and air distribution.
X
X
Press button ;.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The driver-side settings are used for all
temperature zones.
Deactivating: Press button ; again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i If you manually set the temperature, air
volume or air distribution for the passenger
side or the rear passenger compartment
when the MONO setting is active, the
MONO setting will be switched off.
Rear window defroster
G Warning!
Any accumulation of snow and ice should
be removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and others.
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery drain
to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is switched off automatically after
some time of operation depending on the
outside temperature.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on: Press button 1 on the
respective climate control panel.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Switching off: Press button 1 again.
! If the rear window defroster switches off
too soon and the indicator lamp starts
flashing, too many electrical consumers
are operating simultaneously and there is
insufficient voltage in the battery. The
system responds automatically by
switching the rear window defroster off.
223
Z
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
switches back on automatically.
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
G Warning!
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the opening/
closing procedure.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If in express operation mode the
tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path, the
automatic reversal function will stop the
tilt/sliding sunroof and open it slightly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently
when the sunroof switch is pressed and
held. See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked” section for details.
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted
by releasing the sunroof switch or, if the
sunroof switch was moved past the
resistance point and released, by moving
the sunroof switch in any direction.
224
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
G Warning!
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of
glass. In the event of an accident, the glass
may shatter. This may result in an opening
in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them
properly may be thrown out of the opening.
Such an opening also presents a potential
for injury for occupants wearing their seat
belts properly as entire body parts or
portions of them may protrude from the
passenger compartment.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
result in malfunctions.
If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof due to a malfunction contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
X
! Please keep in mind that weather
conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
could be damaged which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Opening
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof using the SmartKey or the
KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
opening feature” (Y page 127) and
“Convenience closing
feature” (Y page 127).
i After switching off the ignition or
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
passenger door. If no door was opened you
can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
to 5 minutes.
Switch on the ignition.
Sunroof switch
1 Raising
2 Opening
3 Closing
With the sunroof closed or raised, you can
slide the sunroof screen forward and back.
X
Opening manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2.
X
Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X
Express operation: To open the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2 and release.
X
Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,
resonance noises may result in addition to
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
noises, change the position of the tilt/
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
Z
Sunroof screen
225
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Raising
X
Rasing manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow 1.
X
Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X
Express operation: To raise the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 1 and release.
Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked
G Warning!
Make sure that nobody can become
trapped and be seriously or even fatally
injured when closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof with greater force or without
automatic reversal function.
Closing
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and open slightly.
However, the tilt/sliding sunroof will exert
greater force before reversing than when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is closed in express
operation. Please exercise caution!
X
Closing manually: Pull and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow 3.
X
X
Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X
Express operation: To close the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 3 and release.
X
X
Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
226
Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
has stopped because it was blocked, pull
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow
3 (Y page 225) until the tilt/sliding
sunroof is fully closed.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and
opens slightly:
X
Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
was blocked, pull the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 3 until the tilt/sliding
sunroof is fully closed.
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately
after it had been blocked two times will
cause the tilt/sliding sunroof to close
without any reversal function for as long as
you hold the sunroof switch.
Synchronizing
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
Rafter
the battery has been disconnected or
discharged
Rafter
a malfunction
Rif
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
or synchronized, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance.
X
Vehicles with SmartKey: Switch off the
ignition and remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the
ignition and open the driver’s door (this
puts the starter switch in position 0, same
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
X
as with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then can
be closed again.
Loading and storing
Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof
from the fuse box (Y page 415).
G Warning!
X
Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 1 (Y page 225) until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
X
Keep holding the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 1 for approximately
1 second.
X
Check the express operation feature
(Y page 225).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
completely, the roof is synchronized.
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
Load distribution
Loading instructions
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible using cargo tie-down
rings and fastening materials appropriate
for the weight and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or
sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
thrown around inside the vehicle and can
cause injury to vehicle occupants unless
the items are securely fastened in the
vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise
care when transporting cargo. Do not pile
luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backrests.
The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. Always use cargo tiedown rings, and if so equipped, always use
the cargo net when transporting cargo.
Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) which is the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,
spare wheel, installed accessories,
passengers and luggage/cargo must never
exceed the load limit and the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle as
specified on the placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 275).
In addition, the load must be distributed in
such a way so that the weight on each axle
227
Z
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
never exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The GVWR
and GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on
the certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (Y page 275).
For more information, see “Tire and Loading
Information” (Y page 275).
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
vehicle depend greatly on the load
distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustration
shown, with the heaviest items being placed
towards the front of the vehicle.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
RAlways
place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
RThe
heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible against
front or rear seat backrests.
For additional safety when transporting cargo
while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten
the outer seat belts crosswise into the
opposite side buckles.
228
Carriers
For information about further carriers,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
i The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. The expanded cargo
volume (Y page 235) should only be used
for items which do not fit in the cargo
compartment alone.
Only use carriers when the crossbars have
been completely mounted. The left and
right roof rails are only stabilized by means
of the crossbars mounted.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached carrier or its load could become
detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
198 lb (90 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof
is loaded, the handling characteristics are
different from those when operating the
vehicles without a roof loaded.
Make sure
Ryou
can open the tailgate completely
Ryou can raise the tilt/sliding sunroof at the
rear completely
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
i The following accessories are available
for your Mercedes-Benz:
RRoof
Cargo Container – Small, Medium,
or Large
RSki
and Snowboard Carrier – Standard
RSki
and Snowboard Carrier – Deluxe
(Only in connection with corresponding
adapter.)
For more information on Mercedes-Benz
accessories, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Crossbars
The maximum roof load of any add-on roof
equipment is reduced by the unladen weight
of the crossbars (13.7 Ibs/6.2 kg).
Four keys and an Allen wrench required for
installing and removing are included with the
crossbars.
i The keys and the Allen wrench are stored
with the vehicle tool kit under the cargo
compartment floor (Y page 326).
i Spare parts are available as MercedesBenz accessories. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Installing the crossbars
G Warning!
Roof rails
Please follow these installation instructions
carefully. Caution should be exercised to
avoid damage to the vehicle while installing
the crossbars. Also, be careful not to injure
yourself or others while installing and
adjusting the crossbars or loading items on
them.
Each individual step of the installation
instructions, the warning notices, the
general safety precautions and the
instructions for use must be followed
exactly. If the crossbars are not mounted
correctly, they and the objects attached to
them could come loose from your vehicle
and cause an accident, thereby injuring you
and other persons and/or causing damage
to property, including damage to your
vehicle.
G Warning!
Every time the crossbars are mounted,
before you set off on a journey and
periodically during longer journeys, check
all the screws on the crossbars to make
sure that they are secure, and tighten them
if necessary. Repeat these checks at
regular intervals as road-surface conditions
dictate, and at least after every 1500 miles
(2500 km) of continuous use.
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted
accessories and the objects attached to
them could come loose from the vehicle
causing an accident, thereby injuring you
and other persons and/or causing damage
to property, including damage to your
vehicle.
Do not use lubricant on the screws of the
crossbars. The screws could work loose
and the crossbars could become detached
229
Z
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Only install the crossbars at the exact
locations designated on the roof rails. The
designated locations for the front
crossbars are between the markings
engraved on the inside of the roof rails. The
designated locations for the rear crossbars
are between the gaps on the roof rails.
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted
accessories and the objects attached to
them could come loose from the vehicle
causing an accident, thereby injuring you
and other persons and/or causing damage
to property, including damage to your
vehicle.
a detrimental effect on braking, cornering
and acceleration.
Never exceed the maximum permissible
roof load or the maximum permissible
vehicle weight, even when accessories for
the crossbars (e.g. ski racks, bicycle racks,
etc.) are being used. Overloading the
vehicle could result in an accident. When
calculating the weight placed on the roof
please make sure to add the weight of the
crossbars, accessory racks and the load
carried together.
Always adapt your driving style to the road,
traffic and weather conditions, and drive
with added caution when the roof is loaded.
Always drive with extreme care when the
carrier is loaded. Take into consideration
that when the carrier is loaded, the handling
characteristics are different from those
when operating the vehicle without a
carrier loaded.
G Warning!
G Warning!
from your vehicle, together with the objects
attached to them causing an accident,
thereby injuring you and other persons
and/or causing damage to property,
including damage to your vehicle.
G Warning!
A roof load creates a greater surface area
exposed to the wind and causes the vehicle
to have a higher center of gravity, thereby
changing the vehicle’s driving
characteristics. Accordingly, the additional
weight on the roof of the vehicle can have
230
Do not use accessories which have not
been approved by Mercedes-Benz for use
in conjunction with these crossbars. If nonapproved accessories are used, these
accessories and/or the objects attached to
them could come loose from the vehicle,
thereby injuring you and other persons
and/or causing damage to property,
including damage to your vehicle.
! Have a second person assist you when
installing the crossbars. The vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
! Objects attached to the crossbar
system’s accessories must not be allowed
to restrict the movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof. The tilt/sliding sunroof could
otherwise be damaged when it is raised.
1 Key
2 Cover cap
3 Sticker FRONT (or REAR)
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
4 Screw for clamping claw
5 Clamping claw
The front and rear crossbars are of different
lengths. Please pay close attention to stickers
3 FRONT and REAR on the crossbars.
X
Unlock cover cap 2 with key 1.
X
Remove cover cap 2.
Sticker 3 indicating the location, FRONT
or REAR, becomes visible.
X
Turn screw 4 counterclockwise with the
included Allen wrench until clamping claw
5 is wide open.
a Roof rails
X
X
Make sure clamping claw 5 lies flush
against the inside of roof rail a as shown
in the illustration.
If necessary, adjust clamping width of
crossbar (Y page 232).
X
Slightly tighten screw 4 on both sides by
turning it clockwise.
X
Place rear crossbar 7 on roof rails a in
such a way that the clamping claws reach
into gaps 8 (Y page 231) on the roof rails.
X
Make sure clamping claw 5 lies flush
against the inside of roof rail a as shown
in the illustration (Y page 231).
If necessary, adjust clamping width of
crossbar (Y page 232).
X
Slightly tighten screw 4 on both sides by
turning it clockwise.
X
On the front and rear crossbars tighten
screws 4. Observe a tightening torque of
4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
Place front crossbar 6 between markings
9 on roof rails a.
i Markings 9 are located on the inside of
each roof rail, indicated by the white lines
in the illustration.
4 Screw for clamping claw
5 Clamping claw
a Roof rail
G Warning!
6 Front crossbar
7 Rear crossbar
8 Gaps
9 Markings
Have the tightening torque checked after
mounting the crossbars. The screws could
come loose if they are not tightened to a
torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
231
Z
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
X
Attach cover caps (Y page 230) and lock
them.
X
Store key and Allen wrench back into the
storage well (Y page 326).
Only install the crossbars at the designated
locations and pay attention to the stickers
3 FRONT and REAR (Y page 231).
Adjusting the clamping widths of the
crossbars
G Warning!
Only install the crossbars at the exact
locations designated on the roof rails. The
designated locations for the front
crossbars are between the markings
engraved on the inside of the roof rails. The
designated locations for the rear crossbars
are between the gaps on the roof rails.
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted
accessories and the objects attached to
them could come loose from the vehicle
causing an accident, thereby injuring you
and other persons and/or causing damage
to property, including damage to your
vehicle.
The clamping widths of the crossbars are
factory set for your vehicle. These clamping
widths are solely intended for the designated
positions.
232
X
On both sides, make sure the clamping
claws 5 lie flush against the roof rails. If
necessary, pull out or push in the clamping
claws 5.
X
Tighten screws b. Observe a tightening
torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
The width of the clamping claws is correctly
adjusted.
G Warning!
4 Screw for clamping claw
5 Clamping claw
Have the tightening torque checked after
mounting the crossbars. The screws could
come loose if they are not tightened to a
torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
X
Press cover strip c piece by piece into
groove of crossbar.
X
Install the crossbars as described
(Y page 229).
b Screws for adjusting clamping width (2 in
total for each side)
c Cover strip
X
Pull cover strip c out of groove until you
see screws b on each end of the crossbar.
X
Turn screws b on both sides
counterclockwise approximately 2
rotations.
X
Place the crossbar at designated locations
(Y page 231) on roof rails.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Removing the crossbars
Parcel nets
G Warning!
c Cover strip
1 Key
2 Cover cap
3 Sticker FRONT (or REAR)
4 Screw for clamping claw
5 Clamping claw
X
Unlock cover cap 2 with key 1.
X
Remove cover cap 2.
X
Turn screws for clamping claws 5
counterclockwise until the crossbars can
be lifted from the roof rails.
Shortening the cover strip
The cover strips reduce the wind noise
caused by the crossbars. In order to install
add-on roof equipment, it may be necessary
to shorten the cover strips.
X
Pull cover strip c out of groove.
X
Attach add-on roof equipment to the
crossbars.
X
Place cover strip c flush against the addon roof equipment, and mark the end of
crossbar on cover strip.
X
Cut off cover strip c at marked location.
X
Press cover strip c piece by piece into
groove of the crossbar.
i Cover strips are available as MercedesBenz accessories. Contact your MercedesBenz Center.
USA only:
Do not place objects with a combined
weight of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the
parcel net on the back of the front
passenger seat. Otherwise, the Occupant
Classification System OCS may not be able
to properly approximate the occupant
weight category.
G Warning!
The parcel net is intended for storing lightweight items only, such as road maps, mail,
etc.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in
the parcel net. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
be thrown around inside the vehicle and
cause injury to vehicle occupants.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
Parcel nets are located in the front passenger
footwell and on each of the front seat
backrests.
Z
233
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
For Information on how to fold the third-row
seats, see “Expanding cargo
volume” (Y page 235).
Cargo tie-down rings
Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo tiedown rings.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
on all rings with rope of sufficient strength to
hold down the cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(Y page 227).
Second-row footwell
1 Cargo tie-down ring
The maximum permissible weight per cargo
tie-down ring is 331 lb (150 kg).
Third-row seat backrest
1 Cargo tie-down ring
Hooks
Cargo compartment
1 Cargo tie-down ring
234
Two hooks are located on the rear
compartment trim panels, one on each side.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
In an accident, during hard braking or
sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
thrown around inside the vehicle, and can
cause injury to vehicle occupants unless
the items are securely fastened in the
vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
There are several ways to fold the third-row
seats.
Two buttons are located on the right side trim
of the third-row seats.
G Warning!
1 Hook
Use the hooks to secure light-weight items
only. The maximum permissible weight per
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).
Expanding cargo volume
You can separately fold the left and right rear
seat backrests to expand the cargo volume.
G Warning!
When expanding the cargo volume, always
fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so
equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in
the upright position.
Never drive the vehicle with the tailgate
open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
! When the second-row seats are folded
forward, the front seats may not be moved
to the rearmost position. Otherwise you
could damage the front and second-row
seats.
Expanding cargo volume in part
Folding third-row seats, electrically
Example, button for the left third-row seats
1 Button for returning third-row seats to
upright position
2 Button for folding the third-row seats
i It is only possible to fold the third-row
seats down when the rear right door is
open.
i Use the left button, indicated by L, to fold
down the left third-row seat.
Use the right button, indicated by R, to fold
down the right third-row seat.
Z
235
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Two buttons are located on the passengerside in the cargo compartment.
Example, button for the right third-row seats
1 Button for returning third-row seats to
upright position
2 Button for folding the third-row seats
i It is only possible to fold the third-row
seats down when the tailgate is open.
X
Push in the head restraints of the third-row
seats all the way (Y page 104).
X
Remove cargo compartment cover blind
(Y page 239).
X
Press and hold button 2 for each side until
the third-row seats are fully folded.
236
If a third-row seat is not engaged properly, for
example, the message 3rd Row Of SeatsRight Not Locked appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 148).
X Press and hold button 2 again, until the
message disappears.
Expanding cargo volume fully
floor in front of their seat. Otherwise,
occupants could slide under their seat belt
in a collision. If occupants slide under the
seat belt, it would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. Do not fold the
second-row seats and allow third-row seat
occupants to use folded second-row seats
as a table while driving. Objects placed on
folded second-row seats may come loose
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an
accident and be thrown around the vehicle
interior. Objects thrown around the vehicle
interior may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Folding second-row seats
! When the second-row seats are folded
forward, the front seats may not be moved
to the rearmost position. Otherwise you
could damage the front and second-row
seats.
G Warning!
Folded second-row seats are intended to
serve as a cargo volume expansion in
conjunction with folded third-row seats
only. Do not fold the second-row seats and
allow third-row seat occupants to use
folded second-row seats as a footrest while
driving. Third-row seat occupants must, like
all vehicle occupants, keep both feet on the
X
Push in the head restraints of the secondrow seats all the way (Y page 104).
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
X
Pull and hold lever 3 in direction of arrow
at resistance point.
The seat backrest folds down.
X
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
Two buttons are located on the right side trim
of the third-row seats.
1 Strap
2 Seat cushion
X
Pull strap 1 in directon of arrow.
X
Fold seat cushion 2 forward.
Example, button for the left third-row seats
1 Button for returning third-row seats to
upright position
2 Button for folding the third-row seats
Folding third-row seats, electrically
i Use the left button, indicated by L, to fold
down the left third-row seat.
Use the right button, indicated by R, to fold
down the right third-row seat.
i It is only possible to fold the third-row
seats down when the rear right door is
open.
There are several ways to fold the third-row
seats.
3 Lever
Z
237
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Two buttons are located on the passengerside in the cargo compartment.
2 Button for folding the third-row seats
If a third-row seat is not engaged properly, for
example, the message 3rd Row Of SeatsRight Not Locked appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 148).
X Press and hold button 2 again, until the
message disappears.
X
Returning seats to their original position
Example, button for the right third-row seats
1 Button for returning third-row seats to
upright position
Push in the head restraints of the third-row
seats all the way (Y page 104).
i It is only possible to fold the third-row
seats down when the tailgate is open.
X
Remove cargo compartment cover blind
(Y page 239).
X
Press and hold button 2 for each side until
the third-row seats are fully folded.
The cargo compartment is fully extended.
238
G Warning!
Make sure all seats are properly locked in
position before driving off. Do not drive with
seats not properly locked.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
not properly locked as this can be
dangerous. The seat could move forward
and the seat backrest could fold. You could
slide under the seat belt during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. If you
slide under it, the seat belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. Never
ride in a moving vehicle with the seat not
properly locked as this can be dangerous.
The seat could move forward and the seat
backrest could fold. You could slide under
the seat belt during braking, vehicle
maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The seat backrest and seat belt provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly
upright position and the seat belt is
properly positioned on the body.
Step 1:
X
Return third-row seats to its original
position (Y page 236).
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Step 2:
3 Seat cushion
1 Seat backrest
2 Lever
X
Pull and hold lever 2 in direction of arrow
at resistance point.
X
Fold seat backrest 1 rearward until it
engages.
X
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on seat backrest 1.
X
Fold seat cushion 3 rearward until it locks
into position.
Cargo compartment cover blind
The cargo compartment cover blind can be
installed behind the third-row seats or the
second-row seats.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind
installed, do not pile luggage higher than
the lower edges of the rear side windows.
Blind installed behind third-row seats
1 Handle
2 Mount
X
Rolling out blind: Pull blind on handle 1
across the cargo compartment.
X
Guide blind into mounts 2 and release.
X
Rolling up blind: Disengage blind and
guide retraction by its handle 1.
Removing and installing blind
Before removing or installing cargo
compartment cover blind behind the thirdrow seats, fold the left or right third-row seat
forward (Y page 235). Afterwards, return the
left or right third-row seat into its original
position.
239
Z
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Before installing cargo compartment cover
blind behind the second-row seats, fold the
third-row seats forward (Y page 235).
X
Press release button 1 and guide blind
2 into mount.
X
Make sure the cargo compartment cover
blind is securely fastened.
Cargo net
G Warning!
Mount cover behind second-row seats
3 Cover
Blind installed behind second-row seats
1 Release button
2 Blind
X
Removing: Pull blind 2 to the left until it
engages.
X
Installing: Remove the mount covers in the
side trims of the third seat row when
installing roller blind 2 behind the secondrow seats.
240
X
Press on cover 3 at its upper edge as
indicated by arrow.
The cover’s lower edge flips up.
X
Remove cover 3 by pulling its lower edge
out of the side trim.
i To avoid loss of the covers, insert the
covers into the mounts currently not in use.
X
Make sure release button 1 faces up and
the roller blind handle (Y page 239) is to
the rear before inserting the roller blind.
X
Place left side of blind 2 in left mount.
X
Position right side of blind 2 over right
mount.
Make sure the cargo net is properly
engaged at top and bottom position and the
tightening belts are securely fastened.
Never use a damaged cargo net.
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
objects being thrown around in the
occupant compartment during a collision or
sudden maneuver, always use cargo net
when transporting cargo.
The cargo net cannot prevent the
movement of large, heavier objects into the
passenger compartment in an accident.
Such items must be properly secured using
the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo
compartment floor.
Passenger use of seats behind installed
cargo net is restricted because of the
footwell being taken up by the net.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Use of the cargo net is a particularly
important safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat
backrests with smaller objects. For your
safety, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
The cargo net can be installed in two
locations:
1 Holder behind B-Pillar
2 Holder behind C-Pillar
RWith
the cargo volume expanded in part
(Y page 235), use holders behind C-pillars
2 and the cargo tie-down rings behind the
third-row seat backrest (Y page 234).
X
Open the hook and loop fasteners on the
cargo net package.
X
Hang cargo net bar 2 on holder 1 as
indicated by the arrow.
X
Roll out the cargo net.
X
X
Unfold the cargo net.
Push cargo net bar 2 forward into holder
1 in direction of arrow.
X
Engage the lower cargo net bar.
The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
X
Engage cargo net bar 3.
The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
Installing the cargo net
Pulling the cargo net tight
Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar
1 Holder
Belt hook attached behind the third-row seat
backrest
1 Belt hook
2 Cargo net bar
3 Cargo net bar
2 Cargo tie-down ring
3 Tightening belt
RWith
the cargo volume fully expanded
(Y page 236), use holders behind B-pillars
1 and the cargo tie-down rings in the
second-row footwell (Y page 234).
Z
241
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
X
Hook belt hook 1 into cargo tie-down ring
2 in direction of arrow.
X
Loosen the tightening belt by pulling buckle
1 upward in direction of arrow.
X
Pull tightening belt 3 by the loose end in
direction of arrow until the cargo net is
pulled tight.
X
Remove belt hook 2 from cargo tie-down
ring 3.
X
After driving a short distance, make sure
the cargo net is still tight and, if necessary,
pull it tight again.
Removing and storing the cargo net
Loosening the cargo net
X
Take cargo net bar 2 out of holder 1
(Y page 241).
X
Press the red button on the upper and lower
cargo net bar.
X
Fold the cargo net.
X
Roll up the cargo net.
X
Close the hook and loop fasteners on the
cargo net package.
Storage compartments
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise
care when storing objects in the vehicle.
Put luggage or cargo in the cargo
compartment if possible. Do not pile
luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backrests.
If so equipped, always use the cargo net
when transporting cargo. The cargo net
cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will
help to prevent stored objects from being
thrown about and injuring vehicle
occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle
Belt hook attached behind the third-row seat
backrest
1 Buckle
2 Belt hook
3 Cargo tie-down ring
242
Ran
maneuvers
accident
Glove box
Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
socket or a media interface are located in the
glove box. For information on Audio AUX
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
mode or on media interface, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
$ Unlocking glove box
% Locking glove box
1 Glove box lid release
2 Glove box lid
X
Opening: Pull glove box lid release 1.
X
Closing: Push glove box lid 2 up until it
engages.
Storage compartment in front center
console
In vehicles with enhanced off-road package,
the upper storage compartment contains a
control panel (Y page 144) or (Y page 189).
X Briefly press the front of the cover.
The cover opens automatically.
Depending on vehicle equipment, your
vehicle may not be equipped with both
storage compartments.
Locking and unlocking the glove box
separately
You can lock the glove box separately, e.g.
when the vehicle is in the shop for service.
The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
with the mechanical key.
Z
243
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Front armrest storage compartment
1 Button to open storage compartment
i The Roadside Assistance button p
(Y page 253) and the Information button
¡ (Y page 254) are located in the
storage compartment.
2 Storage compartment
3 Coin holder
1 Storage compartment
2 Storage compartment cover
X
3 Release button
4 Storage compartment
Opening storage compartment: Pull
button 1 and lift up armrest.
Coin holders 3 are located in front of
storage compartment 2.
Rear storage compartments
Depending on vehicle equipment, your
vehicle may not be equipped with three
storage compartments in the front of the rear
seats.
244
X
Briefly press release button 3 on storage
compartment cover 2.
The storage compartment opens
automatically.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Cup holder in front center console
Cup holders
A cup holder and a card/ticket holder are
located in the front center console.
G Warning!
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle
equipment, only use containers that fit into
the cup holder. Use lids on open containers
and do not fill containers to a height where
the contents, especially hot liquids, could
spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or
in an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle
occupants may cause serious personal
injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment
may cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause
injury to you or others when contacted
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle
interior may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Cup holder in rear armrest
1 Cup holder
1 Cup holder
2 Bridge with card, ticket holder
The front cup holder can be removed for
cleaning purposes.
X Removing: Hold cup holder at its bridge
2 and pull out bridge in direction of arrow.
X
Pull cup holder 1 out in direction of arrow.
X
Reinstalling: First, insert cup holder 1
and then insert bridge 2.
X
Pull the armrest down by its top.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
Cup holder in third-row side trim
Cup holder are located in the side trims of the
third-row seats.
Z
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
Glare through a door window
1 Cup holder
Sun visors
G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
1 Sun visor
2 Additional sun visor
3 Vanity mirror lamp
4 Vanity mirror cover
5 Vanity mirror
6 Holder, e.g. for gas cards
X
Close vanity mirror cover 4 if opened.
X
Disengage sun visor 1 from mounting
7.
X
Pivot sun visor 1 to the side.
X
Adjust sun visor 1 by pushing or pulling in
direction of arrows.
X
Flip down additional sun visor 2 when you
experience additional glare through the
windshield.
7 Mounting
Glare through the windshield
X
246
1 Sun visor
2 Additional sun visor
Flip sun visor 1 down when you
experience glare.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Vanity mirror
Ashtrays
The mirror lamp only functions when the sun
visor is engaged in mounting.
X
Flip sun visor 1 down.
X
Lift up vanity mirror cover 4.
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on.
Center console ashtray
G Warning!
Remove front ashtray insert only with
vehicle standing still.
Rear panorama roof sunshade
The rear panorama roof sunshade over the
third-row seats prevents the sun from shining
directly into the vehicle.
You can open and close the sunshade by
hand.
! Always guide the sunshade. Do not let it
snap back abruptly, as it could be
damaged.
1 Mounting
2 Clip
3 Handle
4 Button
X
Extending: Grasp on handle 3 and insert
clips 2 into mounting 1.
The third-row sunshade engages.
X
Retracting: Press on button 4 to
disengage the third-row sunshade from
mounting 1.
1 Ashtray insert
2 Cover
X
Opening: Briefly press cover 2.
X
Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert 1 on the sides and pull it out
upwards.
Z
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
X
Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install
ashtray insert 1.
X
Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install
ashtray insert 1.
X
Open the ashtray (Y page 247).
Closing: Push cover 2.
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Closing: Push cover 2.
X
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out
automatically when hot.
X
Take out cigarette lighter 1.
X
Reinsert cigarette lighter 1 in its socket
after use.
Rear center console ashtray
! Close the ashtray when not in use and
before folding the second-row seats.
Otherwise you could damage the ashtray.
Cigarette lighter
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 68.
G Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides
of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold
the knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you
do not injure themselves or start a fire with
the hot cigarette lighter.
1 Ashtray insert
2 Cover
X
Opening: Briefly press cover 2.
X
Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert 1 on the sides and pull it out
upwards.
accommodate 12V DC electrical
accessories (up to a maximum of 180 W)
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind,
however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive
connecting and disconnecting, or using
plugs that do not fit properly) can damage
the lighter socket. With the socket
damaged, the lighter may not function
properly any longer.
! The cigarette lighter is not designed for
use with the electric air pump. Use the
power outlet in the second-row footwell for
electric air pump operation.
1 Cigarette lighter
248
! The lighter socket can be used to
Controls in detail
Useful features
i If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter
is being used extensively, the vehicle
battery may become discharged.
Power outlets
(e.g. mobile phone chargers, auxiliary lamps)
up to a maximum of 20 A (240 W).
If the engine is off and the power outlets are
being used extensively, the vehicle battery
may become discharged.
i You can use the power outlets even if the
ignition is switched off.
An emergency shut-off feature is designed
to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
from dropping below a minimum level. If
the on-board voltage drops to this
minimum level, the power outlets are
automatically switched off, to help
preserve engine starting power.
Power outlet in cargo compartment
115V AC Socket
G Warning!
Power outlet in front passenger footwell
12V Power outlets
! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle,
make sure that the maximum current
drawn does not exceed 55 A.
! The power outlets in the passenger
footwell and cargo compartment are not
designed for use with the electric air pump.
Use the power outlet in the second-row
footwell for electric air pump operation.
The power outlets can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
The 115V AC socket operates at high
voltage. Use the 115V AC socket in the
vehicle with the same caution and
prudence that you exercise when using
power outlets at home. Keep any fluids
away from the 115V AC socket. Do not
clean the socket with fluids or tapered
objects. Keep the 115V AC socket cover in
the closed position, when not in use.
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric
shock and be seriously or even fatally
injured.
Z
Power outlet in second-row footwell
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
G Warning!
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is within
the permissible voltage range.
A device that you connect must have a
suitable plug that complies with U.S.
standards. Never pull on the cable to
unplug a plug from the 115V AC socket. Do
not use a damaged connection cable. The
115V AC socket may not be connected to
another 115V AC power source. This could
cause serious personal injury to you and/
or others.
G Warning!
If the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn
out of the trim, do not use or touch the
115V AC socket. Using a 115V AC socket
that is damaged or torn out of the trim could
cause serios personal injury to you and/or
others.
RThe
specified wattage of the small device
is identical or lower than the maximum
permissible wattage (150 W) of the 115V
AC socket.
1 115V AC socket
2 LED
3 Cover
The 115V AC socket provides an alternating
current of 115 volts, which enables you to
connect small electrical devices with a
combined received power of 150 W at most.
You can connect small devices such as game
consoles, mobile phone chargers, laptops,
etc.
Prerequisites for operation:
RThe
12V DC sockets in the rear passenger
compartment and cargo compartment are
operational.
RThe
plug of the small device must be
inserted fully into the 115V AC socket.
250
X
Operation: Open cover 3.
X
Insert the plug of the small device into
115V AC socket 1.
LED 2 comes on.
If LED 2 does not come on, refer to the
section on possible nonoperation causes.
X Switching off: Pull the plug out of 115V AC
socket 1.
Do not pull on the cable.
X
Close cover 3.
Possible nonoperation causes:
RThe
on-board voltage of the vehicle is not
within the permissible voltage range.
X Start the engine.
RThe
temperature of the DC/AC inverter is
temporarily too high.
Controls in detail
Useful features
X
Pull the plug of the small device out of
the 115V AC socket and plug it in again
after waiting a few minutes.
RSome
small devices have a continuous
power rating of less than 150 W but a very
high switch-on current. Such devices will
not operate. When connecting such a
device, the socket will not provide power.
If LED 2 still does not come on, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
“Owner’s Online” at mbusa.com (USA only).
The “My Tele Aid” section will give you access
to account information, remote door unlock
and more.
The Tele Aid system is available if
Rit
has been activated and is operational.
Activation requires a subscription for
monitoring services, connection and
cellular air time.
Rvehicle
battery power is available
Rthe
Tele Aid
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and
operational, please press the ¡ button
to perform the acquaintance call. Failure to
complete either of these steps may result
in a system that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Response Center
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the
information on to the Response Center.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network and
pass the information on to the Response
Center.
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
of response:
RAutomatic
RRoadside
and manual emergency
Assistance
RInformation
The Tele Aid system is operational providing
that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly
connected, not damaged, and cellular and
GPS coverage is available. The Tele Aid
system utilizes the cellular network for
communication and the GPS (Global
Positioning System) satellites for vehicle
location. If either of these signals are
unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not
function and if this occurs, assistance must
be summoned by other means.
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele
Aid call do the following:
X
Press button æ or ç on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Use the adjustment button on your
COMAND system.
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password in the mail. You may use this
password to access the Tele Aid section in
Z
251
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-test
The system performs a self-test after you
have switched on the ignition.
G Warning!
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button p and/
or in the Information button ¡ do not
come on during the system self-test, or if
any of these indicators remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or the message Tele
Aid Inoperative is displayed in the
multifunction display after the system selftest, a malfunction in the system has been
detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. In case of an emergency, help
will have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as
soon as possible.
Emergency calls
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
252
To ensure your system is activated and
operational, please press the ¡ button
to perform the acquaintance call. Failure to
complete either of these steps may result
in a system that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Response Center
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
An emergency call is initiated automatically
following an accident in which the Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
flash. The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display and the
COMAND system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message Call
Connected appears in the multifunction
display.
All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location
system), vehicle model, identification number
and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle will
be established automatically soon after the
emergency call has been initiated. The
Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the emergency
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
ambulance will be sent to the vehicle
immediately.
G Warning!
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
relevant cellular phone network is not
available).
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
i The “911” emergency call system is a
public service. Using it without due cause
is a criminal offense.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
please do not wait for voice contact after
you have pressed the emergency button.
Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a
safe location. The Response Center will
automatically contact local emergency
officials with the vehicle’s approximate
location if they receive an automatic SOS
signal and cannot make voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button
1 Cover
2 SOS button
X
Briefly press on cover 1 to open.
X
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will
flash until the emergency call is concluded.
X
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
X
Close cover 1 after the emergency call is
concluded.
G Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in
the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location),
X
Open the storage compartment
(Y page 244).
X
Press and hold button p for longer than
2 seconds.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The
button p will flash while the call is in
progress. The message Connecting
Call will appear in the multifunction
display and the COMAND system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular and
GPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAV
button on the COMAND system. Spoken
commands are not available.
1 Roadside Assistance button p
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established.
X Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
253
Z
Controls in detail
Useful features
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for
more information.
The following is only available in the USA:
Sign and Drive services: Services such as a
jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the
replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle
spare tire are obtainable at no charge.
Information button
X
Open the storage compartment
(Y page 244).
i If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button p is flashing
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g.
the relevant cellular phone network is not
available). The message Call Failed
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Terminating calls: Press button t on
the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system.
254
1 Information button ¡
X
Press and hold button ¡ for longer than
2 seconds.
A call to the Customer Assistance Center
will be initiated. The button ¡ will flash
while the call is in progress. The message
Connecting Call will appear in the
multifunction display and the COMAND
system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular and
GPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAV
button on the COMAND system. Spoken
commands are not available.
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established.
Information regarding the operation of your
vehicle, the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.
i If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously and
there was no voice connection to the
Response Center established, then the Tele
Aid system could not initiate an Information
call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone
network is not available). The message
Call Failed appears in the multifunction
display.
Controls in detail
Useful features
X
Terminating calls: Press button t on
the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system.
Call priority
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active,
an emergency call is still possible. In this
case, the emergency call will take priority and
override all other active calls.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
calls can only be terminated by a Response
Center or Customer Assistance Center
representative. All other calls can be
terminated by pressing button t on the
multifunction steering wheel or the
respective button for ending a telephone call
on the COMAND system.
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the COMAND system audio is muted. The
mobile phone is no longer connected to the
COMAND system. If you must use this
phone, we recommend that you use it only
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe
location.
Destination Download to the COMAND
system
i The components and operating principles
of the COMAND system can be found in the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
Destination Download allows you access to a
database of over 10 million points of interest
(POIs) that can be downloaded to your
vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded,
or can be provided with points of interests
near your location.
The Response Center can transmit
destination data to the COMAND system
during the connection with the Roadside
Assistance or Customer Assistance Center.
The transmitted data can contain address
details for a Mercedes-Benz Center or POIs.
Route guidance
You will be prompted to confirm that route
guidance to the entered address is to be
started.
X
Select Yes using button ( or & on
the COMAND system.
X
Press button C on the COMAND system
to confirm.
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance to the
defined address.
i If you select No, you can save the address
to your address book.
i The Destination Download feature is
available if the relevant mobile phone
network is available and data connection is
possible.
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle
unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
Z
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
X
Contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password.
X
Then return to your vehicle at the time
arranged with the Response Center and
pull the tailgate recessed handle
(Y page 90) for a minimum of 20 seconds
until the SOS button is flashing.
The message Connecting Call appears in
the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password
(USA only).
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i The remote door unlock feature is
available if the relevant cellular phone
network is available.
The SOS button will flash and the message
Call Connected will appear in the
multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response
Center specialist will attempt to establish
voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by the
Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the tailgate
recessed handle again.
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
X
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X
Pass this number on to the Response
Center along with your password.
The Response Center will then attempt to
covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid
system. Once the vehicle is located, the
Response Center will contact the local law
enforcement and you. The vehicle’s
location will only be provided to law
enforcement.
i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the Tele
256
Aid system provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated, and
that necessary cellular service and GPS
coverage are available. See “Anti-theft
alarm system” (Y page 81).
Garage door opener
The integrated remote control can operate up
to three separately controlled devices
compatible with HomeLink® or some other
systems.
G Warning!
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage. When
programming a garage door opener, the
door moves up or down. When
programming a gate operator, the gate
opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as
required by U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Controls in detail
Useful features
A garage door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide
(CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
control
1
Indicator lamp
234 Signal transmitter button
5
Hand-held remote control (not part
of vehicle equipment)
6
from the signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4) to be programmed, while keeping
indicator lamp 1 in view.
Hand-held remote control button
Programming the integrated remote
control
X
Step 1: Switch on the ignition.
X
Step 2: If you have previously programmed
a signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to step 3.
X
or
X
X
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press and
hold the two outer signal transmitter
buttons 2 and 4 and release them when
indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after
approximately 20 seconds.
Do not hold the button for longer than
30 seconds.
This procedure erases any previous
settings for all three channels and
initializes the memory. If you later wish to
program a second and/or third hand-held
transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
and begin directly with step 3.
Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control button 6
and the desired signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp will
start flashing after 20 seconds.
X
Step 5: After indicator lamp 1 changes
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
button and the signal transmitter button.
X
Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe indicator lamp 1.
If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the respective signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed
and released.
257
Z
Controls in detail
Useful features
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for
approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
a constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped with
the “rolling code” feature.
X
Step 7: To program the remaining two
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling
code devices) with the rolling code feature,
follow these instructions after completing the
“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of
this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and
easier.)
X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
i Exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the “training”
button may also be referred to as “learn”or
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
the transmitting button, refer to the garage
door opener Operator’s Manual.
258
X
Step 9: Press the “training” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following two steps.
X
Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the
programmed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).
X
Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and
release same signal transmitter button a
second time to complete the training
process.
i Some garage door openers (or other
rolling code equipped devices) may require
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and
release the same signal transmitter button
a third time to complete the training
process.
X
Step 12: Confirm the garage door
operation by pressing the programmed
signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
X
Step 13: To program the remaining two
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission which
may not be long enough for the integrated
signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4 with
the following:
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release this button until it has been
successfully trained.
X
While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle”
your hand-held remote control button 6
as follows: Press and hold button 6 for
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
Controls in detail
Useful features
remote control until the frequency signal
has been learned.
Upon successful training, indicator lamp
1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after
several seconds.
X
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the button.
Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after
20 seconds.
X
X
Without releasing the signal transmitter
button, proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
Simultaneously press and hold outer signal
transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator
lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for
longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are erased.
i Upon completion of programming the
integrated remote control, make sure you
retain the hand-held remote control that
came with the garage door opener, gate
operator or other device. You may need it
for use in other vehicles, for future
programming of an integrated remote
control, or simply for continued use as a
hand-held remote control to operate the
respective device in other situations.
Reprogramming a single signal
transmitter button
To program a device using a signal
transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
Operation of integrated remote control
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled
device.
The integrated remote control transmitter
continues to send the signal as long as the
button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of
all three channels.
Programming tips
If you are having difficulty programming the
integrated remote control, here are some
helpful tips:
RCheck
the frequency of hand-held remote
control 5 (typically located on the reverse
side of the remote). The integrated remote
control is compatible with radio-frequency
devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
RPut
a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likelihood
of the hand-held remote control sending a
faster and more accurate signal to the
integrated remote control.
RWhile
performing step 3, hold hand-held
remote control 5 at different lengths and
angles from the signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) you are programming.
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
259
Z
Controls in detail
Useful features
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
angle at varying distances.
RIf
another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that other
hand-held remote control. Make sure new
batteries are in the hand-held remote
control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten
the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This may
help improve transmitting and/or receiving
signals.
i Certain types of garage door openers are
incompatible with the integrated remote
control. If you should experience further
difficulties with programming the
integrated remote control, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
260
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Compass
X
Calling up the compass: Press button
è or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel repeatedly until the off-road menu
appears in the multifunction display.
The compass displays the direction into
which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely
fastened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
Controls in detail
Useful features
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal
movement.
Seat cover under third-row seats
If something falls under the third-row seats,
you can remove the seat cover in order to
reach under the seats.
X
Press the seat cover down until it engages.
X
Make sure the seat cover is engaged
properly by folding the seat all the way in
and out.
i To install or remove the floormat more
easily, move the driver’s seat or front
passenger seat as far to the rear as
possible.
Example passenger side
1 Retainer pin
2 Eyelet
X
Removing: Fold the respective seat
halfway in or out (Y page 235).
X
Reach into the recess in the seat cover.
X
Pull the seat cover in direction of arrow.
X
Remove the seat cover to reach under the
seats.
X
Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer pins
1.
X
Installing: Fold the seat halfway in or out
(Y page 235).
X
Installing: Press floormat eyelets 2 onto
retainer pins 1.
X
Put the seat cover back into place using the
guide pins.
Z
261
262
Operation
Vehicle equipment ............................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .......
At the gas station .............................
Engine compartment ........................
Tires and wheels ...............................
Winter driving ...................................
Driving instructions ..........................
Maintenance ......................................
Vehicle care .......................................
264
264
265
267
272
297
299
315
318
263
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied
you will be with its performance later on.
RDrive your vehicle during the first
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
RDuring
this period, avoid heavy loads (full
throttle driving) and excessive engine
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm
in each gear).
RAvoid
accelerating by kickdown.
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by
shifting to a lower gear using the gear
selector lever.
gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 139)
only when driving at moderate speeds (for
hill driving).
RSelect
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
All of the above instructions, as may apply to
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine,
the transfer case, the center differential or
the rear differential has been replaced.
264
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling
G Warning!
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly
flammable and poisonous. They burn
violently and can cause serious injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or
clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking
materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
G Warning!
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause
a gas discharge. This could cause the gas
to spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
G Warning!
Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
fuel system and engine could be damaged.
In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
! Never use diesel fuel in vehicles with
gasoline engine. Never refuel vehicles with
gasoline engine with diesel fuel. Even small
amounts of incorrect fuel will damage the
fuel system and engine. Damage resulting
from the use of non-approved fuels or fuel
additives or resulting from mixing gasoline
with diesel fuel or vice versa is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! If you have accidentally filled the tank
with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
drained completely. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
system drained completely.
! Gasoline engine:
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to
overheat and potentially start a fire.
! Diesel engine:
When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel
containers, place a filling filter, a suede
cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter.
Otherwise, particles from the fuel container
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel
injection system.
! Diesel engine:
The engine is more susceptible to wear and
damage if you use
Rmarine
diesel fuel
Rheating
oil
Radditives
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be
seriously damaged if you use any other
diesel fuel than ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR
MAXIMUM).
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
special additives is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
265
Z
Operation
At the gas station
i Gasoline engine:
Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
contact gas station personnel in case
labels on the pump cannot be found.
For more information on gasoline, see
“Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
engine)” (Y page 435), see “Fuel
requirements” (Y page 436), or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i Diesel engine:
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle towards the rear.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks the
fuel filler flap.
266
filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the
malfunction indicator lamp ? (USA
only) or ± (Canada only) to illuminate.
For more information, see also “Practical
hints” (Y page 379).
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door (this
puts the starter switch in position 0, same
as with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then can
be closed again.
X
Opening: Press fuel filler flap 1 at the
point indicated by the arrow.
X
Turn fuel filler cap 2 counterclockwise.
X
Take off fuel filler cap 2.
i In case that the central locking system
does not release the fuel filler flap, see
“Fuel filler flap” (Y page 385).
i Diesel engine:
Only use commercially available vehicular
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL
(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). Information
on diesel quality can normally be found on
the fuel pump. Please contact gas station
personnel in case labels on the pump
cannot be found.
For more information on diesel fuels, see
“Fuel requirements” (Y page 436), or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center, or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
If you have driven the vehicle until the tank
is empty, the fuel system needs to be bled
(Y page 404).
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
damage the vehicle paint finish.
1 Fuel filler flap
2 Fuel filler cap
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Set fuel filler cap 2 on fuel filler flap 1.
X
Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
X
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
Operation
Engine compartment
X
Closing: Turn fuel filler cap 2 clockwise
until it audibly engages.
i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap
before locking your vehicle as the flap
locking pin prevents closing after you have
locked the vehicle.
X
Close fuel filler flap 1.
Low outside temperatures (diesel
engine)
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.
The fuel system and engine will otherwise
be damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is offered
in the winter months. Check with your fuel
retailer.
Check regularly and before a long trip
For information on quantities and
requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 432).
Check the following:
REngine
RTire
oil level (Y page 269)
inflation pressure (Y page 281)
RCoolant
level (Y page 271)
RVehicle
lighting (Y page 388)
RWasher
system and headlamp cleaning
system (Y page 271)
RBrake
fluid
Engine compartment
Hood
G Warning!
Do not pull the release lever while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood
could be forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others.
Opening
G Warning!
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant
temperature display indicates that the
engine is overheated, do not open the hood.
Move away from vehicle and do not open
the hood until the engine has cooled. If
necessary, call the fire department.
G Warning!
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot.
To prevent burns, let the engine cool off
completely before touching any
267
Z
Operation
Engine compartment
components on the vehicle. Comply with all
relevant safety precautions.
G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear
of moving parts when the hood is open and
the engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Rwith
the engine running
Rwhile
starting the engine
Rwhen
the ignition is switched on
2 Handle for opening the hood
the engine running
Rwhile
starting the engine
the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually
Rwhen
1 Hood lock release lever
X
268
or hood, never open the hood if the wiper
arms are folded forward away from the
windshield.
Vehicles with diesel engine:
The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
electronic control unit for the injection
system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components of the
injection system (injectors, electrical
wires)
Vehicles with gasoline engine:
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high
voltage it is dangerous to touch any
components (ignition coils, spark plug
sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition
system
Rwith
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers
Pull release lever 1.
The hood is unlocked.
X
Press and hold handle 2.
The hood is unlocked.
X
Pull up on the hood in direction of arrow
and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held open at
shoulder height by gas-filled struts.
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing
G Warning!
When closing the hood, use extreme
caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be
careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
before driving off. Do not continue driving
if the hood can no longer engage after an
accident, for example. The hood could
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is
in motion and injure you and/or others.
X
Let the hood drop from a height of
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
X
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above
the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with
somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Checking engine oil level
X
Open the hood (Y page 267).
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For further information contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Notes on checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level the vehicle must
be parked on level ground and the vehicle
must have been stationary for at least
5 minutes with the engine turned off.
Example illustration GL 450 (GL 320 BlueTEC,
GL 550 similar)
1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper (max) mark
3 Lower (min) mark
X
Pull out oil dipstick 1.
X
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
Z
269
Operation
Engine compartment
X
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick
guide tube.
X
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower (min) mark 3 and upper (max) mark
2 of oil dipstick 1.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by the
Maintenance System will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
X
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 432) and
(Y page 434).
If necessary, add engine oil.
Transmission fluid level
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants
etc.” (Y page 432).
For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 361).
Adding engine oil
! Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles with
Maintenance System. For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
270
The transmission fluid level does not need to
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission.
Example illustration GL 450 (GL 320 BlueTEC,
GL 550 similar)
1 Filler cap
X
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
X
Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
to overfill with oil.
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the
coolant temperature must be below 158‡
(70†).
not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
glycol which may burn if it comes into
contact with hot engine parts.
RUse
extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature indicator
indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
X
Add coolant as required.
X
Replace and tighten cap 2.
Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system
G Warning!
RDo
a rag, slowly open the cap
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure. If opened immediately,
cold coolant: reaches marking bar
1 in expansion tank 3
For more information on coolant, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 438) and
(Y page 433).
In order to avoid any potentially serious
burns:
RUsing
Rfor
RDo
G Warning!
not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is above
158‡ (70†). Allow engine to cool down
before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
The coolant level is correct if the level
scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown
out under pressure.
1 Marking bar in the expansion tank
2 Cap
3 Coolant expansion tank
X
X
Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly
approximately 1/2 counterclockwise to
release any excess pressure.
Continue turning cap 2 counterclockwise
and remove it.
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could result
in damage to the washer system/fluid
reservoir.
271
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
X
Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
of cap 1 upwards.
X
Refill the washer fluid reservoir with MB
Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB
SummerFit” and water (or commercially
available premixed washer solvent/
antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures) (Y page 440).
X
Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press cap
1 onto filler hole until it engages.
! Do not use distilled or de-ionized water in
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
For more information, see “Washer system
and headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 434).
1 Cap for washer fluid reservoir
Fluid for the washer system, rear window
washer system and the headlamp cleaning
system is supplied from the washer fluid
reservoir.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the washer fluid in a suitable
container.
272
Tires and wheels
Safety notes
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommended
rims and tires for summer and winter
operation. They can also offer advice
concerning tire service and purchase.
G Warning!
Replace rims or tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part. For further
information contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. If incorrectly sized
rims and tires are mounted, the wheel
brakes or suspension components can be
damaged. Also, the correct operating
clearance of the wheels and the tires may
no longer be correct.
G Warning!
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth,
or if the tires have sustained damage,
replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for
the particular rim type. Failure to do so can
Operation
Tires and wheels
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. The operating
safety of the vehicle cannot be assured
when such tires are used.
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that
possible damage to your vehicle has
occurred, you should turn on the hazard
warning flashers, carefully slow down, and
drive with caution to an area which is a safe
distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or tire dealer for repairs.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Important guidelines
ROnly
use sets of tires and rims of the same
type and make.
RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
RBreak
in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
RRegularly
check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
inflation pressure loss and damage to the
tire beads.
RIf
vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as required.
RDo
not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
than 1/8 in (3 mm).
RWhen
replacing individual tires, you should
mount new tires on the front wheels first
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
around).
Tire care and maintenance
G Warning!
Regularly check the tires for damage.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth,
or if the tires have sustained damage,
replace them.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every
other week. For more information on
checking tire inflation pressure, see
“Recommended tire inflation
pressure” (Y page 279).
Tire inspection
Every time you check the tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your tires
for the following:
Rexcessive
treadwear (Y page 274)
Rcord
or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubber
Rbumps,
bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
tread or side of the tire
273
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
tires will age and become worn over time even
if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced
after 6 years, regardless of the remaining
tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
RDriving
RTire
style
inflation pressure
RDistance
driven
Tread depth
G Warning!
Although the applicable federal motor
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
274
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
(3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six places
on the tread circumference and become
visible at a tread depth of approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
considered worn and should be replaced.
The recommended minimum tire tread depth
for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
recommended minimum tire tread depth for
winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Storing tires
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
such as better hydroplaning performance. To
benefit, however, you must make sure the
tires rotate in the direction specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
replaced. Always observe and follow
applicable temporary use restrictions and
speed limitations indicated on the spare
wheel.
Loading the vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
can be found on the driver’s door
B-pillar. This placard tells you important
information about the number of people
that can be in the vehicle and the total
weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
It also contains information on the proper
size and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment tires
on your vehicle.
(2) The certification label, also found on the
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo. The certification label also tells
you about the front and rear axle weight
capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work with
the information contained on the Tire and
Loading Information placard with regards to
loading your vehicle.
Z
275
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information
Seating capacity
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Tire and Loading Information placard
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
276
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants that
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear
seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing the seating
capacity is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 275).
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
The Tire and Loading Information placard
showing the load limit information is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 275).
X Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if
applicable) should never exceed the weight
referenced in that statement.
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity
data are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
X
Step 1: Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard.
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 279).
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
1 Seating capacity information on the Tire
and Loading Information placard
Steps for determining correct load limit
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. The following
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 276).
Z
277
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example
Combined weight
limit of occupants
and cargo from Tire
and Loading
Information
placard
Number of
occupants
(driver and
passengers)
Seating
Occupants weight
configuration
Combined
weight of all
occupants
Available cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight
(total load limit from Tire
and Loading Information
placard minus combined
weight of all occupants)
1
1 500 lbs
5
front: 2
rear: 3
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
750 lbs
1 500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
2
1 500 lbs
3
front: 1
rear: 2
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
540 lbs
1 500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
3
1 500 lbs
1
front: 1
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
150 lbs
1 500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1 350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (Y page 279).
278
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(Y page 279) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
(Y page 421).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load must never
exceed the GVWR.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total
allowable weight that can be carried by a
single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible weight limits
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
have the loaded vehicle (including driver,
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the load
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
load typically is between 8% and 15% of the
trailer weight and everything loaded in it.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to fail from
being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 275).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
tires. The tires can be considered cold if the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
the best handling, tread life and riding
comfort.
In addition to the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
pressure label (if available) on the inside of
the filler flap for any additional information
pertaining to special driving situations. For
more information, see “Important notes on
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 280).
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Tire data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the following illustration.
Refer to Tire and Loading Information
placard on vehicle for actual data specific
to your vehicle.
279
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
leaking from the valves or from around the
rim.
1 Tire and Loading Information placard with
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
G Warning!
If the tire inflation pressure drops
repeatedly, check the tires for punctures
from foreign objects and/or whether air is
280
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap (if available) on how to
adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you
do not adjust the tire inflation pressure,
excessive heat can build up and result in
sudden tire failure.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire
inflation pressure label on the inside of the
fuel filler flap, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for proper tire
inflation pressure.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
value for speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle
condition. If such information is provided, it
can be found on the tire inflation pressure
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 265).
Tire inflation pressure changes by
approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18‡
(10†) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from the
outside temperature.
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to fail from
being overheated.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Underinflated tires can
Rcause
excessive and uneven tire wear
Radversely
Rlead
affect fuel economy
to tire failure from being overheated
Radversely
affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can
Radversely
Rcause
affect handling characteristics
uneven tire wear
Rbe
more prone to damage from road
hazards
Radversely
Rincrease
affect ride comfort
stopping distance
Checking tire inflation pressure
Safety notes
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to fail from
being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every
other week.
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. The tires can be
considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure when
the tires are warm (the vehicle has been
driven for several miles or sitting less than
3 hours), the reading will be approximately
4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading.
This is normal. Do not let air out to match the
specified cold tire inflation pressure.
Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire
inflation pressure:
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
X
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
X
Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
gauge and check against the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 275). If
necessary, add air to achieve the
recommended tire inflation pressure.
281
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
X
If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
inflation pressure by pushing the metal
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
with the tire gauge.
X
Install the valve cap.
X
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run Flat
Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s
rotational speed. This allows the system to
detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due to
falling tire inflation pressure, you will see a
corresponding warning message in the
multifunction display.
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a
restricted manner or with a delay
Rwhen
snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
Rin
the presence of ice and snow
282
Rwhen
you are driving on a loose surface
(e.g. sand or gravel)
Rwhen
you are driving in a very sporty
manner (involving rapid acceleration or
high speeds in curves)
G Warning!
When the multifunction display shows the
message Tire Pressure Check Tires,
one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, on the
tire inflation pressure label.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked every other week when cold and
set to the recommended tire inflation
pressure as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, on the tire
inflation pressure label located on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
i The recommended tire inflation pressures
for your vehicle can be found on the Tire
and Loading Information placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 275)
or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure
label on the on the inside of the fuel filler
flap (Y page 266). The tire inflation
pressures are not listed in the Operator's
Manual.
G Warning!
The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation
pressure according to the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar or, if available, on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace
regular checks of the tire inflation
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in
more than one tire cannot be detected by
the Run Flat Indicator.
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
Operation
Tires and wheels
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
steering maneuvers.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
X
or
Restarting the Run Flat Indicator
The Run Flat Indicator must be restarted in
the following situations:
Make sure the standard display appears in
the multifunction display (Y page 152).
X
Rafter
you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
Rafter
you have replaced the wheels or tires
Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires
X
Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the tire inflation pressure label on
the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
G Warning!
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure
according to the incorrect value.
Press button k or j on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
Active
Menu: R-Button
X
Press the reset button (Y page 147).
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
X
If you wish to confirm: Press button
æ.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
Restarted
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure
values for all four tires.
X
If you wish to cancel: Press button
ç.
Wait until the message
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
disappears.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), (USA only)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It measures the
tire inflation pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and issues warnings in case of pressure loss.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
is equipped with a combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the
instrument cluster. Depending on how the
telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
pressure condition or a malfunction in the
TPMS system itself:
RIf
the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires are significantly
Z
283
Operation
Tires and wheels
underinflated. There is no malfunction in
the TPMS.
RIf
the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
itself is not operating properly.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
equipped with the proper electronic sensors.
It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as
selected by the driver, in all four tires. A
warning is issued to alert you to a decrease
in pressure in one or more of the tires.
G Warning!
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures.
Always adjust tire inflation pressure
according to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, on the
supplemental tire inflation pressure
information on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by
carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
284
G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked every other week when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available,
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the Tire and Loading Information placard or,
if available, the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
Operation
Tires and wheels
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
i If a condition causing the TPMS to
malfunction develops, it may take up to
10 minutes for the system to signal a
malfunction using the TPMS telltale
flashing and illumination sequence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few
minutes driving if the malfunction has been
corrected.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Tire inflation pressure warnings
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display and a warning signal sounds.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
to malfunction.
i This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired.
Example illustration
Restarting the TPMS
G Warning!
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the
reference values to the recommended cold
tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
affect the ability to steer or brake the
vehicle. You might lose control over the
vehicle.
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
new reference values for each tire.
The TPMS must be restarted when you have
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
level (e.g. because of different load or driving
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to
the current tire inflation pressures.
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
recommended for the vehicle operating
condition. Tire pressure should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Observe the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information for
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads less
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition.
If such information is provided, it can be
found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
X Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 275) or, if available, the
supplemental tire inflation pressure
information on the inside of the fuel filler
flap (Y page 265), make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
285
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
pressures are accepted as reference values
and then monitored.
until the standard display appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 152).
X
Press button j or k on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Active
Menu: R-Button
X
Press the reset button (Y page 147).
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
X
If you wish to confirm: Press button
æ.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Restarted
After driving a few minutes the system
verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s specified
range. Afterwards, the current tire inflation
X
If you wish to cancel: Press button
ç.
MOExtended system
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system in
conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator
(Y page 282) or the TPMS (Y page 283).
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.
When retrofitting with tires that do not have
run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires,
you should also equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For information on driving in case of pressure
loss in one or more tires (emergency mode),
see the “Practical Hints” section
(Y page 403).
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 292)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 290)
3 Maximum tire load (Y page 291)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(Y page 291)
286
Operation
Tires and wheels
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (Y page 293)
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
rating (Y page 287)
8 Load identification (Y page 289)
9 Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and
tires” (Y page 425).
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
1 Tire width
6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
General: Depending on the design standards
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall
may have no letter or a letter preceding the
tire size designation.
No letter preceding the size designation (as
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based
on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Tire width
Tire width 1 indicates the nominal tire width
in millimeters.
Aspect ratio
Aspect ratio 2 is the dimensional
relationship between tire section height and
section width and is expressed in percentage.
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing
section height by section width.
Tire code
Tire code 3 indicates the tire construction
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (Y page 288).
Rim diameter
Rim diameter 4 is the diameter of the bead
seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
Z
287
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire load rating
G Warning!
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle.
Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Tire load rating 5 is a numerical code
associated with the maximum load a tire can
support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds
to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
tire is designed to support. See also
“Maximum tire load” (Y page 291) where the
288
maximum load associated with the load index
is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
For additional information on tire load rating,
see “Load identification” (Y page 289).
Tire speed rating
G Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
serious personal injury and possible death,
for you and for others.
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
Tire speed rating 6 indicates the approved
maximum speed for the tire.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
RAt
the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
To determine the maximum speed
Operation
Tires and wheels
capability of the tire, the service
description for the tire must be referred to.
The service description is comprised of tire
load rating 5 and tire speed rating 6.
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service description is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed
capability.
If a service description is given, the speed
capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
is the service description. The letter “Y”
designates the speed rating and the speed
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
RAny
tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
in the size designation AND the service
description must be placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
speed rating in parenthesis designates the
maximum speed capability of the tire as
being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult
the tire manufacturer for the actual
maximum permissible speed of the tire.
13 or
All-season and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
Q M+S13 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S13
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S13 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S13
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
the “Technical data” section (Y page 425),
for example when purchasing new tires.
If you are uncertain about the correct reading
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to assist you.
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Load identification
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/
snowflake.marking on the tire
sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
traction performance requirements of the
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
for use in snow conditions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
may have a tire speed rating above the
maximum speed permitted by the electronic
speed limiter.
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
Z
M+S.for winter tires
289
Operation
Tires and wheels
Manufacturer’s identification mark
In addition to tire load rating, special load
identification 1 may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating the
tire speed rating 6 (Y page 287).
RNo specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
Manufacturer’s identification mark 2
denotes the tire manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four
symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 272).
RXL
or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
RLight
Load: designates a light load tire.
RC,
D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates
efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other safety
matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such
tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
290
Tire size
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
Code 3 indicates the tire size.
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
Tire type code
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Tire branding symbol 1 denotes that the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Tire type code 4 may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
the tire.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 identifies the
week and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire load
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
1 Maximum tire load rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
For more information on tire load rating, see
(Y page 288).
For information on calculating total and cargo
load capacities, see (Y page 277).
Maximum tire inflation pressure
G Warning!
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire
inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to fail from
being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 279) for proper tire
inflation.
Z
291
Operation
Tires and wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.
Government requirement designed to give
drivers consistent and reliable information
regarding tire performance. Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature
resistance. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in
North America have these grades branded on
the sidewall.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
Quality grades can be found, where
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear
Traction
Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
292
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
G Warning!
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperature is close to the freezing point.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(Y page 297) with a minimum tread depth of
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels
for the winter season to ensure normal
balanced handling characteristics. On
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire ply material
Temperature
G Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause excessive heat build-up and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of cord
and number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed
equipment (whether installed or not).
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bar.
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
Z
293
Operation
Tires and wheels
Aspect ratio
DOT (Department of Transportation)
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width expressed
in percentage.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Bar
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Another metric unit for air pressure. There are
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR for the front
and rear axle indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers,
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
tongue load). It is indicated on certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
Cold tire inflation pressure
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc.
loaded on the trailer.
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,
air conditioning and additional optional
equipment, but without passengers and
cargo.
294
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if
applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit, and production options
weight.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lb).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
The recommended tire inflation pressure for
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar and provides best
handling, tread life and riding comfort. If so
equipped, supplemental information
pertaining to special driving situations can be
found on the tire inflation pressure label on
the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchasers the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date
of manufacture”.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the speed
range for which a tire is approved.
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
295
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
Traction
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via
the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
it by two.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Rotating tires
Treadwear indicators
G Warning!
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
that show across the tread of a tire when only
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
Maximum permissible weight on trailer
tongue.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
296
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
same dimension all around, tires can be
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
pattern that will maintain the intended
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
(Y page 275).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
configuration, tires can be rotated according
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
(spinning) direction must be maintained.
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
tire” (Y page 397).
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
General information
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Winter tires
G Warning!
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are
6
no longer suitable for winter operation.
G Warning!
If you use your spare wheel when winter
tires are fitted on the other wheels, be
aware that the difference in tire
characteristics may very well impair turning
stability and that overall driving stability
may be reduced. Adapt your driving style
accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by regular
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
provide special winter performance. Make
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall.
These tires meet specific snow traction
performance requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
have been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum
effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in
winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
For information on winter tires for your
vehicle model, see the “Technical data”
section (Y page 425).
Always observe the speed rating of the winter
tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum
speed for which your tires are rated is below
the speed rating of your vehicle, you must
place a notice to this effect where it will be
seen by the driver. Such notices are available
at your tire dealer or any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System
(ADS):
When driving with snow chains, do not
select SPORT mode as this may result in
damage to your vehicle.
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
serious damage to your vehicle or tires,
make sure the use of snow chains is
permissible as specified in the “Technical
data” section of this Operator’s Manual.
Snow chains should only be driven on snowcovered roads at speeds not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
as possible when driving on roads without
snow.
Observe the following guidelines when using
snow chains:
RUse
of snow chains is not permissible with
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 425).
RUse
snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the body
297
Z
Operation
Winter driving
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
could be damaged as a result.
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized MercedesBenz Center will be glad to advise you on
this subject.
RUse
of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check local
and state laws before installing snow
chains.
RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
i When driving with snow chains, you may
wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 77)
before setting the vehicle in motion. This
will improve the vehicle’s traction.
Winter driving instructions
G Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind.
G Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that
purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may still
be icy, especially in wooded areas or on
bridges.
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
298
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of control loss.
Do not engage the transfer case in position
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow.
At speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h) vehicle
steering is adversely affected by the Offroad ABS.
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
the automatic transmission to neutral
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 297).
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce the
normal brake effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency
back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
Operation
Driving instructions
should be tested as soon as possible after
driving is resumed.
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Driving instructions
Drinking and driving
Drive sensibly – save fuel
G Warning!
To save fuel you should:
RKeep
tires at the recommended inflation
pressures.
RRemove
unnecessary loads.
RRemove
carriers when not in use.
RRemove
the crossbars when not in use.
RAllow
engine to warm up under low load
use.
RAvoid
frequent acceleration and
deceleration.
RHave
all maintenance work performed at
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
Booklet and as required by the
Maintenance system. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
short trips and in mountainous areas.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous
combinations. Even a small amount of
alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Pedals
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking
maneuvers, the objects could get caught
between the pedals. You could then no
299
Z
Operation
Driving instructions
longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
to accidents and injury.
Brakes
Downhill grades
Power assistance
G Warning!
There is no power assistance for the
steering and the service brake when the
engine is not running.
Steering and braking requires significantly
more effort and you could lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle
is in motion.
! When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
overheating of the brakes and reduces
wear.
When using the engine’s braking power, a
drive wheel may not spin for an extended
period of time, e.g. on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Continuous or hard braking
G Warning!
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their
effectiveness. It may not be possible to
stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid
an accident.
300
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
for some time, rather than immediately park,
so that the air stream will cool down the
brakes faster.
Wet roads
G Warning!
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through
water deep enough to wet brake
components, the first braking action may
be somewhat reduced and increased pedal
pressure may be necessary to obtain
expected brake effect. Maintain a safe
distance from vehicles in front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
advisable to brake the vehicle with
considerable force prior to parking. The heat
generated serves to dry the brakes.
Salt-covered roads
G Warning!
A layer of salt on the brake discs and the
brake linings may cause a delay in the
braking effect, resulting in a significantly
Operation
Driving instructions
increased braking distance, which could
lead to an accident.
To avoid this danger, you should:
Roccasionally
brake carefully when you
are driving on salt-covered roads, so that
any layer of salt that may have built up
on the brake discs and the brake linings
is removed without putting other road
users at risk
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead and drive with particular care
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
trip and immediately after commencing a
new trip, so that salt residues are
removed from the brake disc
Brake service
! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
parking brake is released. Observe
additional messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the
reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
G Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended
brake fluid is used, the braking properties
of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent
that safe braking is substantially impaired.
This could result in an accident.
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
! Because the ESP® operates
automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
longer than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If your brake system is normally only
subjected to moderate loads, you should
occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (Y page 77).
Z
301
Operation
Driving instructions
Parking brake
When driving on wet roads or dirt covered
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into
the parking brake.
To prevent corrosion and a reduction in the
braking power of the parking brake, observe
the following:
X
From time to time, lightly engage the
parking brake before driving off.
X
Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds
(100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
G Warning!
While performing this procedure please
assure that the vehicle is stopped before
applying the parking brake. Otherwise the
rear wheels could lock up. You could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an
accident. In addition, the vehicle’s brake
lights do not light up when the parking
brake is engaged. Make sure not to
endanger any other road users when you
engage the parking brake.
Driving off
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer on
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
speeds and with new tires.
X Reduce vehicle speed.
X
Avoid track grooves in the road.
X
Brakes cautiously in the rain.
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Before driving through water, determine its
depth.
If you must drive through standing water,
drive slowly to prevent water from entering
the passenger compartment or the engine
compartment. Water in these areas could
cause damage to electrical components or
wiring of the engine or transmission, or
could result in water being ingested by the
engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
i Select the raised level (Y page 186)
before driving through standing water.
302
Operation
Driving instructions
For more information, see “Driving through
water” (Y page 306).
Off-road driving
G Warning!
Do not load items on the crossbars. It may
cause instability during some maneuvers
which could result in an accident.
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
make it easier to recognize unexpected
obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
turn it around on steep inclines. If the
vehicle cannot complete the attempted
climb, back it down in reverse gear.
Do not drive along the side of a slope. The
vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing
so the vehicle begins to show a tendency
to roll, immediately steer into a line of
gravity (straight up or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you
use only the service brake. For information
on driving downhill, see “Driving downhill”.
G Warning!
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
friction property can cause exceptional
wear and tear as well as brake failure.
Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up
and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that
full braking power may not be available in
an emergency.
G Warning!
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
level, the center of gravity also rises.
Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle
level is as low as possible. With higher ride
height the ESP® may activate earlier in
certain situations.
Read this chapter carefully before you begin
off-road travel.
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle
characteristics and gear changing before you
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving.
We recommend that you start out with easy
off-road travel.
Special driving features for off-road
driving
The following driving features are available for
specific kind of operation:
ROff-road
ABS (Y page 77)
ROff-road
ESP® (Y page 80)
ROff-road
4-ETS (Y page 78)
RHill
start assist system (Y page 139)
RLOW
RANGE mode (Y page 142)
RDifferential
locks (Y page 144)
RDownhill
Speed Regulation (DSR)
(Y page 182)
ROff-road
driving program (Vehicles without
enhanced off-road package) (Y page 185)
RAir
suspension program (Y page 185)
Off-road driving rules
REngage
the off-road driving program
(Y page 185) or LOW RANGE mode
(Y page 142) before driving under off-road
conditions.
RIf
necessary, activate differential locks
(Y page 144).
303
Z
Operation
Driving instructions
RMake
sure you select a vehicle level
(Y page 186) appropriate to the
topographical conditions. Always make
sure the vehicle has enough ground
clearance.
RFasten
items being carried as securely as
possible (Y page 227).
RAlways
navigate gradients with the engine
on and with the transmission engaged in a
gear. Switch on the DSR (Y page 182) to
help maintain a preset speed.
! Observe the following during off-road
driving:
RKeep
doors, tailgate, windows, and tilt/
sliding sunroof closed whenever driving
off-road.
RAdjust
vehicle speed to condition of
terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
steeper the terrain, the lower the speed
should be. Drive through water slowly at
an even speed, avoiding a bow wave.
RBe
especially careful when driving in
unknown territory. It may be necessary
to get out of the vehicle and scout the
path you intend to take.
304
RWatch
out for obstacles, such as rocks,
holes, tree stumps and ruts.
RBefore
driving through water, determine
its depth.
RDo
not stop vehicle while immersed in
water, and do not shut off the engine.
RIn
sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
allowed by conditions. This helps
overcome the vehicle rolling resistance
and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle
sinking into the ground.
RDo
not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It
interrupts the forward momentum of the
vehicle.
RAlways drive onto slopes with the engine
running and the vehicle in gear.
RDo
not shift automatic transmission into
neutral position N.
G Warning!
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if
you do so, remember to correct the tire
inflation pressure before continuing your
trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation
pressure increases the risk of losing control
of the vehicle and rolling over.
Checklist before off-road driving
Engine oil level
RCheck the engine oil level (Y page 269).
Only with a proper oil level can the vehicle
obtain a trouble-free oil supply, even on
steep gradients.
! If the engine oil level warning lamp comes
on while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe
location or as soon at is safe to do so.
Check the engine oil level.
The engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Tires
RCheck the tread depth and maintain
specified tire inflation pressure (a placard
with the recommended tire inflation
pressures is located on the driver’s door Bpillar (Y page 276)).
RCheck
tires for possible damage and
remove foreign objects.
RReplace
missing valve caps.
Operation
Driving instructions
Rims
RDented or bent rims can cause tire inflation
pressure loss and damage the tire beads.
For this reason, check and, if necessary,
change rims before driving off-road.
Vehicle tool kit
RCheck if the vehicle jack (Y page 329) is
functional.
RIn
all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small plank
(to put under the vehicle jack on sandy soil)
with you.
Driving in steep terrain
climbing ability of the vehicle depends on
terrain conditions.
2 Overhang angle, rear
Vehicles with air
suspension program
1
2
Raised level
32°
26°
Highway
27°
21°
Vehicles with
enhanced off-road
package
1
2
Off-road-level 3
33°
27°
Off-road-level 2
32°
26°
Off-road-level 1
28°
23°
Highway
27°
21°
RComply with the warnings (Y page 303) and
rules for off-road driving (Y page 303).
RDriving on embankments, slopes and other
Slope angle
1 Overhang angle, front
steep inclines should only be done straight
up or downhill, i. e. in the line of gravity.
Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a
100% grade which is equivalent to a slope
angle of 45°. Keep in mind that the
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 139).
RDrive
slowly.
RAvoid excessive engine speeds – drive with
moderate engine speeds (max. 3 000 rpm).
RUtilize
the engine’s braking power when
descending a slope, observe the engine
speed (do not overrev the engine). Apply
the service brake as needed.
i For maximum engine speed, see
“Instrument cluster” (Y page 32) and see
“Engine” (Y page 423).
RCheck
the brakes after a lengthy
downgrade drive.
G Warning!
Never turn the vehicle around on steep
inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the
vehicle cannot complete the attempted
climb, back it down in reverse gear.
i The hill start assist system supports you
when driving uphill.
For more information, see “Hill start assist
system” (Y page 139).
305
Z
Operation
Driving instructions
Traction in steep terrain
The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a
100% grade which is equivalent to a slope
angle of 45°. Keep in mind that the climbing
ability of the vehicle depends on terrain
conditions.
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
continuous wheel traction when driving in
steep terrain.
i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out
on a steep incline when the front wheels
have then the tendency to slip due to the
weight shifting towards the rear axle.
The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and
limits the torque for the front wheels by
braking them.
Simultaneously the torque for the rear
wheels is increased.
i Vehicles with enhanced off-road package
are equipped with automatic locks for the
center and rear axle differential to improve
vehicle traction.
Driving across a hilltop
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not shift
automatic transmission into neutral position
306
N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up
too much after climbing a hill.
Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive
across the hilltop.
After climbing a hill, driving in this manner
prevents the vehicle from:
Rlosing
ground contact when cresting hills
Rlosing
its forward momentum
Rspeeding up too much after climbing the hill
Driving downhill
RDrive
If this is insufficient, apply the brakes
gently. Make sure the vehicle is moving in
the line of gravity.
RCheck
the brakes after a lengthy
downgrade drive.
i The special Off-road ABS (Y page 77)
setting allows for precise and brief
(cyclical) blocking of the front wheels,
permitting them to dig into loose ground.
Remember that, when stopped, the front
wheels slide across a surface and thus lose
their ability to steer the vehicle.
slowly.
RDo not drive at an angle to the incline. Steer
into the line of gravity and drive with the
front wheels pointing straight downhill.
Otherwise, the vehicle may slide sideways
off the path and roll over.
Driving through water
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 139).
ROn
steep inclines, use the Downhill Speed
Regulation (Y page 182).
RUtilize
the engine’s braking power to
reduce vehicle speed.
1 Fording depth
Operation
Driving instructions
Vehicles with air
suspension
program (raised
level)
1
Vehicles with
BlueTEC
14.00 in (35 cm)
All other vehicles
20.00 in (50 cm)
Vehicles with
enhanced off-road
package
1
Off-road 1 level
20.00 in (50 cm)
Off-road 2 level
20.00 in (50 cm)
Off-road 3 level
23.60 in (60 cm)
through it. Please note that the water level
is correspondingly lower for flowing water.
RSelect
the highest vehicle level possible
(Y page 186).
RSwitch
to off-road driving program
(Y page 185) or LOW RANGE mode
(Y page 142) before driving through water.
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 or 2 (Y page 139).
RAvoid
high engine speeds.
REnter
and leave the water only at a shallow
spot, driving at walking speed.
! Never accelerate before driving into the
RThere
is a very high level of driving
resistance in water. The surface is slippery
and may not be firm, making pulling away
in water difficult and dangerous.
RMake
sure that only small bow waves are
formed when driving the vehicle through
water.
RClean
mud off the tire tread after driving
through water.
RTo
dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
brake pedal several times while driving
after leaving the water.
Crossing obstacles
water. The bow wave could force water into
the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
RDrive
RBefore driving through water, determine its
depth.
! The water depth must not exceed the
respective value listed in the table. The
ground under the water might not be firm
which could result the water being deeper
than expected when driving the vehicle
through the water slowly and at a
constant speed.
RDo
not stop vehicle while immersed in
water, and do not shut off the engine.
! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors
while driving through water. Water could
otherwise enter the vehicle interior and
damage the vehicle’s electronics, as well as
the interior equipment.
! Obstacles can damage the vehicle
underbody or suspension components. If
307
Z
Operation
Driving instructions
possible use the assistance of a second
person outside the vehicle to scout the
path you intend to take and check for
adequate ground clearance when you cross
obstacles with your vehicle. The person
assisting you outside the vehicle should
always be a safe distance away from the
vehicle and positioned so that he or she
cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected
vehicle movement.
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles,
inspect vehicle for any damage, especially
vehicle underbody and suspension
components. Failure to do so can adversely
affect the vehicle’s future performance,
including increased chance of an accident.
When driving over tree stumps, big rocks and
other obstacles, observe the following rules:
RMake
sure the off-road driving program
(Y page 185) or if equipped the
LOW RANGE mode (Y page 142) is
switched on.
RAvoid
RShift
high engine speeds.
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 139).
RCheck
RShift
RCross
RIn
the vehicle clearance before
crossing obstacles.
obstacles (e. g. tree stumps or big
rocks) very slowly by aiming one of the front
wheels at the center of the obstacle, and
repeat same with the rear wheel.
! Special attention is needed when you
cross obstacles on a steep incline.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a result
of its possible slanted position which in turn
may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling
over.
Driving on sand
G Warning!
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if
you do so, remember to correct the tire
inflation pressure before continuing your
trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation
pressure increases the risk of losing control
of the vehicle and rolling over.
When driving on sand, observe the following
rules:
RSet the raised level (Y page 186).
RAvoid
308
high engine speeds.
automatic transmission into a gear
range that is appropriate for the terrain.
sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
conditions permit. This helps overcome the
vehicle rolling resistance and reduce the
likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the
ground.
RDrive
in tracks of other vehicles if they are
not too deep and you have sufficient
clearance.
Ruts
A number of off-road tracks or other byways
have deep ruts which can cause the
underbody to come in contact with the
ground.
RMake sure the off-road driving program
(Y page 185) or, if equipped, the
LOW RANGE mode (Y page 142) is
switched on.
RSet
the raised level (Y page 186).
Operation
Driving instructions
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient.
Otherwise:
Ryour
vehicle may be damaged
Rthe
underbody of the vehicle may come
in contact with the ground and you may
get stuck
RAvoid
high engine speeds.
RShift
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 139).
RDrive
next to the ruts rather than through
them if at all possible.
RIf the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive with
one side of the vehicle on the grassy center
strip if the route permits.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or tire dealer for repairs.
Off-road driving increases strain on the
vehicle.
We recommend that you inspect the vehicle
for possible damage after each off-road trip.
Recognizing any damage and a subsequent
timely repair reduces the chance of a possible
breakdown or accident later on.
Proceed as follows:
RSwitch
off the off-road driving program
(Y page 185) or the LOW RANGE mode
(Y page 142).
RSwitch
Returning from off-road driving
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that
possible damage to your vehicle has
occurred, you should turn on the hazard
warning flashers, carefully slow down, and
drive with caution to an area which is a safe
distance from the road.
off the DSR (Y page 182).
RSet
the differential locks to AUTO
(Y page 145).
RLower
the vehicle back to a level suitable
for road conditions, e. g. highway/highspeed level (Y page 186).
RRemove
excessive dirt from tires, wheels,
wheel housings, and underbody.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean the
radiator, chassis, engine, brakes, and
wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet
of water.
RCheck
tires for possible damage.
RInspect
vehicle underbody, oil pan, brake
hoses, etc., as well as vehicle underbody
for possible damage.
RCheck
for brush or branches caught in the
underbody.
! Brush or branches could increase the
possibility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/
or brake lines, puncture rubber bellows of
the axles or drive shafts.
RAfter
continued operation in mud, sand,
water or other dirty conditions clean the
brake discs, wheels, brake pads and check
and clean axle joints.
RConduct
a brake test.
RClean
all exterior lamps and check for
possible damage.
RClean
the front and rear license plate.
Z
309
Operation
Driving instructions
Trailer towing
G Warning!
Failure to use proper equipment and driving
technique can result in a loss of vehicle
control when towing a trailer.
Improper towing or failure to follow the
instructions in this manual can result in
vehicle damage and/or serious personal
injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully
to assure safe trailer operation.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center should you require an explanation
of information contained in this manual.
Trailer hitch
ROnly install a trailer hitch receiver approved
for your vehicle.
For information on availability and
installation, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RThe
bumpers on your vehicle are not
designed for use with clamp-type hitches.
310
Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them.
RTo
reduce the possibility of damage,
remove the hitch ball adapter from the
receiver when not in use.
Electrical connections
The vehicle is prewired to accept the sevenwire harness included in the Mercedes-Benz
approved trailer hitch receiver kit.
i A four-pole conversion plug is available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as a spare part.
For further information, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight
of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo,
equipment, luggage, etc. loaded on the
trailer. The maximum permissible gross
trailer weight to be towed: 7 500 lb (3 402 kg).
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
maximum permissible weight on the trailer
tongue: 600 lb (272 kg) limit for MercedesBenz approved hitch receiver.
Loading a trailer
RWhen loading a trailer, you should observe
that neither the permissible GTW, nor the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) are
exceeded. The GVWR is indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (Y page 275).
Maximum permissible values are listed on
the safety compliance certification labels
for the vehicle and for the trailer to be
towed.
The lowest value listed must be selected
when determining how the vehicle and
trailer are loaded.
RThe
Tongue Weight (TW) at the hitch ball
must be added to the Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) to prevent exceeding your
Mercedes-Benz tow vehicle’s rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVW and
GAWR are indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 275).
i Mercedes-Benz recommend loading the
trailer in such a manner that it has a TW
between 8 % and 15 % of the GTW.
i Maximum trailer weight ratings are
calculated assuming the vehicle, plus
Operation
Driving instructions
driver. The weight of other accessories,
passengers and cargo will reduce the
maximum trailer weight and TW your
vehicle can tow.
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer
RTo assure that the towing vehicle and trailer
are in compliance with the maximum
permissible weight limits, have the loaded
rig (towing vehicle including driver,
passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded)
weighed on a commercial scale.
RCheck
the vehicle’s front and rear Gross
Axle Weight (GAW), the Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) and Tongue Weight (TW).
The values as measured must not exceed
the weight limits listed under “Vehicle and
trailer weights and ratings” (Y page 310).
Coupling a trailer
G Warning!
While you are coupling or decoupling a
trailer, make sure nobody locks or unlocks
the vehicle and/or opens or closes doors
or the tailgate.
The vehicle’s level could change and you
could endanger yourself and/or others as
a result.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
button or the vehicle level control system
when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
Observe maximum permitted trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Most states and all Canadian provinces
require
Rsafety
chains between the towing vehicle
and the trailer
The chains should be criss-crossed under
the trailer tongue. They must be attached
to the hitch receiver, and not to the
vehicle’s bumper or axle.
Make sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners.
! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if
trailer is so equipped) directly to the
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as your
vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If
you do, neither the vehicle’s brakes nor the
trailer’s brakes will function properly.
i The provided vehicle electrical wiring
harness for trailer towing has a brake signal
wire for hook-up to a brake controller.
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P (Y page 136).
X
Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
(Y page 133).
X
Start the engine (Y page 128).
X
Set the vehicle level to highway
(Y page 186).
X
Vehicles with ADS:
Set the ADS to AUTO or COMF
(Y page 185).
X
Turn off the engine (Y page 133).
X
Close all doors and the tailgate.
X
Attach the trailer.
X
Plug in all electrical connectors.
Ra
separate brake system at various trailer
weights
Ra
break-away switch on trailers with a
separate brake system.
Check with your local state laws for specific
requirements.
The switch activates the trailer brakes in
the possible event that the trailer might
separate from the tow vehicle.
Z
311
Operation
Driving instructions
i When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle
level always remains in the highway setting.
The following applies additionally when
towing a trailer:
RThe
vehicle is lowered to the highway
level when it reaches a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) if not set to highway level.
RThe
highspeed level is not available.
The restrictions that apply to towing also
apply when using accessories that are
connected to the trailer power socket, such
as a bicycle rack.
Towing a trailer
There are many different laws, including
speed limit restrictions, having to do with
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal,
not only for where you reside, but also for
where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be the police or local
authorities.
Note the following, when driving with a trailer:
RIn
order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should
practice turning, stopping and backing up
in an area which is free from traffic.
RBefore
you start driving check the
-
trailer hitch
-
break-away switch
-
safety chains
-
electrical connections
-
lighting
-
tires
the mirrors (Y page 111) to permit
unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer.
RAdjust
RIf
the trailer has electric brakes, start your
vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then
apply only the trailer brake controller by
hand to make sure the brakes are working
properly.
RAlways
secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shifts while driving.
RWhen
towing a trailer, check occasionally
to make sure the load is secure, and that
lighting and trailer brakes (if so equipped)
are functioning properly.
RTake into consideration that when towing a
trailer, the handling characteristics are
312
different and less stable from those when
operating the vehicle without a trailer.
It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.
RThe
vehicle and trailer combination is
heavier, and therefore is limited in
acceleration and climbing ability, and
requires longer stopping distances.
It is more prone to reacting to cross wind
gusts, and requires more sensitive steering
input.
RIf
possible, do not brake abruptly, but
rather engage the brake slightly at first to
permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then
increase the braking force.
! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce
the vehicle’s speed immediately.
Do not attempt to straighten out the tow
vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed.
RIf the transmission shifts between gears on
inclines repeatedly, shift to a lower gear
range manually (Y page 139). Select 4, 3,
2 or 1.
A lower gear and reduction of speed
reduces the chance of engine overloading
and/or overheating.
ROn
very steep inclines, not manageable
with automatic transmission in gear range
Operation
Driving instructions
1, switch on off-road driving program
(Y page 185) or LOW RANGE mode
(Y page 142).
RWhen
going down an incline, shift into a
lower gear and use the engine’s braking
effect.
Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating
the vehicle and trailer brakes (if so
equipped).
RIf
the engine coolant rises to an extremely
high temperature when the air conditioning
is on, turn off the air conditioning system.
Engine coolant heat can be additionally
vented by opening the windows, switching
the climate control fan speed to high and
setting the temperature control to the
maximum.
RExtreme care must be exercised since your
vehicle with a trailer will require additional
passing distance ahead than when driving
without a trailer.
Because your vehicle and trailer is longer
than your vehicle alone, you will also need
to go much farther ahead of the passed
vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Decoupling the trailer
G Warning!
While you are coupling or decoupling a
trailer, make sure nobody locks or unlocks
the vehicle and/or opens or closes doors
or the tailgate.
The vehicle’s level could change and you
could endanger yourself and/or others as
a result.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
button or the vehicle level control system
when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
vehicle before the electrical connection is
disconnected.
When you decouple the trailer, the vehicle
is temporarily raised because the springs
are relieved of load. Be especially careful
during this process, as you could otherwise
injure yourself and/or others. Make sure
that any persons remaining in the vehicle
do not press the switches for vehicle level
control or the ADS.
X
Disconnect all electrical plug connectors.
X
Decouple the trailer.
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P (Y page 136).
X
Make sure that the trailer coupling is free
of load.
X
Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
(Y page 133).
X
Turn off the engine (Y page 133).
X
Start the engine (Y page 128).
X
Close all doors and the tailgate.
X
Engage the parking brake for the trailer.
G Warning!
As soon as you disconnect the electrical
connection between the trailer and the
vehicle, the vehicle will lower. To help avoid
personal injury, make sure no one is near
the wheel housing or underneath the
Z
313
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving abroad
If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.
or Canada, you should request dealer
network information for your destination from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control and operation of radio
transmitter
Safety notes
G Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit
Management and Data system), radio or
telephone14 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not
be able to observe traffic conditions and
could endanger yourself and others.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
14 Observe
15 Observe
314
all legal requirements.
all legal requirements
Telephones and two-way radios
G Warning!
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna, such as
a portable telephone or a citizens band unit,
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. Radio
transmitters should only be used inside the
vehicle if they are connected to an antenna
that is installed on the outside of the
vehicle.
G Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A
driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking
a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone15 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND15 (Cockpit
Management and Data System) if road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
Operation
Maintenance
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
the toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible limits required by law.
These systems will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
specifications. Any adjustments on the
engine should, therefore, be carried out only
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered in
any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
G Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible
death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while
driving, have the cause determined and
corrected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive only with at
least one window fully open at all times.
Maintenance
Notes
The Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks distance driven and the time elapsed
since the last maintenance service,
calculates other maintenance service work
required, and calls for the next maintenance
service accordingly.
We strongly recommend that you have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized MercedesBenz Center, in accordance with the
Maintenance Booklet at the times called for
by the maintenance service indicator.
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
315
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance service indicator
message
The maintenance service indicator message
will notify you when the next maintenance
service is due.
Starting approximately 1 month before the
next maintenance service is due, one of the
following messages will appear in the
multifunction display while you are driving or
when you switch on the ignition (example
service A):
Service A In XXXX Miles (km)
Service A In XXX Days
Service A In X Day
Service A Due Now
(approximately 1 hour)
to
Service H
(approximately 8 hours)
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of
maintenance services and intervals they need
to be performed at.
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message
is cleared automatically
Rafter
approximately 10 seconds when you
switch on the ignition
Rafter
approximately 10 seconds when
reaching the service threshold while driving
approximately 30 seconds, once the
suggested maintenance service term has
passed
1 Reset button
X
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message manually: Press reset
button 1 on the instrument cluster.
The standard display appears in the
multifunction display.
Rafter
The maintenance services will be indicated by
showing a service type A through type H in the
multifunction display. Types A through H are
classified based on estimated time needed to
perform the maintenance service, ranging:
from Service A
316
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles
(Km)
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
Service A Exceeded By X Day
Operation
Maintenance
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance service.
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
count shown by the maintenance service
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
service deadline, you will need to subtract
these days from the days shown in the
maintenance service indicator message or
maintenance service indicator display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service
indicator with the engine oil level indicator
N.
Only reset if the proper maintenance
service has been performed. Resetting the
system without performing the proper
maintenance service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
i The menu overview can be found on
(Y page 151).
You can call up the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is due.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display (Y page 152)
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press button k or j on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator display with
the service symbol 9 and the
maintenance service deadline appears in
the multifunction display.
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
disconnection will not be included in the
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service on
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the
maintenance service indicator reset.
The automotive maintenance facility carrying
out the maintenance service will find the
information for resetting the maintenance
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
literature for your vehicle.
Such literature is available from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or directly
from Mercedes-Benz.
i If the maintenance service indicator was
inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Z
317
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Notes
Regular and proper care will help to maintain
the value of your vehicle.
G Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the
particular container. Always open your
vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning
the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
scouring agents. Never apply strong force
and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface to be cleaned.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
318
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme
and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
RAir
pollution
RRoad
salt
RTar
RGravel
and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should
immediately remove:
RGrease
and oil
RFuel
RCoolant
RBrake
RBird
fluid
droppings
RInsects
RTree
resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
Rnear
the ocean
Rin
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Rduring
winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any
damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
check is a washing of the underbody followed
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas
need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
necessary nor recommended by MercedesBenz because of the possibility of
incompatibility between materials used in the
production process and others applied later.
We have selected vehicle-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and which
always reflect the latest technology. You can
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
Operation
Vehicle care
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the vehicle-care products recommended
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references to
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products.
Power washer
! Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on
maintaining a distance between the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
rubber parts.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
or similar materials to painted body
components may damage the paintwork.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
be applied when water drops on the paint
surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
depending on the climate and washing
detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface shows
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax if
your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
is still hot.
X
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle
doors, etc.).
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components
and connectors from contact with water and
cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB
Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the
engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be
protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of
road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within
319
Z
Operation
Vehicle care
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Hand-wash
X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
X
X
Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
clean the vehicle.
Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
X
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
diffused jet of water.
X
Do not spray directly towards the
ventilation intake.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
and chamois frequently.
X
Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
finish.
Automatic car wash
You can have your vehicle washed in an
automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
car washes are preferable.
320
X
To protect the filter system, activate the air
recirculation mode using button : on
the climate control panel.
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic
spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
or ornamental moldings.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
running it through the automatic car wash.
! Make sure the combination switch is set
to wiper setting M. Otherwise, the rain
sensor could activate and cause the wipers
to move unintentionally. This may lead to
vehicle damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
the vehicle through an automatic car wash
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
X
When taking the vehicle through an
automatic conveyor-type car wash:
Make sure the automatic transmission
remains in neutral position N. Observe
instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
position N” (Y page 136).
When leaving the automatic car wash, make
sure the mirrors are folded out.
After running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
which can be caused by residual wax on the
windshield.
Ornamental moldings
X
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
may have chrome appearance, they could
be made of anodized aluminum that will be
damaged when cleaned with chrome
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
ornamental molding is chrome-plated,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Operation
Vehicle care
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
side markers, turn signal lenses
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Only clean sensors 1 by hand.
X
Only clean sensor cover 1 by hand.
X
X
X
Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water and a non-scratching
cloth to clean sensor cover 1.
Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water and a soft, nonscratching cloth to clean sensors 1 on the
bumpers.
X
Restart the engine after cleaning sensor
cover 1.
Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
Window cleaning solutions which are not
suitable may damage the plastic lamp
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
contain solvents.
Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors
! Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Cleaning the rear view camera lens
Parktronic system sensors are located in the
front and rear bumper.
Cleaning the Distronic system sensor
cover
1 Camera lens
1 Parktronic system sensors in front
bumper
1 Distronic system sensor cover
X
Only use clean water and a soft, nonscratching cloth to clean camera lens 1.
Be careful not to apply wax to camera lens
1 when waxing the vehicle. If necessary,
321
Z
Operation
Vehicle care
remove the wax using the Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water.
X
Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
into place.
! Do not clean the camera and the area
X
Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
inserts with a clean cloth and mild
detergent solution.
X
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
around the camera
Rwith
a high-pressure cleaner
Rwith
a dry cloth and strong pressure
Rwith
aggressive cleaning agents
You could otherwise damage the camera.
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms
are folded forward.
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have status
0) before cleaning the windshield and/or
the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper
motor could suddenly turn on and cause
injury.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
322
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield.
! To clean the window interior, do not use
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
containing solvents. Do not touch the
inside of the front, rear or side windows and
the power tilt/sliding sunroof or rear
panorama roof with hard objects such as
an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows or the sunroof/
panorama roof.
Light alloy wheels
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
clear coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately after
it has been cleaned, especially not after the
wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel
rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to
increased corrosion of the brake disks and
brake pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners
may also damage the wheel paint if the
vehicle is not driven after cleaning.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it is
parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved
Operation
Vehicle care
Wheel Care products, take care not to
spray them on the brake disks.
Plastic and rubber parts
X
X
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
solution.
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
solution.
The surface may temporarily change color.
If this is the case, wait for it to dry.
G Warning!
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
the steering wheel. Cleaners containing
solvents will make the surface porous and
vehicle occupants could suffer serious
injuries from plastic parts coming loose in
the event of air bag deployment.
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
Hard plastic trim items
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
pressure.
COMAND display
! You must switch off the COMAND display
and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
These can damage or even destroy the
audio display screen.
X
Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Headliner
X
Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Seat belts
X
Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
(80†) or in direct sunlight.
G Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Steering wheel
X
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Carpets
X
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the
upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will
be prevented.
Z
323
Operation
Vehicle care
G Warning!
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
Only use seat or head restraint covers
which have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent
Rdeployment
RWipe
RDo
not clean with abrasive cleaning
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo
not soak the leather upholstery.
As leather is a natural product, it could
otherwise harden or become porous.
of the front side impact air
bags
Rdeployment
RExercise
particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
of the rear side impact air
bags
Ractivation
of the active head restraints
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to a
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with MercedesBenz approved Leather Care.
324
with light pressure only.
MB Tex upholstery
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with
light pressure for cleaning the upholstery.
Wood trims
X
Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Chrome-plated exhaust tip
Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
and the classy appearance.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
been washed, especially during the winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
wheel cleaners as they could cause
corrosion.
Practical hints
Vehicle equipment ............................
Where will I find ...? ..........................
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display .......................
What to do if … ..................................
Unlocking/locking manually ...........
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries .........
Replacing bulbs .................................
326
326
330
370
384
385
386
388
Replacing wiper blades .................... 395
Flat tire .............................................. 397
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine only) ....................................... 404
AdBlue® (diesel engine only) ...........
Battery ...............................................
Jump starting ....................................
Towing the vehicle ............................
Fuses ..................................................
405
408
410
412
415
325
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and
replace missing/expired items.
The first aid kit is located on the driver’s side
in the cargo compartment behind the cover.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
RAlignment
bolt
RCollapsible
RFuse
wheel chock
chart
RJack
RReversible
RTowing
RWheel
wrench
RSpare
wheel bolts16
X
1 Lock
2 Cover in driver’s side trim panel
16 Vehicles
326
with spare wheel only.
X
Turn lock 1 by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X
Fold down cover 2.
The first aid kit can be removed.
ratchet for jack
eye bolt
Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 90).
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
X
Engage securing hook 3 on upper cargo
compartment lip 5.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind
installed behind the third-row seats,
disengage cargo compartment cover blind
and flip it forward. Otherwise the strap of
the securing hook could damage the cargo
compartment cover blind.
1 Cargo compartment floor, lowered
2 Floor handle
X
Push in floor handle 2 as indicated by
arrow.
X
Lift cargo compartment floor 1 using floor
handle 2.
3 Securing hook
X
Release securing hook 3 (located below
the floor handle) from holder.
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
3 Securing hook
4 Cargo compartment floor, raised
5 Upper cargo compartment lip
Z
327
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicles without spare wheel
Vehicles with spare wheel
Collapsible wheel chock
The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 326).
1 Reversible ratchet for jack
2 Wheel wrench
1 Alignment bolt
2 Towing eye bolt
3 Towing eye bolt
4 Fuse chart
3 Wheel wrench
4 Reversible ratchet for jack
5 Collapsible wheel chock
6 Jack
5 Hook and loop fastener
6 Jack
7 Alignment bolt
7 Spare wheel bolts
8 Collapsible wheel chock
9 Fuse chart
a Storage well casing
X
328
To remove jack 6, loosen hook and loop
fastener 5.
1 Tilt the plates upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
X
Setting up: Tilt both plates upward 1.
X
Fold the lower plate outward 2.
X
Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
into the openings of base plate 3.
X
Before placing the jack back into the vehicle
tool kit:
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting
the vehicle” (Y page 398).
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes.
If you use the jack for any other purpose,
you or others could be injured, as the jack
is designed only for the purpose of
changing a wheel.
When using the jack, observe the safety
notes in the “Mounting the spare wheel”
section and the notes on the jack.
X
X
Fully collapse the jack (storage position).
X
Remove the reversible ratchet.
Spare wheel
Jack
G Warning!
Attach reversible ratchet 2 to jack 1 in
such a way that the word UP can be seen.
Storage position
X
Take the reversible ratchet from the vehicle
tool kit.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 397.
i The GL 320 BlueTEC does not have a
spare wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 90).
X
Lift the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 327).
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 326).
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
Operational position
1 Jack
2 Reversible ratchet
X
Remove the jack from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 328).
329
Z
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Storing the spare wheel after use
1 Retaining screw
2 Spare wheel
3 Storage well casing
X
Remove retaining screw 1 by turning it
counterclockwise.
i If retaining screw 1 does not come
loose, turn storage well casing 3 slightly
counterclockwise. Retaining screw 1
should then come loose easily.
X
Remove storage well casing 3.
X
Remove spare wheel 2.
For information on mounting the spare wheel,
see “Flat tire” (Y page 397).
330
X
Place the spare wheel into the spare wheel
well (Y page 330).
X
Place the storage well casing into the spare
wheel (Y page 330).
X
Secure the spare wheel by turning the
retaining screw (Y page 330) clockwise.
X
Place the jack into the storage well casing
(Y page 328).
X
Close and pull tight the hook and loop
fastener (Y page 328) that secures the
jack.
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display
Notes
Warning and malfunction messages appear in
the multifunction display located in the
instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages
are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in this
Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the Vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(Y page 156) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button (Y page 147) or button
j, k, · or è on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and
messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button (Y page 147) or button
j, k, · or è on the
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
multifunction steering wheel. They are then
stored in the Vehicle status message
memory menu (Y page 156). Remember that
clearing a message will only make the
message disappear. Clearing a message will
not correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
G Warning!
All categories of messages contain
important information which should be
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair the condition noted may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result
in property damage or personal injury.
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/
warning messages or the failure of any
systems. Driving characteristics may be
impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear
in the multifunction display.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into text messages (Y page 332) and
symbol messages (Y page 346).
Z
331
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages
ABS
ABS, ESP
Inoperative
See Operator’s
Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The brake system is still functioning
normally but due to a malfunction, the
ABS, the BAS and the ESP® are
unavailable.
X
Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
ABS
ABS, ESP
Unavailable
See Operator’s
Manual
The self-diagnosis may not be completed The display will clear after driving a short distance
yet.
at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
ABS
ABS, ESP
Unavailable
See Operator’s
Manual
The brake system still functions normally When the voltage is above the required value
but due to insufficient power supply, the again, the ABS is operational again and the
message should disappear.
ABS, the BAS and the ESP® are
unavailable.
X If the message does not disappear: Have the
system checked at an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible.
332
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ESP
Inoperative
See Operator’s
Manual
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp X Continue driving with added caution.
v comes on.
X Have the system checked at an authorized
The brake system is still functioning
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
normally but due to a malfunction the
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
ESP® is unavailable.
risk of an accident.
The ABS and the BAS may not be
operational.
ESP
Unavailable
See Operator’s
Manual
The brake system still functions normally X Continue driving with added caution.
but due to insufficient power supply the When the voltage is above the required value
ESP® is unavailable.
again, the ESP® is operational again and the
message in the multifunction display should
disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does
not disappear:
ESP
Unavailable
See Operator’s
Manual
If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v
flashes while driving and this message
appears, the 4-ETS has switched off to
prevent overheating of the drive wheel
brakes.
X
Have the alternator and the battery checked.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the 4-ETS
switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display
disappears and the ESP® warning lamp v
goes out.
Z
333
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ESP
Unavailable
See Operator’s
Manual
The self-diagnosis might not be
completed yet.
The display will clear after driving a short distance
at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
PRE-SAFE
Inoperative See
Operator’s Manual
The PRE-SAFE® system itself has failed.
All other occupant safety systems, such
as the air bags, are still available.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
If ESP® and PRE-SAFE® malfunction
messages are displayed simultaneously,
the PRE-SAFE® system has been
deactivated as a result of these
malfunctions. All other occupant safety
systems, such as the air bags, are still
available.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
334
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Front Passenger
Airbag Enabled
See Operator’s
Manual
USA only:
The front passenger front air bag is
activated while driving even though a
child, small individual, or object below the
system’s weight threshold is on the front
passenger seat, or the front passenger
seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
forces acting on the seat may make the
system sense supplemental weight.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
possible.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Open the front passenger door.
X
Remove child and child restraint from front
passenger seat and properly secure the child
in rear seat employing the child restraint if
necessary.
X
Remove any other items from on and around
the front passenger seat and make sure the
parcel net on the back of the front passenger
seat is empty.
X
Make sure no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books,
briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the
seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.).
The system may recognize such forces as
supplemental weight and sense that an
occupant on the front passenger seat is of a
greater weight than actually present.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front
passenger door and switch on the ignition.
Z
335
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp in the
center console (Y page 56) and the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster (Y page 32) for
the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition
switched on,
Rthe
59 indicator lamp in the
center console should illuminate and remain
illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 53) has deactivated the front
passenger front air bag.
message Front Passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front Passenger Airbag
Disabled See Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any
time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least
60 seconds for the system to complete the
necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction
display.
Rthe
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the
front passenger seat again. Depending on the
front passenger classification sensed by the
336
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
OCS, the 59 indicator lamp will
remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not
working properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
If the 59 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years old
and under and other small individuals use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Z
337
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled
See Operator’s
Manual
USA only:
The front passenger front air bag is
deactivated while driving even though an
adult or someone larger than a small
individual is occupying the front
passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat
may make the system sense a decrease
in weight.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
possible.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Have the front passenger vacate the seat and
exit the vehicle.
X
Adjust the seat height to a higher position
(Y page 98).
X
Make sure no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books,
briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or
around the seat). Such forces may cause the
system to sense that an occupant of a lesser
weight than actually present is on the front
passenger seat.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front
passenger door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp in the
center console (Y page 56) and the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster (Y page 32) for
the following:
338
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition
switched on,
Rthe
59 indicator lamp in the
center console should illuminate and remain
illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 53) has deactivated the front
passenger front air bag.
message Front Passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front Passenger Airbag
Disabled See Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any
time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least
60 seconds for the system to complete the
necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction
display.
Rthe
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the
front passenger seat again. Depending on the
front passenger classification sensed by the
OCS, the 59 indicator lamp will
remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not
working properly. Have the system checked as
Z
339
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
If the 59 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front passenger seat even after performing the
above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Cruise Control
Inoperative
The cruise control is malfunctioning.
X
Have cruise control checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Cruise Control
- - - MPH
(USA only)
- - - Km/h
(Canada only)
One of the activation conditions for cruise
control has not been fulfilled. For
example, you have attempted to set a
speed below 20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h), if the
situation allows, and set the speed.
X
Check the activation conditions for cruise
control (Y page 170).
- - - Km/h
(Canada only)
One of the activation conditions for
Distronic has not been fulfilled. For
example, you have attempted to set a
speed below 20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and set
the speed.
X
Check the activation conditions for Distronic
(Y page 176).
DISTRONIC
340
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
DISTRONIC
Inoperative
The Distronic or the display are
malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
DISTRONIC
Override
You have accelerated. The Distronic has
switched off.
X
Stop accelerating.
DISTRONIC
Available Again
Distronic had been deactivated and is
available again.
X
Activate Distronic (Y page 176).
DISTRONIC
Currently
Unavailable
See Operator’s
Manual
Distronic is deactivated because:
X
If necessary, clean the Distronic cover in the
area of the radiator grille (Y page 321).
X
If necessary, wait until the system has cooled
down.
X
Restart the vehicle.
RThe Distronic cover in the radiator grille
is dirty.
RThe
functionality is impaired by heavy
precipitation or fog
RThe
system is overheated.
Distronic becomes operational again without the
engine being restarted when:
Rdirt
on the radiator grille has fallen off while
driving (e.g. slush or snow)
Rthe
system recognizes full sensor availability
(due to lessening rain or the road surface
drying)
Rthe
message in the multifunction display
disappears
You can then operate Distronic as usual again.
Z
341
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
DISTRONIC
G Warning!
Currently
Unavailable
See Operator’s
Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Distronic is deactivated because the
functionality is impaired by external
interferences, e.g. high-frequency
sources such as toll stations, speed
measuring systems etc.
X
Leave the area of the external interference.
X
Activate Distronic again (Y page 176) when the
message DISTRONIC Available Again
appears.
Distronic is deactivated because the
Distronic sensor has not sensed any other
vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such,
for a long time.
X
Activate Distronic again (Y page 176) when the
message DISTRONIC Available Again
appears.
Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic or do not turn it on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished
as a result of snow, rain or fog. The distance control may be impaired even before the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The message
DISTRONIC Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual will be displayed in the multifunction display and Distronic will be turned
off.
342
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Depress brake
to shift out of P.
You have attempted to shift the automatic
transmission into drive position D, reverse
gear R or neutral position N without
depressing the brake pedal.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
Door Open
Vehicle Not In Park You have opened the driver’s door and the
automatic transmission is still in drive
position D, reverse gear R or neutral
position N.
X
Before you leave the vehicle, make sure the
automatic transmission is in park position P
and the parking brake is engaged.
Drive to
workshop
without shifting
gears.
If the automatic transmission is in drive position
D:
X Without shifting the automatic transmission
out of drive position D, drive to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The automatic transmission cannot be
shifted out of the current transmission
position because of a malfunction.
If the automatic transmission is set to position
neutral position N, reverse gear R or park position
P:
X Do not drive.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Z
343
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Only shift to P
when vehicle is
at a
standstill.
You have attempted to shift the automatic
transmission into park position P although
the vehicle was still in motion.
X
Stop the vehicle.
You have attempted to start the engine
with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
while the automatic transmission was in
reverse gear R or drive position D.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P or neutral position N. Make sure the
brake pedal is depressed.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
There has been a warning message about
a loss in the tire inflation pressure and the
Run Flat Indicator was not restarted yet.
X
Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is
set for each tire.
X
Then restart the Run Flat Indicator
(Y page 282).
The Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning.
X
Have the Run Flat Indicator checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
P
Shift to P or N to
start engine.
Tires
Display messages
Check tires,
Run Flat
Indicator
Inoperative
344
then restart Run
Flat Indicator.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Tire Pressure
Check Tires
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The Run Flat Indicator indicates that the
pressure is too low in one or more tires.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
X
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (Y page 281).
X
If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 397).
X
Restart the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting
the tire inflation pressure values
(Y page 282).
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative
The TPMS is malfunctioning.
X
Have the TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative
No Wheel Sensors
There are wheels without appropriate
wheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires).
X
Have the TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Currently
Unavailable
The TPMS is unable to monitor the tire
inflation pressure due to a nearby radio
interference source or insufficient power
supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have
been removed, the TPMS becomes active again
automatically after a few minutes driving.
Z
345
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
Display messages
2
Brake Wear
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
X
Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
346
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
;
(USA only)
3
EBV, ABS, ESP
Inoperative
See Operator’s
Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The brake system is still functioning
normally but due to a malfunction, the
ABS, the BAS, the EBP and the ESP® are
unavailable.
X
Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability.
X
Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced
braking responsiveness.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Release the parking brake.
(Canada only)
;
(USA only)
Release Parking
Brake
You are driving with the parking brake
engaged.
X
Check Brake Fluid
Level
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
Risk of accident!
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
!
(Canada only)
;
(USA only)
3
(Canada only)
X
Do not drive any further.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
Z
347
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
L
Tele Aid
Inoperative
One or more main functions of the Tele Aid
system are malfunctioning.
X
Have the Tele Aid system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1
Restraint Sys.
Malfunction
Service Required
The system is malfunctioning.
X
Drive with added caution to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked immediately.
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked.
Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
348
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Driving systems
Display messages
n
Level Selection
Not Permitted
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The selected vehicle level cannot
adjusted, because
X
Reduce vehicle speed and set the desired
vehicle level again (Y page 186).
Ryou
X
Observe the notes on trailer towing
(Y page 310).
X
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
are driving too fast for the desired
vehicle level
Ryou
are towing a trailer
Ryou
are using accessories that are
connected to the trailer power socket,
e.g. a bicycle rack
n
Malfunction
The air suspension is malfunctioning.
Z
349
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
n
Compressor Cooling
Down
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You have selected a higher vehicle level.
Due to frequent level changes within a
short period, the compressor must cool
down first.
X
Let the compressor cool down until the
message disappears.
The selected level will be set once the
compressor has cooled down.
! When the message Compressor
Cooling Down appears in the
multifunction display, driving is still
possible. Keep in mind that the ride
height of the vehicle is not yet reached,
so you can damage the underbody of
the vehicle.
n
Rising
Max. 12 MPH
The vehicle is adjusting to off-road level 3.
X
Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h).
n
Max. 12 MPH
You are driving while using off-road
level 3. The message reminds you of the
maximum speed at which you may drive
with off-road level 3.
X
Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h).
p
Being lowered
Max. 12 MPH
The vehicle is being lowered from off-road
level 3 to off-road level 2.
X
Do not drive faster than 12 mph
(20 km/h) until the off-road level 2 is reached.
350
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
p
Reduce speed to
under 12 MPH
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You are driving too fast for the set vehicle
level.
X
Do not drive faster than 12 mph
(20 km/h) until the off-road level 2 is reached.
X
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Have the vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Continue driving with added caution. The lock
function is unavailable.
X
Wait for the lock system to cool down.
The differential locks will be reactivated as
soon as they have cooled down.
G Warning!
Adapt your driving style to the modified
driving conditions. Avoid extreme, quick
steering maneuvers. Please keep in mind
that the driving characteristics of the
vehicle have been modified. You should
therefore drive in off-road level 3 with
particular caution as it could otherwise
lead to an accident and/or serious injury
to you or others.
<
Locking System
Inoperative
Service Required
The differential locks are malfunctioning.
<
Diff. Lock System
Overheated - Wait
briefly.
The differential locks are too hot and have
been deactivated as a result.
Z
351
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
<
Stop vehicle,
engage parking
brake.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
A shifting procedure could not be
completed. LOW RANGE is in neutral
position. There is no connection between
the engine and the drive wheels.
X
Do not attempt to continue driving. You could
otherwise damage the vehicle’s drivetrain.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Perform the shifting procedure again
(Y page 142).
X
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Engage the parking brake if parked.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Service Required
If parked engage
pk. brake.
The LOW RANGE system is
malfunctioning.
m
Max. Speed 25 MPH
Speed too high for shifting procedure.
X
Continue driving more slowly.
The shifting procedure will be performed.
m
Max. Speed 40 MPH
Speed too high for shifting procedure.
X
Continue driving more slowly.
The shifting procedure will be performed.
m
Shift briefly
into N.
You have reduced engine speed, but the
automatic transmission is not in neutral
position N.
X
Briefly shift automatic transmission to neutral
position N.
m
352
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
m
Shifting Process
Canceled
Reactivate
The shifting procedure was not carried
out.
X
Repeat the shifting procedure if desired.
{
Inoperative
Downhill Speed Regulation is
malfunctioning.
X
Have the Downhill Speed Regulation checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
a
You are driving with the hood or the
tailgate open.
X
Close the hood or the tailgate.
You are trying to lock the vehicle with the
KEYLESS-GO function with a door or the
tailgate open.
X
Close all doors and/or the tailgate.
You are driving with at least one door
open.
X
Close all doors.
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the
vehicle was recognized while trying to lock
the vehicle from the outside.
X
Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
Vehicle
V
I
Key Detected In
Vehicle
Z
353
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
I
Don’t Forget Your
Key
This display appears for a maximum of
60 seconds if the driver’s door is opened
with the engine turned off and no
SmartKey in the starter switch. This
message is only a reminder.
X
Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the
vehicle.
I
Remove Key
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
I
You need a new key. The SmartKey is malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
I
Key Does Not Belong The SmartKey in the starter switch does
not belong to the vehicle.
to Vehicle
X
Find the SmartKey that belongs to the vehicle
to operate the vehicle.
I
Change Key
Batteries
The batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO are discharged.
X
Replace the batteries (Y page 386).
I
Key Not Detected
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not
detected while the engine is running
because the SmartKey is not in the
vehicle.
X
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can
the engine be started again after the engine is
stopped.
354
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
I
I
Key Not Detected
Key Not Detected
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not
detected while the engine is running
because there is strong radio-frequency
interference.
X
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
momentarily not detected.
X
Change the position of the SmartKey in the
vehicle.
X
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch if necessary.
X
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Connect the telephone to the COMAND system
via Bluetooth®.
X
Add washer fluid (Y page 271).
Pull starting
button out then
insert key.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
permanently not detected.
t
Bluetooth Ready
The telephone has not yet been
connected to the COMAND system via
Bluetooth®.
W
Top Up Washer Fluid The fluid level has dropped to
approximately 1/3 of total reservoir
capacity.
I
Z
355
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Engine
Display messages
B
Top Up Coolant
See Operator’s
Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The coolant level is too low.
X
Add coolant (Y page 271).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the
cooling system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
356
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Ì
Coolant
Stop car, switch
engine off.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The coolant is too hot.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is
safe to do so.
X
Turn off the engine immediately.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Only start the engine again after the message
disappears. You could otherwise damage the
engine.
X
Observe the coolant temperature in the
multifunction display.
X
If the temperature rises again: Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
During severe operation conditions and stopand-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could
be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
357
Z
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†). Doing so may cause serious damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
358
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Ì
Coolant
Stop car, switch
engine off.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
X
Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is
safe to do so.
X
Turn off the engine immediately.
X
Check the poly-V-belt.
X
If it is broken: Do not continue to drive.
Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may result in
damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the
vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
X
Observe the coolant temperature in the
multifunction display.
X
Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
Z
359
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Ì
The cooling fan for the coolant is
malfunctioning.
X
Observe the coolant temperature in the
multifunction display.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡
(120†), you may continue driving to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g.
by driving uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
X
Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
Ralternator
X
If it is broken: Do not continue to drive.
Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may result in
damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Adjust
driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
#
Rbroken
Ra
360
malfunctioning
poly-V-belt
malfunction in the electronic system
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
#
N
Battery/Alternator
Stop Vehicle
Check engine oil
level at next
refueling.
If the message Check engine oil level
at next refueling. appears while the
engine is running and at operating
temperature, the engine oil level has dropped
to approximately the minimum level.
The message will be stored in the vehicle
status message memory after you have
cleared it from the multifunction display.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The battery is defective.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Do not continue to drive.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Check the engine oil level (Y page 269) and add
engine oil as required (Y page 270).
X
If you must add engine oil frequently, have the
engine checked for possible leaks.
The engine oil level is too low.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.
For information on approved engine oils
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
361
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
¿
The fuel level is low.
X
Refuel at the next gas station.
4
Reserve Fuel
The fuel level has dropped below the
reserve mark.
X
Refuel at the next gas station.
4
Ultra Low-sulfur
Diesel Fuel Only
Vehicles with diesel engine only:
The fuel level has dropped below the
reserve mark.
X
Refuel at the next gas station.
X
Only use commercially available vehicular
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm
SULFUR MAXIMUM).
4
Gas Cap Open
A loss of pressure has been detected in
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky.
X
Check the fuel cap (Y page 265).
X
If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X
If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
ò
Replace air filter
The air filter is clogged.
X
Have the air filter checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
]
Clean Fuel Filter
There is water in the fuel filter.
X
Have the water drained at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
û
Check Additive
See Operator's
Manual
The AdBlue® supply is almost depleted.
X
Have the AdBlue® tank refilled as soon as
possible (Y page 405).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
362
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
û
Remaining
Starts: 20
i When the message Remaining
Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction
display, you can start the engine 20 more
times. If you do not add AdBlue®, the
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The AdBlue® supply has dropped to the
minimum level.
X
engine cannot be started beyond that
point. Therefore, fill the AdBlue® tank with
approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®
(corresponds to approximately 2 refill
Have the AdBlue® tank refilled immediately
(Y page 405).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
containers AdBlue®) or have the AdBlue®
tank filled at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. After AdBlue® was refilled, the
engine can be started again.
Lamps
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is
malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
.
Reverse Lamp Left
or
Reverse Lamp Right
The left or right backup lamp is
malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
.
Brake Lamp Left
or
Brake Lamp Right
The left or right brake lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
Z
363
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
3rd Brake Lamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is
malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
.
Front Foglamp Left
or
Front Foglamp
Right
The left or right front fog lamp is
malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
.
Marker Lamp Front
Left
or
Marker Lamp Front
Right
The front left side or right side marker
lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
.
Parking Lamp Front
Left
or
Parking Lamp Front
Right
The left or right front parking lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
.
High Beam Left
or
High Beam Right
The left or right high-beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
X
Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon
as possible (Y page 390).
X
Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
364
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
License Plate Lamp
Left
or
License Plate Lamp
Right
The left or right license plate lamp is
malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
.
AUTO Light
Inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps come on automatically.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
.
.
Low Beam Left
or
Low Beam Right
The left or right low-beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
Foglamp Rear Left
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
X
In the control system, set daytime running
lamp mode to manual (Y page 161).
X
Switch off the headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch (Y page 115).
X
Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon
as possible (Y page 388).
X
Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
Z
365
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Switch Off Lights
You have removed the SmartKey from the X Turn the exterior lamp switch to M or
starter switch, opened the driver’s door
U (Y page 115).
and left the headlamps on or removed the
or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in
vehicle and left the headlamps on.
the exterior lamp switch to its stop.
.
Tail Lamp Left
or
Tail Lamp Right
The left or right tail lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
.
Cornering Lamp
Left
or
Cornering Lamp
Right
The left or right corner-illuminating front
fog lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
.
Trailer Brake Lamp
The left or right trailer brake lamp is
malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
.
Trailer Tail Lamp
Left
or
Trailer Tail Lamp
Right
The left or right trailer tail lamp is
malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
366
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Trailer Turn
Signal Left
or
Trailer Turn
Signal Right
The left or right trailer turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
.
Turn Signal Rear
Left
or
Turn Signal Rear
Right
The left or right rear turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 388).
.
Turn Signal Front
Left
or
Turn Signal Front
Right
The left or right front turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 390).
.
Turn Signal Left
Mirror
or
Turn Signal Right
Mirror
The turn signal in the left or right exterior
rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This
message will only appear if all LEDs have
stopped working.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Z
367
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Tires
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure(s)
Please Correct
The tire pressure is too low in one or more
tires.
or
The tire pressure of the individual tires
differ from each other significantly.
X
Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
required (Y page 281).
H
Tire Pressure
Caution: Tire
Defect
One or more tires are deflating.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X
If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 397).
Tire Pressure
Check Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
already below the minimum value.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X
Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
X
If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 397).
H
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
368
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Z
369
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
Notes
If any of the following lamps in the instrument
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self-
370
check when switching on the ignition, have
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
necessary.
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
(except high-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster come on.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is switched on,
have it checked and replaced if necessary.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Brake
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
- The yellow ABS indicator
lamp comes on while the
engine is running.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard
The ABS has detected a
malfunction and switched off.
braking, reducing steering capability.
The BAS, ESP®, EBP and
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
Electronic Traction System
display (Y page 330).
(4-ETS) are also switched off (see
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
messages in multifunction
as soon as possible.
display).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
The brake system is still
functioning normally but without
the systems specified above
available.
If the ABS control unit is
malfunctioning, other systems
such as the navigation system or
the automatic transmission may
also be malfunctioning.
- The yellow ABS indicator
lamp comes on while the
engine is running.
The ABS has switched off due to When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
insufficient power supply.
operational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
The battery might not be charged X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator and
sufficiently.
the battery checked.
Z
371
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
- The yellow ABS indicator
lamp comes on while the
engine is running.
The self-diagnosis has not yet
been completed yet.
The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a vehicle
speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
; (USA only)
3 (Canada only)
v
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving. In
addition, the yellow ABS
malfunction indicator lamp, and
the yellow ESP® warning lamp
come on and an acoustic warning
sounds.
The Electronic Brake
Proportioning (EBP) switched off
due to a malfunction.
The ABS, the BAS, and the ESP®
are also switched off.
X
; (USA only)
3 (Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking
brake engaged.
X
372
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
Release the parking brake.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
; (USA only)
3 (Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while the engine is
running and you hear a warning
sound.
There is insufficient brake fluid in
the reservoir.
X
Risk of accident! Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe
location as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
display (Y page 330).
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake
fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning
lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously
burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
Z
373
Practical hints
What to do if …
Safety systems
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
< The red seat belt telltale
The seat belt telltale reminds you X Fasten your seat belts.
comes on for a maximum and your passengers to fasten
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
of 6 seconds after starting your seat belts before driving off. belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
the engine.
starting the engine.
< You hear a warning chime You have forgotten to fasten your
for a maximum of
seat belt.
6 seconds after starting
the engine.
X
Fasten your seat belt.
The warning chime stops sounding.
< The red seat belt telltale
comes on while the vehicle
is standing still and the
engine is running or during
driving.
You and/or your front passenger
have forgotten to fasten your seat
belts.
X
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
There are items placed on the
front passenger seat and
therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being
occupied.
X
Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in
a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
374
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
< During driving the red seat
belt telltale flashes and
you additionally hear an
intermittent warning
chime with increasing
intensity.
The vehicle’s speed once
exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and
you and/or your front passenger
have forgotten to fasten your seat
belts.
X
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
There are items placed on the
front passenger seat and
therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being
occupied.
X
Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in
a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
1 The red SRS indicator
lamp comes on while
driving.
There is a malfunction in the
restraint systems. The air bags or
Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs) could deploy
unexpectedly or fail to activate in
an accident.
X
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
375
Practical hints
What to do if …
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked.
Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
v The yellow ESP® warning
lamp comes on while the
engine is running.
The ESP® has been switched off.
Risk of accident!
When the ESP® is switched off it
will not stabilize the vehicle if the
system recognizes that the
vehicle starts to skid or that a
wheel is spinning.
X
Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 79).
X
If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X
If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The ESP® is not operational due
to a malfunction.
Risk of accident!
X
Read and Observe additional messages that may appear in the
multifunction display.
X
Continue driving with added caution.
X
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
v The yellow ESP® warning
lamp comes on while the
engine is running.
376
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
v The yellow ESP® warning The ESP® or Electronic Traction
lamp flashes while driving. System (4-ETS) has come into
operation because of detected
traction loss in at least one tire.
The cruise control and the
Distronic system are deactivated.
Suggested solutions
X
When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
X
While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X
Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 79).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
Driving systems
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
l The red distance warning
lamp comes on while
driving.
You are too close to the vehicle in
front of you to maintain selected
speed.
X
Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following distance.
l The red distance warning
lamp comes on while
driving and you hear a
warning sound.
You are gaining too rapidly on the
vehicle ahead of you or the
distance warning system has
recognized a stationary obstacle
on your probable line of travel.
X
Apply the brakes immediately.
X
Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake or
maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.
Z
377
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle
Problem
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp in the fuel
gauge comes on while
driving.
378
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
The fuel level has gone below the
reserve mark.
X
Refuel at the next gas station.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Engine
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
? (USA only)
± (Canada only)
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on when
the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction in:
X
RThe
fuel management system
RThe
ignition system
RThe
emission control system
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon
as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local
requirements.
RSystems
which affect
emissions
Such malfunctions may result in
excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limphome (emergency operation)
mode.
? (USA only)
± (Canada only)
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on when
the engine is running.
A loss of pressure has been
detected in the fuel system. The
fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system may
be leaky.
X
Check the fuel cap (Y page 265).
X
If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X
If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Diesel engine: Your fuel tank was
driven empty.
X
After refueling, start, turn off and restart the engine three or four
times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your
vehicle checked.
Z
379
Practical hints
What to do if …
Tires
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
H USA only:
The TPMS detects a loss of
pressure in at least one tire.
Combination low tire
pressure telltale/TPMS
malfunction telltale for the
TPMS illuminates
continuously.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
(Y page 330).
H USA only:
There is a malfunction in the
TPMS.
Combination low tire
pressure telltale/TPMS
malfunction telltale for the
TPMS flashes 60 seconds
and then stays
illuminated.
X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
(Y page 330).
X
Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked every other week when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available,
380
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes of
driving.
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the Tire and Loading Information placard or,
if available, the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
Practical hints
What to do if …
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
Lamp in center console
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Canada only:
59
The indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated
(Y page 58).
A BabySmartTM child seat is
installed on the passenger seat.
Therefore the front passenger
front air bag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning
when there is no BabySmartTM
child seat installed on the
passenger seat.
Suggested solutions
X
Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
381
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
Canada only:
59
The indicator lamp does not
illuminate or does not remain
illuminated with a BabySmartTM
child seat properly installed on
the passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
X
Check installation of the child seat (Y page 71).
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
USA only:
The system is malfunctioning.
59
The indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or
someone larger than a small
individual on the front passenger
seat.
G Warning!
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with
382
X
Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (Y page 330).
the weight of a typical adult or someone
larger than a small individual on the front
passenger seat, do not have any passenger
use the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
USA only:
The system is malfunctioning.
59
The indicator lamp does not
illuminate and/or does not
remain illuminated with the
weight of a typical 12-month-old
child in a standard child restraint
or less on the front passenger
seat.
Suggested solutions
X
Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
and check installation of the child seat.
X
Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
are present.
X
Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or
around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The
system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
X
If the indicator lamp remains out, have the system checked as soon
as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not
transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (Y page 330).
G Warning!
If the 59 indicator lamp does
not illuminate or remains out with the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the front
passenger seat, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Z
383
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
driver’s door using the mechanical key.
X
Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow.
X
Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing.
Unlocking the driver’s door
i Unlocking the vehicle with the
mechanical key and opening the driver’s
door will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
Removing the mechanical key
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
follows:
X Close the front passenger door, the right
rear door and the tailgate.
X
Open the driver’s door and the rear left
door.
X
Press the central locking switch
(Y page 89).
The locking knobs of the front passenger
door and the rear doors move down.
X
If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
drained: Press down the locking knobs of
the front passenger door and the rear doors
manually.
X
Exit the vehicle.
X
Close the driver’s door.
X
Enter the vehicle through the rear left door.
X
Press down the locking knob of the driver’s
door.
$ Unlocking
2 Mechanical key
X
Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s
door lock until it stops.
X
Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwise
to position $ and hold it there.
X
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
384
X
Pull the door handle until the locking knob
moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
Pull the door handle once more to open the
driver’s door.
! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make
sure to have the SmartKey with you before
proceeding with the next step. The next
step will lock the vehicle.
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
X
Exit the vehicle.
X
Close the rear left door.
The vehicle is locked.
Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraints have been
triggered in a rear-end collision, the active
head restraints must be reset.
You can tell that the active head restraints
have been triggered when they have been
moved forward and cannot be adjusted.
i This procedure does not arm the antitheft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
filler flap.
G Warning!
Fuel filler flap
G Warning!
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
could injure yourself while releasing the
fuel filler flap.
In case the central locking system does not
release the fuel filler flap, you can open it
manually.
The fuel filler flap release is located behind a
cover in the right side trim panel of the cargo
compartment.
X Open the tailgate (Y page 90).
X
Remove right side trim panel
(Y page 393).
1 Fuel filler flap release
X
Pull red fuel filler flap release 1 in
direction of arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X
Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 265).
For safety reasons, have the active head
restraints checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end
collision.
G Warning!
When pushing back the head restraint
cushion, make sure your fingers do not
become caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
i Pressing the head restraint cushion back
requires high force. If you encounter
difficulties when pushing the head restraint
back, please have the procedure
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
385
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
restraint cover in direction of arrow 3 until
it engages.
i For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Repeat this procedure on the active head
restraint for the second front seat.
For information on active head restraints, see
“Active head restraints” (Y page 66).
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
1 Pull
2 Adjust downward
3 Press
X
Pull the top of the head restraint cushion in
direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go.
X
Adjust the head restraint cushion
downward in direction of arrow 2 as far as
it will go.
X
Firmly press the top of the active head
restraint cushion towards the head
386
G Warning
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special
handling and regard for the environment.
Check with your local government’s
disposal guidelines. California residents,
see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
of disposal. Many states require sellers of
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
When inserting the batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
X
Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
X
X
Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.
Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.
X
Check the operation of the SmartKey as
well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
i The required replacement batteries are
X
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
SmartKey housing.
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 384).
3 Batteries
4 Contact springs
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
X
Pull out batteries 3.
X
Insert new batteries 3 under contact
springs 4 with the positive terminal (+)
side facing up.
X
Return battery compartment 2 into
SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
Z
387
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safety notes
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling to a large
degree.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
headlamp adjustment.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
Rtouch
Rdrop
or move it when hot
the bulb
Rscratch
the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it
is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
388
the lamp and its components. We
recommend that you have such work done
by a qualified technician.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of high
humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
the lights on should clear up the fogging.
Bulbs
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Lamp
Type
1 Parking and standing
lamp
W5W
2 Halogen headlamp:
High-beam lamp/Highbeam flasher lamp
H7 (55 W)
3457 AK
S-8
c Rear fog lamp (driver’s
side only)
P 21 W
7 Front fog lamp
H11 (55 W)
d License plate lamps
C5W
Corner-illuminating
front fog lamp
H11 (55 W)
Notes on bulb replacement
ROnly use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and
H7 (55 W)
3 Halogen headlamp:
Low beam
H7 (55 W)
8 High-mounted brake
lamp
LED
D1S-35 W
9 Backup lamp
P 21 W
LED
5 Side marker lamp
WY 5 W
with the specified watt rating.
Rear lamps
Lamp
4 Additional turn signal
lamp
Type
6 Turn signal lamp
Bi-Xenon headlamp:
High-beam flasher
lamp/High-beam
flasher spot lamp
Bi-Xenon headlamp:
Low and high beam17
Lamp
Type
Type
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
RAlways
use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.
a Tail lamp, parking and
P 21 W
standing lamp, brake
lamp, side marker lamp
RIf
b Turn signal lamp
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You
PY 21 W
the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts
of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
17 Vehicles
with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Low beam and high beam use the same D1S-35 W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
389
Z
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
lamp, do the following:
X Switch off the ignition.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
M.
X
Open the hood (Y page 267).
G Warning!
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in
Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
It is recommended to have such work done
by a qualified technician.
X
Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
6.
X
Place bulb socket 6 back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X
Align housing cover 1 and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps
only)
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb
(halogen headlamps)/high-beam
flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon headlamps)
6 Bulb socket for low-beam headlamp
7 Bulb socket for high-beam headlamp
X
Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise
and remove it.
X
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise
and remove it.
X
Turn bulb socket 6 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
X
Turn bulb socket 7 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 6.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 7.
1 Housing cover for low-beam halogen or Bi-
Xenon headlamp
2 Housing cover for high-beam halogen
bulb (high beam and high-beam flasher)
3 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp
bulb
4 Bulb socket for front turn signal lamp bulb
5 Bulb socket for side marker lamp bulb
390
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
X
Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
7.
X
Place bulb socket 7 back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Removing front fog lamp cover
Accessing and replacing the front fog
lamp bulb
Parking and standing lamp bulb,
front turn signal lamp bulb,
side marker lamp bulb
X
Turn respective bulb socket 3, 4 or 5
(Y page 390) with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
X
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
X
Gently press the new bulb into the bulb
socket.
X
Place bulb socket 3, 4 or 5 back into
the housing and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
1 Cover
2 Front fog lamp or corner-illuminating front
fog lamp
X
X
Insert a suitable object (e.g. a screwdriver)
at point indicated by the arrow and pry out
cover 1.
Cover 1 is released.
Swing cover 1 outwards and take it off.
1 Front fog lamp
2 Retaining screws
X
Remove retaining screws 2.
X
Remove front fog lamp 1 from the
bumper.
X
Pull electrical connector off.
Front fog lamp bulb
! If not done carefully and properly, damage
to the bumper can result. It is
recommended to have this work carried out
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
391
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following:
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
M.
X
Turn lock 1 by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X
Remove cover 2.
Tail lamp unit
3 Bulb socket for front fog lamp bulb
X
Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3.
X
Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
3.
X
Place bulb socket 3 back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X
Plug in the electrical connector.
X
Insert front fog lamp 1 into bumper.
X
Fasten retaining screws 2.
X
Reinsert the cover and press it in until it
engages.
To access the tail lamp units, you first have to
remove the cover in the corresponding side
trim panel of the cargo compartment.
X Open the tailgate.
Opening the driver’s side trim panel
1 Lock
2 Cover
392
3 Lock
4 Storage compartment
X
Remove everything from storage
compartment 4.
X
Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock 3.
X
Turn lock 3 by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X
Remove storage compartment 4.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Opening the passenger side trim panel
1 Lock
2 Cover
X
Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock 1.
X
Turn lock 1 by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X
Remove cover 2.
Replacing bulbs
Example illustration rear lamp driver’s side
1 Bulb socket
2 Clamp
X
Press and hold clamps 2.
X
Pull bulb socket 1 outwards.
Bulb socket
3 Backup lamp
4 Tail lamp, brake lamp, parking and
standing lamp
5 Tail lamp, brake lamp, parking and
standing lamp
6 Rear turn signal lamp
7 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
X
Depending on which bulb needs to be
replaced, gently press onto the respective
bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of
bulb socket 1.
X
Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
1 and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X
Align bulb socket 1 and press it into rear
lamp until it audibly engages.
393
Z
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
X
Make sure bulb 1 socket is attached
properly.
X
Close the respective cover in the cargo
compartment.
X
Close the tailgate.
Adjusting headlamp aim
If the beam does not show a beam pattern as
indicated in the figure left, then follow the
steps below:
X
Open the hood (Y page 267).
License plate lamps
1 V Vertical centerline
2 H Horizontal mounting height, measured
from the center
1 Screws
2 Lamp cover
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. High beam adjustments
simultaneously aim the low beam. To check
and readjust a headlamp, follow the steps
described:
X
Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 feet
(7.6 m) from a vertical test screen or wall.
X
Make sure the vehicle has a normal tailgate
load.
X
Switch on the low beam headlamps B.
Example illustration headlamp driver’side
3 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
4 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
X
Always turn adjustment screws 3 and 4
simultaneously for vertical adjustment until
the headlamp is adjusted as shown in 1.
Turn clockwise for upward movement and
counterclockwise for downward
movement.
Graduations:
X
Loosen screws 1 of lamp cover to be
removed.
X
Remove lamp cover 2.
X
Replace the bulb.
X
Reinstall lamp cover 2.
RScrew
3: 0.50° pitch
Retighten screws 1.
RScrew
4: 0.67° pitch
X
394
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
The left and right headlamps must be
adjusted individually.
i If it is not possible to obtain a proper
headlamp adjustment, have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
windshield glass or the rear window
without a wiper blade inserted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
this work carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Replacing wiper blades
Safety notes
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have status
0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X
G Warning!
Wiper blades are components that are
subject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
able to observe surrounding traffic
conditions and could cause an accident.
! Never open the hood when a front wiper
arm is folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield or the rear window.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (Y page 96).
Removing wiper blades
Front wiper blades
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
X
Fold the wiper arms forward until they
engage.
Z
395
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
Front wiper blades
1 Wiper blade
2 Tab
3 Wiper arm
X
Press tabs 2 together.
X
Tilt wiper blade 1 away from wiper arm
3.
X
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
X
Fold wiper arm 1 away from the rear
window until it engages.
X
Turn wiper blade 2 as far as it will go.
X
Hold wiper arm 1 and disengage wiper
blade 2 by carefully sliding it in direction
of arrow.
X
Remove wiper blade 2.
Take off wiper blade 1 in direction of
arrow.
1 Wiper blade
2 Attachment
3 Guide tab
4 Opening
X
With guide tab 3 sliding into opening 4,
place wiper blade 1 onto wiper arm in
direction of arrow.
X
Fold wiper blade 1 towards wiper arm.
Tabs 2 (Y page 396) must engage into
both recesses of attachment 2.
Rear wiper blade
! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It
could tear.
396
Practical hints
Flat tire
X
X
Check whether the wiper blade is securely
fastened.
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
windshield.
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm
when folding it back.
! Make sure the wiper blades are properly
installed. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
Rear wiper blade
X
Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper arm 1.
Flat tire
X
Hold wiper arm 1 and engage wiper blade
2 by pushing it in direction of arrow until
it locks into place.
Safety notes
X
Check whether the wiper blade is securely
fastened.
X
Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear
window.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
! Make sure the wiper blade is properly
installed. An improperly installed wiper
blade may cause rear window damage.
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
MOExtended system or a Minispare wheel.
Vehicles with an MOExtended system do not
have a spare wheel.
For information on your vehicle’s equipment,
see “Rims and tires” (Y page 425).
G Warning!
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling
characteristics change when driving with a
spare wheel mounted. Adapt your driving
style accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Contact the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
397
Z
Practical hints
Flat tire
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
G Warning!
Your vehicle is equipped with air
suspension program. Do not open or close
any doors or the tailgate while mounting a
spare wheel. The vehicle could rise or lower
to a previously selected level. You or others
could be injured as a result.
X
X
Preparing the vehicle
Make sure the vehicle level is set to
highway level (Y page 186).
X
Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when
possible.
X
Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
X
Turn the steering wheel so that the front
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X
Turn off the engine.
398
X
Mounting the spare wheel
Introduction
or
X
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door can then be closed again.
Open doors only when conditions are safe
to do so.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the
starter switch.
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
safe distance from the roadway. Open
doors only when conditions are safe to do
so.
X
Prepare the vehicle as described
(Y page 398).
X
Take the following out of the vehicle:
Rspare wheel
Rjack
Rwheel
wrench
Rcollapsible
Ralignment
wheel chock
bolt
For information on where to find the
respective items, see “Where will I
find ...?” (Y page 326) and (Y page 329).
Lifting the vehicle
G Warning!
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the
jack which has been specifically approved
by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. Make
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
Practical hints
Flat tire
take-up bracket. The jack must always be
vertical when in use, especially on inclines
or declines.
The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle. To help avoid personal
injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle
during a wheel change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
Always firmly set the parking brake and
block the wheels with wheel chocks or
other sizeable objects before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
necessary, use a large underlay. On
slippery surfaces, such as tiled floors, you
should use a non-slip underlay, for example
a rubber mat.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar
objects to support the jack. Otherwise the
jack may not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity if it is not at its full height.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects.
One wheel chock is included with the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 326). For
information on setting up the collapsible
wheel chock, see (Y page 328).
G Warning!
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or
on slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you
or others.
Changing wheel on a level surface
Changing rear wheel on passenger side (example
illustration)
X
Place the wheel chock in front of and
another sizeable object behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed.
Changing wheel on a slight decline
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a slight
decline, place the wheel chock and another
sizeable object as follows:
Z
399
Practical hints
Flat tire
X
Changing wheel on passenger side (example
illustration)
Changing wheel on passenger side (example
illustration)
X
X
Place the wheel chock and another sizeable
object in front of both wheels on the side
opposite to the side on which the wheel is
to be changed.
Place the wheel chock and another sizeable
object in behind both wheels on the side
opposite to the side on which the wheel is
to be changed.
The jack take-up brackets are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
G Warning!
Changing wheel on a slight incline
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a slight
incline, place the wheel chock and another
sizeable object as follows:
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets.
Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the
jack take-up bracket.
If you do not position the jack correctly in
the jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can
fall off the jack and seriously or fatally injure
you or others.
1 Wheel wrench
400
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not
yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately
one full turn with wrench 1).
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
! Do not position the jack on the body of
the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.
2 Take-up bracket
3 Jack
4 Ratchet
X
Attach reversible ratchet 4 to jack 3 in
such a way that the word UP can be seen.
X
Place jack 3 on firm ground.
X
Position jack 3 under take-up bracket
2 so that it is always vertical as seen from
the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
X
Turn ratchet 4 up and down until jack 3
is fully seated in take-up bracket 2 and the
jack base evenly meets the ground
X
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
1 Alignment bolt
X
Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and remove
it.
X
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt
1 supplied with the vehicle tool kit.
X
Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
X
Remove the wheel.
Z
401
Practical hints
Flat tire
Attaching the spare wheel
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt.
G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are
damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly
tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel
to come off. This could cause an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
G Warning!
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
1 Wheel bolt for 19", 20", and 21" light alloy
wheels
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel (located in
vehicle tool kit)
! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the Minispare wheel. The use of
any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2
for the Minispare wheel will damage the
vehicle’s brakes.
G Warning!
Make sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
X
402
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
hub.
X
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment
bolt and push it on.
X
Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
X
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X
Install last wheel bolt and tighten it slightly.
Lowering the vehicle
X
Attach ratchet to vehicle jack so that the
word DOWN can be seen.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lower the vehicle until the vehicle is resting
fully on its own weight:
X
Fully collapse the jack to storage position,
see (Y page 329).
X
Turn ratchet in direction DOWN.
X
X
Remove the jack.
Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
in the designated storage space.
For information on storing the spare wheel
after it has been replaced by a regular road
wheel, see (Y page 329).
i The damaged road wheel cannot be
stored in the spare wheel well under the
cargo compartment floor. It should be
transported in the cargo compartment
wrapped in a protective wrap.
i Vehicles with TPMS:
1 – 5 Wheel bolts
X
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
following the diagonal sequence illustrated
(1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe
a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Do not restart the tire inflation pressure
monitor until a full size wheel/tire with
functioning sensor has been placed back
into service on the vehicle.
MOExtended system
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system in
conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator
(Y page 282) or the TPMS (Y page 283).
The maximum distance in emergency mode
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 30 miles
(50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving
distance in emergency mode begins is when
the warning message appears in the
multifunction display indicating that there is
a loss of tire inflation pressure.
X Do not exceed the maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
G Warning!
In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
characteristics are diminished in such
situations as:
Rdriving
around curves
Rwhile
braking
Rwhile
accelerating rapidly
Z
403
Practical hints
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
Therefore, your driving style must be
adapted accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering
and driving maneuvers, as well as driving
over obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or offroad areas). This is especially important if
the vehicle is heavily loaded.
The emergency driving distance that can be
achieved greatly depends on the demands
placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can
be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is
driven cautiously, somewhat longer.
Do not continue driving in emergency mode
if
Ryou
notice knocking sounds
Rthe
vehicle starts to shake
Rsmoke
RESP®
Ryou
develops and you smell rubber
is intervening continuously
notice tears on the tire sidewalls
After driving in emergency mode, you must
have the rims inspected by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case.
When replacing individual or all tires on the
vehicle, make sure only tires marked with
404
“MOExtended” are mounted in the size
specified for your vehicle (Y page 425).
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine only)
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty
is not recommended. Otherwise, air may be
sucked into the fuel system. If this happens,
the malfunction indicator lamp ú (USA
only) or ± (Canada only) comes on and the
engine may not start immediately after
refueling the vehicle.
After refueling:
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
The gear position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P.
X
Do not depress the accelerator.
X
If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button from the starter switch.
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 for at least 10 seconds.
X
Return the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0.
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold it there for a maximum
of 40 seconds or until the engine runs
surge-free.
If the engine does not start:
Practical hints
AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
X
Wait for approximately 2 minutes.
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold it there for a maximum
of 40 seconds or until the engine runs
surge-free.
If the engine still does not start, do not make
any further attempts to start the engine.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance (Y page 253).
i When the malfunction indicator lamp
ú (USA only) or ± (Canada only) in
the instrument cluster has been illuminated
for the above condition, it will remain
illuminated until the engine was cycled on
and off four times in a row.
AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
system requires a reducing agent (AdBlue®)
in order to function properly. Refilling with
AdBlue® is part of the regular maintenance
service work. A tankful of AdBlue® should
suffice until the next maintenance service
under normal driving conditions.
When the AdBlue® tank is low, the message
Check Additive see Operator’s
Manual appears in the multifunction display.
When the AdBlue® level drops to the
minimum level, the message Remaining
Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction
display.
i When the message Remaining Starts:
20 appears in the multifunction display, you
can start the engine 20 more times. If you
do not add AdBlue®, the engine cannot be
started beyond that point. Fill the
AdBlue® tank with approximately 1 gal
(3.79 l) AdBlue® (corresponds to
approximately 2 AdBlue® refill containers)
or have the AdBlue® tank filled by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i For refilling outside the maintenance
service intervals, refill the AdBlue® tank
with approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®
(corresponds to approximately 2 AdBlue®
refill containers).
Always use the particular AdBlue® refill
containers for refilling outside the
maintenance service interval. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance if necessary
(Y page 253).
Additional information on BlueTEC exhaust
gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® is available
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refilling with AdBlue®
G Warning!
Make sure
RAdBlue® does not come into contact with
skin, eyes, or clothing
keep AdBlue® out of the reach of
children
Rto
Z
405
Practical hints
AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system could be damaged.
Damage caused by using additives or
diluting with water are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If you and/or others have come into
contact with AdBlue®:
AdBlue® has gotten into contact with
eyes, flush with plenty of water
immediately and seek medical help.
RIf
RClean
affected skin immediately with
plenty of water.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
with a moist cloth and cold water
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
already, use cold water and a sponge.
AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
the affected surfaces.
AdBlue® was swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and
drink plenty of water. Consult a
physician.
RIf
G Warning!
When opening the filler cap of the
AdBlue® tank ammonia gas vapors may
escape. Refill AdBlue® in a well ventilated
area only. Ammonia gas vapors have a
pungent odor and are particularly irritating
for your skin, mucous membranes, and
eyes. Inhaling ammonia gas vapors will
cause burning eyes, nose, and throat, as
well as coughing and watering eyes.
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
406
! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must
1 AdBlue® filler cap cover
X
Turn cover 1 counterclockwise and
remove it.
not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If
AdBlue® reaches the diesel fuel tank, the
engine could be damaged which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For more information on AdBlue®, see
(Y page 437).
The AdBlue® filler neck is located under the
cargo compartment floor.
X Switch off the ignition.
X
Open the tailgate (Y page 90).
X
Lift the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 327).
2 AdBlue® filler cap
Practical hints
AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
X
Turn filler cap 2 counterclockwise and
open it.
Filler cap 2 is tethered with a plastic strap.
X
Push AdBlue® refill container 3 down.
The AdBlue® tank is filled. This may take up
to 1 minute.
i When you stop pushing the AdBlue® refill
X
Place cover 1 as illustrated and turn it
clockwise to its stop.
X
Start the engine.
i If the message Check Additive See
Operator’s Manual still appears in the
multifunction display, refill with one more
container of AdBlue®.
container down, the filling process is
stopped and you can remove the refill
container.
X
3
AdBlue®
refill container
X
Pull dust cap off of AdBlue® refill container
3.
X
Place AdBlue® refill container 3 on the
filler neck as illustrated and tighten it
moderately (hand-tight) by turning it
clockwise.
Release AdBlue® refill container 3.
X
Turn
refill container 3
counterclockwise and remove it.
X
Place filler cap 2 (Y page 406) on filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
AdBlue®
X
Lower cargo compartment floor.
X
Close the tailgate.
i Have the AdBlue® level checked and, if
necessary, filled completely afterward at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Make sure to tighten the AdBlue® refill
container only moderately, i.e. hand-tight,
as you could otherwise damage it.
1 AdBlue® filler cap cover
Z
407
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
Safety notes
A battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for shortdistance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing a battery, always use a
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
G Warning!
Observe all safety instructions and
precautions when handling automotive
batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and
smoking are prohibited
when handling batteries.
Avoid creating sparks.
408
Battery acid is caustic. Do
not allow it to come into
contact with skin, eyes or
clothing.
Wear suitable protective
clothing, especially
gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills
immediately with clear
water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Keep children away.
Follow the instructions in
this Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly. Large
12-volt storage batteries contain lead.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
G Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting.
You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
immediately flush affected area with water
and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
G Warning!
Do not place metal objects on the battery
as this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the
risk of acid burns in the event of an
accident.
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead
Acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as
“fleece” battery.
Such batteries do not require topping-up of
the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries
Practical hints
Battery
therefore do not have cell caps and the
battery cover is non-removable. Do not
attempt to open the battery as otherwise
the battery will be damaged.
Even though VRLA batteries do not require
topping-up of the electrolyte level and
cannot be opened to check the electrolyte
level, the battery condition must be
checked periodically by performing a
battery conductance test. Refer to
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition
testing intervals.
The factory-equipped VRLA battery is leakproofed. Only use a battery as replacement
that has the same security features and is
of identical size, voltage, and capacity as
the factory-equipped battery.
! As with any other battery, have the
battery disconnect at a qualified workshop
or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if
you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time to prevent
battery discharge. You may also connect an
accessory battery charge unit expressly
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model to maintain the battery
charge. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for further information.
The battery, the battery ventilation hose
and the lateral plug must always be
securely installed when the vehicle is in
operation.
RSynchronize
the power tilt/sliding
sunroof (Y page 226).
RSynchronize
the exterior rear view
mirrors (Y page 112).
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch or
KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely
damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
maintenance intervals or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.
i After battery power was interrupted, do
the following:
the clock (Y page 160).
Vehicles with COMAND system with
navigation module: Time and date are set
automatically.
RSet
RSynchronize
the door windows
(Y page 126).
Charging the battery
G Warning!
Never charge a battery while still installed
in the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during
charging and cause explosions that may
result in paint damage, corrosion or
personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
Have batteries charged at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
409
Z
Practical hints
Jump starting
batteries yourself, follow the operating
instructions for your charging device.
Only use a battery charge unit with a
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
X Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Jump starting
G Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting. You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
immediately flush affected area with water,
and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
otherwise seriously damage the automatic
18 Vehicles
410
with gasoline engine only.
transmission which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Jump starting should only be performed
using the jump-start terminals located in
the engine compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick-charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter18 and may
present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
any other metal part while the other end is
still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started with jumper cables and the battery of
another vehicle. Observe the following:
RJump
starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter19
are cold.
RDo
not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
ROnly
jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
with a more powerful battery could damage
the vehicle’s electrical system, which will
not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
ROnly
use jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
RAlways
make sure the jumper cables are
not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
that move when an engine is started or
running.
The jump-start contacts are located in the
engine compartment on the passenger side.
19 Vehicles
1 Negative terminal
2 Positive terminal
1 Negative terminal
2 Positive terminal
3 Positive terminal cover
4 Positive terminal of charged battery
5 Negative terminal of charged battery
X
Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
! Never invert the terminal connections!
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
X
X
Open the hood.
X
Flip up cover 3 of positive terminal 2 in
direction of arrow.
Connect positive terminal 4 of the
charged battery with positive terminal 2
with a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to
positive terminal 4 of the charged battery
first.
X
X
Remove cover from negative terminal 1.
Start engine of the vehicle with the charged
battery and run at idle speed.
X
Connect negative terminal 5 of the
charged battery with negative terminal 1
with a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to
with gasoline engine only.
411
Z
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
negative terminal 5 of the charged battery
first.
X
Start engine of the vehicle with the
discharged battery and run at idle speed.
You can now turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not switch on the
headlamps under any circumstances.
X
Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 1 and 5 and then
from positive terminals 2 and 4.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
X
Have the battery checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Towing the vehicle
Safety notes
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
be transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. This method is preferable to other
types of towing.
! To prevent damage during transport, do
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
If circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle
may be towed with all wheels on the ground
only so far as necessary to have the vehicle
moved to a safe location where the
recommended towing methods can be
employed.
! Before towing the vehicle observe the
following instructions:
RDo
not tow-start the vehicle. You could
otherwise seriously damage the
automatic transmission which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
RDo
not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
412
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
RTowing
of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
could damage the transfer case, which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
ground. Observe instructions for towing the
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
i If the battery is disconnected or
discharged
Rthe
SmartKey will not turn in the starter
switch
Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
park position P
RFor
more information see
“Battery” (Y page 408) or “Jump
starting” (Y page 410).
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
Depending on whether you are towing a
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
which are located behind covers on each
bumper.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
vehicle tool kit, located in the cargo
compartment underneath the cargo
compartment floor (Y page 326).
X Take the towing eye bolt out of the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
X
Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the
arrow.
X
Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the
arrow.
X
Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
X
Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Removing cover in rear bumper
Fixing towing eye bolt
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible serious burns or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust
pipe is extremely hot.
Removing cover in front bumper
Example illustration front bumper
1 Towing eye bolt
X
Take the towing eye bolt 1 and the wheel
wrench from the vehicle tool kit.
X
Screw towing eye bolt 1 clockwise into
threaded hole to its stop.
X
Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
tighten towing eye bolt 1 by turning it
clockwise.
1 Cover
1 Cover
413
Z
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Removing towing eye bolt
X
Loosen towing eye bolt 1
counterclockwise with wheel wrench.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is
in starter switch position 2.
X
Unscrew towing eye bolt 1.
X
G Warning!
Reinstalling cover: Engage cover 1
(Y page 413) at top and press at bottom.
X
Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
back into the vehicle tool kit.
Towing with all wheels on the ground
G Warning!
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
Rthe
engine will not run
Rthere
is a malfunction in the brake
system
Rthere
is a malfunction in the power
supply or in the vehicle’s electrical
system
This is necessary to adequately control the
towed vehicle.
414
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and
steering systems. In this case, it is
important to keep in mind that a
considerably higher degree of effort is
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Adapt your driving accordingly.
X
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
If engaged, release the parking brake.
X
Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 118).
! Keep in mind that it is important to have
the ignition switched on. Removing the
SmartKey from the starter switch or
opening a front door with the ignition
switched off will automatically shift the
automatic transmission into park position
P.
! The vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
i To signal turns while being towed with the
hazard warning flasher in use you can
activate the combination switch for the left
or right turn signal in the usual manner –
only the selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
warning flasher will operate again.
Stranded vehicle
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be
done with the greatest of care, especially if
the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Practical hints
Fuses
Note the following when freeing a stranded
vehicle:
RAvoid
pulling the vehicle abruptly or
diagonally, since it could result in damage
to the chassis alignment.
RNever
try to free a vehicle that is still
coupled to a trailer.
RIf possible, a vehicle equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward in
its own previously made tracks.
Fuses
Introduction
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and
systems secured by that fuse will stop
operating.
G Warning!
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the
cause determined and remedied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A blown fuse must be replaced by an
appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
the amperage recommended in the fuse
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
to advise you on this subject.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
cause determined and rectified by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A fuse chart is located in the cargo
compartment with the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 326). The fuse chart explains the fuse
allocation and fuse amperages.
Before replacing fuses
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P.
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed again.
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Z
415
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment
! Do not use sharp objects such as a
screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in
the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
box cover or the dashboard.
The fuse box is located behind a cover in the
dashboard on the front passenger side.
X
Using your hands, pull cover 1 out and
remove.
X
Closing: Hook cover 1 into the opening at
the front.
X
Press cover 1 back on until it engages.
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described to prevent
moisture or dirt from entering the fuse box
and possibly impairing fuse operation.
Fuse box in engine compartment
X
2 Clamps
X
With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
the fuse box 1.
X
Pull clamps 2 in direction of arrow.
X
Lift fuse box cover 1 up.
X
Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is
positioned properly.
X
Press fuse box cover 1 down and secure
with clamps 2.
! The fuse box cover must be installed
properly to prevent moisture and/or dirt
from entering the fuse box and possibly
impairing fuse operation.
Opening: Open the hood.
X
1 Fuse box cover
X
Opening: Open the front passenger door.
X
Open the glove box.
X
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into the
edge of cover 1 at the position indicated
by the arrow.
X
Loosen cover 1 from the dashboard using
the lever.
416
Example illustration fuse box GL 450 (GL 320
BlueTEC, GL 550 similar)
1 Fuse box cover
Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in cargo compartment
Emergency engine shutdown
If the engine cannot be turned off as
described (Y page 133), you may use the
following emergency procedure.
X Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 326).
X
Open the fuse box in engine compartment.
X
Remove fuse 120.
Find its location in the fuse chart.
1 Lock
2 Cover
X
Opening: Open the cargo compartment.
X
Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock 1.
X
Turn lock 1 by 90° in direction of arrow.
X
Remove cover 2.
X
Closing: Install cover 2 in reverse order.
Z
417
418
Technical data
Vehicle equipment ............................
Parts service .....................................
Warranty coverage ...........................
Identification labels ..........................
Engine ................................................
Rims and tires ...................................
Electrical system ..............................
Main dimensions ...............................
Weights ..............................................
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......
420
420
420
421
423
425
429
430
431
432
419
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
Parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz
Parts required for maintenance and repair
work. In addition, strategically located parts
distribution centers provide quick and
reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has
been specifically developed, manufactured or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
20 Applicable
420
to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Truck Limited Warranty
REmission
System Warranty
REmission
Performance Warranty
RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty20
RState
Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties, copies of which are
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Technical data
Identification labels
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information booklet
Identification labels
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
2 Paintwork code
1 Certification label (on driver’s door
B-pillar)
3 VIN
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can
be found in the following locations:
Ron the certification label
Rembossed
underneath the passenger-side
second-row seat (Y page 422)
Ron
the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 422)
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
2 Paintwork code
3 VIN
Z
421
Technical data
Identification labels
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration. Refer to
certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
6 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standard
7 Engine number (engraved on engine)
8 VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
Passenger-side second-row seat
4 VIN
5 Carpet
X
Fold carpet 5 forward in direction of
arrow.
VIN 4 is now visible.
422
i When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine number.
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model
GL 320 BlueTEC (164.825)21
GL 450 (164.871)21
GL 550 (164.886)21
Engine
642
273
273
Mode of operation
Diesel 4-stroke engine
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
6
8
8
Bore
3.27 in (83.00 mm)
3.66 in (92.90 mm)
3.86 in (98.00 mm)
Stroke
3.62 in (92.00 mm)
3.39 in (86.00 mm)
3.56 in (90.50 mm)
Total piston
displacement
182.3 cu in (2 987 cm3)
284.5 cu in (4 663 cm3)
333.2 cu in (5 461 cm3)
Compression ratio
16.5:1
10.7:1
10.7:1
Output acc. to
SAE J 1349
210 hp / 3 400 rpm
(157 kW / 3 400 rpm)
335 hp / 6 000 rpm
(250 kW / 6 000 rpm)22
382 hp / 6 000 rpm
(285 kW / 6 000 rpm)22
Maximum torque acc. to 400 lb-ft / 1 600 rpm - 2 400 rpm
(543 Nm / 1 600 rpm - 2 400 rpm)
SAE J 1349
339 lb-ft / 2 700 rpm - 5 000 rpm
(460 Nm / 2 700 rpm - 5 000 rpm)
391 lb-ft / 2 800 rpm - 4 800 rpm
(530 Nm / 2 800 rpm - 4 800 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6 500 rpm
6 500 rpm
4 500 rpm
21 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
22 Premium
fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
423
Z
Technical data
Engine
Model
GL 320 BlueTEC (164.825)21
GL 450 (164.871)21
GL 550 (164.886)21
Firing order
1-4-2-5-3-6
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2 035 mm
2 404 mm
2 404 mm
424
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Notes
! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
to provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety systems
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
vehicle and tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding
the following on the tire’s sidewall:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
equipment tires
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with limited run-flat
characteristics) original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
For information on driving with MOExtended
tires, see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 403).
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.
When retrofitting with tires that do not have
run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires,
you should also equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental
effects, such as
Rpoor handling characteristics
Rincreased
noise
Rincreased
fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
dimensional variations and different tire
deformation characteristics that could
cause them to come into contact with the
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the
tires or the vehicle may be the result.
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. A placard with the recommended
tire inflation pressures is located on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may
have supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for driving at high speeds or for
vehicle loads less than the maximum
loaded vehicle condition. If such
information is provided, it can be found on
the placard located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should
be checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with the vehicle.
For information on recommended tire
inflation pressure and supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for special
driving situations, see (Y page 279).
i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your
vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are
not available as standard or optional
factory equipment, but can be purchased
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
approved for your vehicle model may
require the purchase of two or four wheel
rims of the recommended size for use with
these winter tires. This depends on vehicle
model and the standard or optional factoryequipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
your vehicle. For more information contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
425
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model
GL 450
GL 320 BlueTEC
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 19 H2
8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset
2.20 in (56 mm)
2.20 in (56 mm)
All-season tires23
275/55 R19 111H M+S24
—
Winter tires23,25
265/55 R19 109H M+S.
265/55 R19 109H M+S.26
All-terrain tires23,25
275/55 R19 111H M+S24
275/55 R19 111H M+S24,26
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 20 H2
8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset
2.20 in (56 mm)
2.20 in (56 mm)
Summer tires23
275/50 R20 109W24
—
All season tires23
—
275/50 R20 109H M+S MOExtended24,27
23 Radial-ply
tires
not be used with snow chains.
25 Not available as factory equipment.
26 Standard tire without run-flat characteristics. Equipping vehicle with TIREFIT is strongly recommended.
27 Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or Run Flat Indicator (Canada vehicles) only.
24 Must
426
Technical data
Rims and tires
Model
GL 450
GL 550
GL 550
AMG rims (light alloy)
10 J x 21 H2
—
Rims (light alloy)
—
8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset
1.46 in (37 mm)
2.20 in (56 mm)
All season tires28,29
295/40 R21 111V XL (Extra Load) M+S
—
Winter tires28,30
—
265/55 R19 109H M+S.
All-terrain tires28,30
—
275/55 R19 111H M+S
28 Radial-ply
tires
not be used with snow chains.
30 Not available as factory equipment.
Z
29 Must
427
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare
wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the
tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.
i The GL 320 BlueTEC does not have a spare wheel.
Model
GL 450
GL 550
Rim
4.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset
1.58 in (40 mm)
Minispare tire31
T 165/90 D19 119M
or
T 165/90 R19 119M
Recommended tire inflation pressure
61 psi (4.2 bar)
31 Must
428
not be used with snow chains.
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model
GL 320 BlueTEC
GL 450
GL 550
Alternator
14 V / 220 A
14 V / 180 A
Starter motor
12 V / 2.0 kW
12 V / 1.4 kW
Battery
12 V / 95 Ah
12 V / 95 Ah
Type
—
NGK PLKR 7A
Electrode gap
—
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque
—
15 lb-ft - 18 lb-ft (20 Nm - 25 Nm)
Spark plugs
Z
429
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions
Model
GL 450
GL 320 BlueTEC
GL 550
Overall vehicle length
200.6 in (5 096 mm)
200.6 in (5 096 mm)
Overall vehicle width, exterior rear view mirrors folded out
83.6 in (2 124 mm)
83.6 in (2 124 mm)
Overall vehicle height, depending on the set vehicle level
72.4 in - 75.6 in
(1 840 mm - 1 920 mm)
72.4 in - 75.6 in
(1 840 mm - 1 920 mm)
Overall vehicle height, depending on the set vehicle level
(vehicles with enhanced off-road package)
72.4 in - 76.8 in
(1 840 mm - 1 950 mm)
72.4 in - 76.8 in
(1 840 mm - 1 950 mm)
Wheelbase
121.1 in (3 075 mm)
121.1 in (3 075 mm)
Track, front
65.0 in (1 651 mm)
64.8 in (1 645 mm)
Track, rear
65.1 in (1 654 mm)
64.9 in (1 648 mm)
Ground clearance, depending on the set vehicle level
8.0 in - 10.9 in
(202 mm - 277 mm)
8.0 in - 10.9 in
(202 mm - 277 mm)
Ground clearance, depending on the set vehicle level
(vehicles with enhanced off-road package)
8.0 in - 12.1 in
(202 mm - 307 mm)
8.0 in - 12.1 in
(202 mm - 307 mm)
Turning circle
39.7 ft (12.1 m)
39.7 ft (12.1 m)
430
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Model
All models
Roof load
max. 198 lb (90 kg)
Z
431
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by MercedesBenz.
For information on tested and approved
products, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center or visit www.mbusa.com.
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with
respect to handling, storing, and disposing
of service fluids. Otherwise you could
endanger persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
children.
For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct
contact with your skin or clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
GL 320 BlueTEC
GL 550
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Approved engine oils
GL 450
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
Automatic transmission
All models
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Front axle
All models
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
Hypoid gear oil
Rear axle
All models
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
Hypoid gear oil
Rear axle with differential lock All models
1.7 US qt (1.6 l)
Hypoid gear oil
Transfer case single speed
0.53 US qt (0.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Engine with oil filter
432
All models
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Transfer case double speed
All models
1.6 US qt (1.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Power steering
All models
approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid or approved
Dexron III ATF
Brake system
All models
—
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system
GL 320 BlueTEC
approx. 10.0 US qt (9.5 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
GL 450
GL 550
approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l)
Fuel tank,
including a reserve of
All models
26.4 US gal (100.0 l)
AdBlue® tank
GL 320 BlueTEC
3.4 US gal (13.0 l)
8.3 US gal (31.5 l)
Gasoline engine:
Premium unleaded gasoline
(Minimum Posted Octane 91
[Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON])
Diesel engine:
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM)
AdBlue® complying with ISO 22241
Z
433
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Air conditioning system
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
All models
—
R-134a refrigerant and special
PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
7.6 US qt (7.2 l)
MB Windshield Washer
Concentrate32
Washer fluid mixing ratio
(Y page 440)
Washer system and headlamp All models
cleaning system
Approved engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for our
service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters required
for vehicles with Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
recommendations for scheduled oil
changes. Failure to do so will result in
engine or emission control system damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
Use the table below to determine the
MB sheet number.
Model
Engine
type
MB sheet
number
GL 320 BlueTEC
642
229.51
GL 450
273
229.5
GL 550
273
229.5
! Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by the
Maintenance System will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
32 Use
i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
outside of oil containers.
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point.
434
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Viscosity grades for engine oils
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
according to the lowest air temperature
expected before the next oil change.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning
system.
! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
G Warning!
Engine oil additives
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine. Damage or
malfunctions resulting from blending oil
additives are not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere.
Under extremely strenuous operating
conditions, this moisture content can lead
to the formation of bubbles in the system,
thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
Maintenance Booklet for replacement
interval.
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
is recommended. Any authorized MercedesBenz Center will provide you with additional
information.
Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
engine)
G Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and
poisonous. It burns violently and can cause
serious personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
! To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used.
If premium unleaded gasoline is not
available and low octane gasoline is used,
follow these precautions:
RHave
the fuel tank only partially filled
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
Z
435
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
as possible.
RAvoid
full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
RDo
not exceed an engine speed of
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
light load such as two persons and no
luggage.
not exceed 2/3 of maximum
accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
RDo
Fuel requirements
Gasoline engine
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
436
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Diesel engine
Only use commercially available vehicular
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). Failure to use
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
can severely damage the vehicle’s exhaust
after-treatment device.
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is offered
in the winter months. Check with your fuel
retailer.
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.
The fuel system and engine will otherwise
be damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
B5 Biodiesel
Mercedes-Benz approves the use of B5
biodiesel (standard diesel with a maximum of
up to 5% biodiesel content) in all Common Rail
Injection (CDI) and BlueTEC diesel engines.
Diesel fuels containing a higher percentage of
biodiesel content will cause damage to your
engine and are not approved.
As biodiesel can be refined from a variety of
raw materials resulting in widely varying
properties, the only approved biodiesel
content is one that meets ASTM D6751
specification. It must also have the necessary
oxidation stability (min. 6h, proved with
EN14112 method) to prevent damage to the
system from deposits and/or corrosion.
Please ask your service station for further
information. If the B5 biodiesel blend is not
sufficiently labeled to clearly indicate that it
meets the above standards, please do not use
it. The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty does
not cover damage caused by the use of fuels
not meeting Mercedes-Benz approved fuel
standards.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)
A major concern among engine
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only
the use of quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon
deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives carbon deposits can
build up, especially on the intake valves and
in the combustion area, leading to engine
performance problems such as:
RWarm-up
hesitation
RUnstable
idle
RKnocking/pinging
RMisfire
RPower
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary cost and may
be harmful to the engine operation.
! Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional
fuel additives other than those tested and
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
vehicles are not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
or Extended Limited warranties.
AdBlue®
AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic,
colorless and odorless, water-soluble liquid.
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
High ambient temperatures
If AdBlue® in the reservoir heats up to above
122‡ (50†) for a long period of time, for
example due to direct sunlight, ammonia gas
vapors may escape when opening the
AdBlue® tank.
G Warning!
When opening the filler cap of the
AdBlue® tank ammonia gas vapors may
escape. Refill AdBlue® in a well ventilated
area only. Ammonia gas vapors have a
pungent odor and are particularly irritating
for your skin, mucous membranes, and
eyes. Inhaling ammonia gas vapors will
cause burning eyes, nose, and throat, as
well as coughing and watering eyes.
ISO 22241. Do not blend with additives.
loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasoline which contains these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a
listing of approved product(s). Follow
directions on product label.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
AdBlue®,
AdBlue®
contact with
or remove
with a moist cloth and cold water
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
already, use cold water and a sponge.
AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
the affected surfaces.
Low ambient temperatures
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of
approximately 12‡ (-11†). Your vehicle is
factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating
system. The vehicle can thus be operated at
temperatures below 12‡ (-11†).
Z
437
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Special additives
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system could be damaged.
Damage caused by using additives or
diluting with water are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Purity
The purity of AdBlue® is of particular
importance for avoiding malfunctions in the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
If AdBlue® is pumped out of the tank, e.g.
during repair work, the same liquid must not
be used to refill the tank as its purity is no
longer guaranteed.
! Impurities caused for example by other
service products, cleaning agents, and dust
result in increased emissions,
malfunctions, catalyst damage, or engine
damage.
438
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
RCorrosion
RFreeze
protection
protection
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection to
approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
protection.
! Add premixed coolant solution only.
Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze separately from each other,
could cause engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
pressurized cooling system is reached at
approximately 266‡ (130†).
The coolant solution must be used year round
to provide the necessary corrosion protection
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
of equal specification are used to renew the
coolant concentration or bring it back up to
the proper level.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz
approved products of equal specification,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 50%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately -35‡
[-37†]).
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
Therefore, do not use more than this amount
of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
system checked for signs of leakage). Please
make sure the mixture is in accordance with
label instructions.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water.
If you are not sure about the water quality,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
parts. The use of aluminum components in
motor vehicle engines necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
result in a significantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Model
Cooling system
Before the start of the winter season (or once
a year in hot southern regions), you should
have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked.
The coolant is also regularly checked each
time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
Approximate freeze protection
-35‡ (-37†)
-49‡ (-45†)
GL 320 BlueTEC
5.0 US qt (4.75 l)
5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
GL 450
GL 550
6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
Z
439
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Washer fluid mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB
SummerFit” and water:
R1
part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB
SummerFit” and commercially available
premixed washer solvent/antifreeze:
R1
part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
440
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine MercedesBenz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work
or repairs. Improper or incomplete service
or the use of incorrect or inappropriate
parts or materials may damage the vehicle
or its equipment, which may in turn result
in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying
out any type of service, turn to the advice
of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in
design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time April 01, 2008
GSP / OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
É1645847182&ËÍ
1645847182
Order no. 6515 4291 13 Part no. 164 584 71 82 Edition A 2009